JP2023138846A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine enabling effective use of space in front of a game board.SOLUTION: On the rear side of a front unit 940 provided with a second winning port 140 where a game ball enters, a ball feeding unit 700 provided with an open hole 981c that is a passage in communication with the second winning port 140 is arranged with a base plate 60 (a game board 13) interposed therebetween. With this, it becomes unnecessary to form a ball feeding passage for game balls entering the second winning port 140 at the front face of the game board 13. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively use the space on the front side of the game board 13.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 119

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A gaming machine is known which includes a ball entry unit that is provided with a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is disposed. (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-131046

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that space on the front side of the gaming board is wasted.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can effectively utilize the space in front of the game board.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a ball entry unit having a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port; and a game board on which the unit is arranged, the game board has an opening formed in the board thickness direction, and the ball entry unit is connected to the ball entry port and the ball entry port. a first unit disposed on the front side of the game board, and a first unit disposed through the opening of the game board on the back side of the first unit; a second unit having a second passage connected to the second unit.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein at least a part of the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the second unit has a smaller external shape than the first unit. and is arranged at a position overlapping the first unit when viewed from the front.

According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, at least a front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light-transmitting material.

According to the game machine according to the first aspect, the space in front of the game board can be effectively utilized.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

According to the gaming machine according to the third aspect, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. 20 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 19. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. 22 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 21. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. 24 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 23. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 2nd aspect. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 25. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 3rd aspect. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 27. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rear base. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front base and the irradiation unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front base. 35 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. FIG. It is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member taken along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. 37. FIG. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39(a). (a) to (c) are partially enlarged sectional views of the projection unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). (a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit as seen in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 44(b). (a) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a sectional view of the first block taken along the XLVIb-XLVIb line in FIG. 46(a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block taken along the line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the second position. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the second position. (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connection member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connection member in the intermediate position, and (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connection member in the second position. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gear and the connecting member. (a) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 55, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. , is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56. (a) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove taken along the line LXb-LXb in FIG. 60(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. (a) is a side view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and (b) is a side view of the projection plate as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 65(c) is a sectional view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of an irradiation unit in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the irradiation unit. (a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of a projection unit in the vicinity of the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front base. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the projection unit. (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the front base in a state where the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (a) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. It is a front view of the game board in 7th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base board, a winning opening unit, and a throwing unit. (a) is a front view of the winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning a prize mouth unit. (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective back view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit. . (a) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). (a) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93(b). It is a sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit taken along the XCVII-XCVII line in FIG. 83. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit taken along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 97. (a) is a front view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit, (b) is a back view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit, and (c) is a top view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of specific winning a prize mouth unit 950. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning a prize opening unit along the CII-CII line of FIG. 99(c). (a) and (b) are perspective front views of a specific winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of the specific winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the specific winning a prize mouth unit taken along the line CIVb-CIVb of FIG. 104(a). (a) is a top view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit and a drive unit, (b) is a side view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit and a drive unit. (a) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 105(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIb-CVIb line in FIG. 106(a). It is a sectional view of a drive unit. (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is a front view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a side view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. (a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit in range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). (a) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit. (a) is a front view of the replacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit. (a) is a sectional view of the replacement unit taken along the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line in FIG. 117(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the replacement unit taken along the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line in FIG. 118(a). 82 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line CXIX-CXIX in FIG. 81. FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). It is a back view of a front unit and a displacement member in an 8th embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a drive unit in a ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a drive unit and a displacement member in a tenth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective back view of a back base and a displacement member in an 11th embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. It is an exploded perspective back view of a back base and a displacement member in a 12th embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. (a) is a rear view of the front unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line CXXIXb-CXXIXb in FIG. 129(a). (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the CXXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 130(a). (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the CXXXIb-CXXXIb line of FIG. 131(a). (a) is a side view of a drive unit in a 15th embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the seventeenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic rear view of the winning opening unit in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 135(a). (a) is a schematic diagram of the winning opening unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). (a) is a schematic diagram of the winning opening unit viewed from the back, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137(a).

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 1 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 2. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize winning machine. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 76 formed of The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (top left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode by the lighting state, or indicate whether it is in the variable mode by the lighting state. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 1, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is in a gaming state where the probability is not changing or the time is being shortened (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is opened is changed, and it is longer than during the normal period. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in an open state (open state), the access to the second prize opening 140 is different from when the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, one winning The first electric accessory 140a may be opened more often than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and the first electric accessory At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is released, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are released with one win. It may be possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol to be increased compared to the normal one without changing the number of times the second symbol is played.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 66 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second winning hole can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a per win, etc. 140 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize opening 140. This first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a It becomes an open state (enlarged state) and becomes a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving period, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change or time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 140 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning hole 140, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state. Since the ball is easy to hit, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R jackpot by opening the first electric accessory 140a and winning the second prize opening 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment allows the player to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 so as to represent the symbol. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, for example, It may also be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Ru. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 481, 491, 661, and 880, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control device 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and also controls the payout control device 111 to issue a payout initialization command to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. Moreover, FIGS. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In addition, in FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485 of the displacement unit 400, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the retracted position, whereas in FIG. 8, the slide unit The left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protrusion member 485 of 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are shown respectively displaced to the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are installed in the internal space of the back case 300, respectively. They are accommodated in order.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and having a picture frame shape when viewed from the front, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R and a right displacement member 420R disposed on the base member 410 so as to be displaceable. The left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protrusion member 485 are retracted to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (i.e., the third symbol display device 81) can be displaced between the projecting position projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) that drive the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485), By selecting the driving means to drive, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied (forming a plurality of types of displacement modes). Details of this structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape in front view disposed in front of the displacement unit 400, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and a projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner circumferential side of the base member 610. It includes a plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display on the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, and when light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is reflected into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

In this case, the projection unit 600 adopts a structure that increases the efficiency of the light emitted from the LED 651 entering the projection plate member 620, and intensifies the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns or designs). can be brought to light clearly). Further, a structure is adopted that increases workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610. Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 disposed at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. The other end of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between a retracted position above the opening 301a of the back case 300 (i.e., the third symbol display device 81) and an extended position extending toward the front side. Yes (see Figures 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a biasing spring SP that biases the displacement member 850, and at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the biasing spring SP By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) around the balance position (predetermined position) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

Next, the displacement unit 400 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and displacement members (a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420L and member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) that apply driving force to the displacement member, and as described above, the lower drive mechanism When displacing the displacement member by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when displacing the displacement member by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when displacing the displacement member by driving the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is configured to be able to be displaced in different ways. The details of the structure will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R, which are formed as displacement members that perform effects by displacement. , the left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the truck member 440, the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is an elongated member disposed in a vertical position, and has a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 drilled in the upper end, and a slider drilled in the lower end. A moving groove 423 is provided. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

The length of the connecting shaft 421 is set such that the tip of the connecting shaft 421 protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L. (see FIGS. 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421, and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

The connection hole 422 is a hole with a circular cross section, and one of the two connection shafts 441 of a truck member 440, which will be described later, is rotatably inserted therethrough. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative attitude change (rotation about the axis of the connection hole 422) relative to the cart member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a drive pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L, which will be described later, is rotatably and slidably inserted therethrough. . Therefore, when only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the attitude of the left displacement member 420L relative to the base member 410 changes (rotates). can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is installed between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L and is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, and has a connecting hole 431 bored at one end (upper end). and a sliding pin 432 protruding from the back surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole with a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted therethrough. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a sliding groove 410a formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing its relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The trolley member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending in the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper part of the base member 410 (upper intermediate part 410f and upper front part 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a member that includes two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel, and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the cart member 440 as each rolling wheel 442 of the cart member 440 rolls on the rolling surface. .

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing upward in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the truck member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended and supported by the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the cart member 440.

The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide section extending along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper part of the base member 410 (upper middle part 410f and upper front part 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a long plate-shaped member, and is carved along the longitudinal direction on two connecting holes 451 into which the two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 are rotatably inserted, and on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L. A rack gear 452 is provided.

Here, the right displacement member 420R is approximately symmetrical to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R is approximately symmetrical to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R is approximately symmetrical to the upper left rack 450L. Since they have substantially the same configuration, the same parts are given the same reference numerals and their explanation will be omitted.

However, the upper right rack 450R has a rack gear 452 engraved on the front thereof. Further, the upper right rack 450R has a portion where the connecting hole 451 is formed offset toward the front side, and is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction than the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. In this case, a pinion gear 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410 is meshed with both rack gears 452 .

Therefore, along with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slides) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Since the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (i.e., 1), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are The directions of displacement can be opposite directions (directions toward or away from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 may be an even number, and the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R may be displaced in the same direction.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Moreover, illustration of the raised cover 413 is omitted in FIGS. 13 to 16.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a drive mechanism in which the pinion gear 482 is meshed. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protrusion member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the back of the protrusion member 485, and the rack gear 486. It mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) to which the leading gear 487a is meshed, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R which are meshed to the tail gear 487e of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 that protrudes from the back of the left front cover 411L. Ru. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

The drive gear 483 includes an eccentric pin 483a located eccentrically from its rotation center and protruding from the back surface. The drive arm 484 has a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted. It includes a driving pin 484c that projects from the front at the end opposite to the side where the supporting hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484 is rotated from the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction about the pivot hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The protruding member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a into which the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is disposed in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescoping linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical position with its expansion and contraction direction along the vertical direction. Note that the slide rail SL is a base end rail disposed on the front side of the base member 410, a distal end rail disposed on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a base end rail disposed between the base end rail and the distal end rail. It includes an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protrusion member 485 is pushed up or down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded or contracted, and the protrusion member 485 is moved to the base. The member 410 is raised and lowered in the vertical direction.

The rack gear 486 is carved along the ascending and descending direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is arranged on the front and right front of the base member 410, with the leading gear 487a meshing with the rack gear 486. They are each rotatably supported between the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by raising and lowering the protruding member 485, the linear motion of the rack gear 486 can be used to rotate the gear train (gears 487a to 487e).

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and include a rack gear 488a carved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction, and a drive pin 488b protruding from the front at the longitudinal end. and are provided respectively. These lower left rack 488L and lower right rack 488R are located at different positions in the vertical direction, with their rack gears 488a facing each other, and between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412 in the left-right direction (width direction). , the left-right direction in FIG. 19).

The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the back side through an opening 410b drilled in the base member 410, so that the gear 487e at the end of the gear train is attached to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. It is meshed with each rack gear 488a of rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is rotated as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gear 487a at the end causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to be mutually moved. They can be linearly moved in opposite directions (towards each other or away from each other).

The drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are projected to the front side through the linear insertion grooves 410c formed in the base member 410, so that the left displacement member 420L can be moved as described above. and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In addition, the extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the truck member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of linear movement of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is approximately parallel to the direction of linear movement of the upper left rack 450L and upper right rack 450R, which will be described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 17 and 18, for easy understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are illustrated between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a drive mechanism in which the pinion gear 492 is meshed. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

The base member 410 has a divided structure in which the upper part (the upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape when viewed from the front) is formed by overlapping an upper rear part 410e, an upper intermediate part 410f, and a front part 410g in order on the front side. be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f, and a pinion gear is attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 that protrudes from the back surface of the projecting portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a located eccentrically from its rotation center and protruding from the back surface. The drive arm 494 has a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and A linear drive groove 494c is provided at an end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494 is rotated from the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction about the pivot hole 494a, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced from side to side.

As described above, the distal end of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating around the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c, which is displaced from side to side, to act on the connecting shaft 421, the bogie member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced from side to side.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced left and right and the trolley member 440 (rolling wheels 442) rolls on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L is moved to the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. The right displacement member 420R can be displaced. Note that the rolling surfaces on which the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440 roll are formed in the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protrusion member 485). The first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are rear views of the displacement unit 400 in FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. FIG.

Note that FIGS. 19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 correspond to the left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R. This corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is placed in the extended position in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed at the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed at the outermost position (the position where they are furthest apart from each other in the left-right direction), and A protruding member 485 is arranged at the lowest position.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are respectively driven from this state, the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 is reached after passing through the state shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. To the state (the extended position in the first aspect), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protrusion member 485 is raised. In addition, in the extended position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protrusion member 485 are in a combined state (the side surfaces of the three are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state shown in FIG. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the protruding member 485, the protruding member 485 is raised (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Furthermore, when the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e), and the rack gear 488a (FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surfaces of the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction in which they approach each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is 421. As a result, the cart member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). (see 18).

Further, when the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side of the left displacement member 420R is The upper end side (truck member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In this embodiment, the displacement amount of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is such that the displacement amount on the lower end side is smaller than the displacement amount on the upper end side ( That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is made shorter than the movable range of the truck member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20) at the same time, and the extended position in the first mode ( The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so that the position (see FIGS. 23 and 24) is reached substantially simultaneously. That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (carriage member 440) is made faster than on the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

Thereby, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotation while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the displacement member while rotating the posture in this manner with a configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the first drive means. This is the first time that it has become possible to use a drive means for this purpose.

Furthermore, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (the truck member 440) is different from that on the lower end side (the driving pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the truck member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the driving pin 488b, changes in the distance between the two can be absorbed. That is, there is no need to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b can be formed to be rotatable and slidable, which reduces product cost and improves operational reliability and durability. be able to.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are respectively driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the state shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 After passing through the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 (retracted position), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction in which they are separated from each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protruding member 485 is lowered.

Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in a non-driven state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, A second mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In addition, in the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25. Note that FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the extended position in the second embodiment.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (disposed at the retracted position), the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is rotated by the left displacement member 420L on its upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422). It is placed in an orientation that allows rotation around the center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pin of the drive arm 484 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485, the protruding member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced (linearly moved) in a direction in which they approach each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated about their upper ends (the axis of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in a non-driven state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and A third mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In addition, in the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27. Note that FIGS. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the extended position in the third embodiment.

Here, the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are elongated holes extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b. Member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (disposed at the retracted position), as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the drive arm The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 is acted on by the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. In addition, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, thereby displacing the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R in the direction of approaching the left displacement member 420L. (linear motion).

That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated about their lower ends (sliding groove 423 side) as rotation centers. Further, in the third aspect, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protrusion member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

Here, in the conventional game machine, a guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended to the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one type. Therefore, the performance based on the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, making it difficult to perform a performance that surprises the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, a driving motor) is changed by increasing or decreasing the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and its displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to perform a performance that surprises the player.

In contrast, the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment includes a lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and an upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), and selects (changes) the drive state thereof. As a result, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protrusion member 485) can be displaced in three types of modes (first mode, second mode, and third mode). That is, unlike conventional products in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one type, the effect does not become one pattern, but the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so such displacement modes can be switched. By doing so, it is possible to perform a performance that surprises the player.

In particular, in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can perform displacements in which parallel movement (linear movement) is dominant, while in the second aspect In the third aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational movement), and the movement form of the displacement can be different. can be set. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, making it easier to perform performances that surprise the player.

In this case, there are conventional products in which the center of rotation remains constant and only the direction of rotation is changed to change the displacement mode, but the second and third embodiments of this embodiment , they do not have the same center of rotation but only different directions of rotation, but the directions of rotation are different and the centers of rotation are also formed differently (in the second embodiment, the upper end side is the center of rotation, and in the third embodiment, the center of rotation is different). In this case, the lower end side is the center of rotation), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform surprising effects.

Furthermore, in the first aspect, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form that combines rotation and parallel movement (linear motion), but the direction of such rotation is the third aspect. The direction of rotation is the same as the direction of rotation in . Therefore, in the initial stages of the first aspect and the third aspect (for example, see FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually see that the displacement members are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other, and the player can distinguish between the displacement members. It can be made difficult to hit. On the other hand, in the first aspect, the protruding member 485 is raised as the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction in which they approach each other, whereas in the third aspect, the protruding member 485 is stopped. can be maintained in the same condition. That is, in the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other, if the protrusion member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the extended position in the first mode. It is possible to make the player expect that.

In the displacement unit 400, a cart member 440, a lower left rack 488L, and a lower right rack 488R are disposed (held) on a base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the cart member 440 is provided with a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R. The upper ends (connection holes 422) are rotatably connected, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are connected to the lower ends (sliding grooves 423) of the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R. Rotatably and slidably inserted.

As a result, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform linear motion (first aspect) or rotational motion (second and third aspects) including a rotational component is provided. can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove, but if the displacement member is to be slid along such a curved trajectory, a complicated structure is required ( That is, if the locus is curved, not only the mechanism for guiding the members corresponding to the truck member 440, the members corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also the respective members 440, It becomes necessary to provide a mechanism that can continuously apply driving force to 488L and 488R).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is sufficient to guide the cart member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R in the linear direction, and therefore the cart member 440 may be guided by the rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize a rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve durability and operational reliability.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in all of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect, and specifically, , one end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by the trolley member 440 rolling on a rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack. 488R is guided by sliding (linear movement) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, there is no need to provide different guide mechanisms depending on each aspect, and therefore there is no need to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, operational reliability and durability can be improved, and product costs can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape when viewed from the front, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610. A plurality of irradiation units 650 disposed surrounding the outer circumferential side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a drive force of the drive motor 661 for transmitting the driving force to the projection plate member 620. A gear train (gears 662 to 664) is mainly provided.

The base member 610 includes an annular back base 611 and an annular front base 612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the inner space.

Note that the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player in an area inside the inner periphery of the front base 612 (hereinafter referred to as the "display area") when viewed from the front, and in an area outside the inner periphery of the front base 612. (That is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter referred to as "outside the display area"), the projection plate member 620 is made invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material and allows the player to view the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side through the projection plate member 620, and also allows the player to see the display that is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or design, and is visible to the player. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620 on the back side and the front side, respectively. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

A plurality of teeth are carved along the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630, and a gear 664 at the end of the gear train meshes with the gear member 630. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a circumferentially continuous guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section between the projection plate member 620 and a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. C is guided by the guide groove 641, so that the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610. Note that detailed configurations of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit that includes a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for inputting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposed to the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (five in this embodiment) are arranged in different postures. Specifically, in this embodiment, the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 is set to pass approximately through the center of the projection plate member 620. Note that details of the structure for attaching the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is disposed on the back side of the back base 611, and a gear 662 at the head of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. Furthermore, a gear member 630 disposed on the projection plate member 620 meshes with a gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, a holding structure for the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a front view of the rear base 611. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back base 611 includes an inner upright portion 611a that stands up on the inner edge of the annular plate member, and an outer upright portion 611a that stands up on the outer edge of the annular plate member. The intermediate standing portion 611b is erected from between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611c, and the inner groove in the area surrounded by the inner erected portion 611b and the inner erected portion 611a. 611d, an outer concave portion 611e in a region surrounded by an inner upright portion 611b and an outer upright portion 611c, and a regulating protrusion 611f protruding from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner upright portion 611a stands upright from the inner edge of the annular plate member on the front side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 33), and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer standing portion 611c stands upright from the outer edge of the annular plate member on the front side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 33), and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate erected portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is formed into seven parts around the axis, and each divided end is connected to the outer standing part 611c.

The inner groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge of a projection plate member 620, which will be described later, inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner upright portion 611a, and the intermediate upright portion 611b in three directions. It is formed by

The outer groove 611e is a region for arranging an irradiation unit 650 (to be described later) inside, and is formed by being surrounded in three directions by an annular plate member, an outer standing portion 611c, and an intermediate standing portion 611b. Ru.

The regulating protrusion 611f is a protrusion that suppresses the collar C, which is pivotally supported on the front base 612, from wobbling toward the back side, and is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of a hole opened in the axis of the collar C. At the same time, it is formed to protrude from the front side. In addition, in this embodiment, the regulating protrusions 611f are formed at six locations at predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, there are inner upright portions corresponding to the inner upright portion 611a, the intermediate upright portion 611b, the outer upright portion 611c, and the regulating protrusion 611f of the back base 611. An erected portion 612a, an intermediate erected portion 612b, an outer erected portion 612c, and a shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the assembled state of the base member 610, the upright end faces of the upright parts 612a to 612c of the front base 612 overlap with the upright end faces of the upright parts 611a to 611c of the rear base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the regulating protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the back surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pins 612g are shafts with a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 is a unit that includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and allows the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. will be placed. That is, the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650 on its outer peripheral side.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the back base 611 is superimposed on the back surface of the front base 612. As a result, it is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36, the intermediate upright portion 612b of the front base 612 has a substantially semicircular notch 612b1 cut out at the end of the upright portion. Similarly, a substantially semicircular notch 611b1 is formed on the upright end side of the intermediate upright part 611b of the back base 611 at a position that is in the same phase as the notch 612b1 (Fig. 33 reference).

That is, when the upright end surfaces of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b are overlapped (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), the notch portions 611b1 and 612b2 form an opening that is substantially circular in front view. Ru. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular opening formed by the cutouts 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b, and enters the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. be done. Note that the diameter of the circular opening is set to be larger than the diameter of the light emitting part of the LED 651.

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 taken along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 38, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed into a circular plate-shaped body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a cutout portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light in a part of the outer edge.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion to facilitate placement of the collar C on the regulating protrusion 611f of the rear base 611, and is formed by cutting out a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line in a direction perpendicular to the radial direction. be done.

The reflecting portion 622 is a portion where the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and the entire area of the projection plate member 620 when viewed from the front is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a design. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is irradiated onto the reflecting section 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting section 622 and is emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the diffusely reflected light and the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, by allowing light to enter the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material with a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, is formed from a plate-shaped body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set large and arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is disposed on the back side of the projection plate member 620 (on the back side of the paper in FIG. 37), and its axis is coaxial with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 includes a tooth portion 631 carved along the outer circumferential surface, a rear surface portion 632 on the side surface on the rear side, and a rear surface portion 632 that is inclined toward the front side from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the rear surface portion 632. and an inclined surface portion 633.

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface with which the gear 664 meshes as described above, and is carved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuous from an end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined toward the front side. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is determined by the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the rear surface portion 632, and The intersection angle θ2 between the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 is set to be substantially the same (θ1=θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light-transmissive material with a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a bent approximately L-shaped cross section. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Furthermore, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface 641a on one side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, an abutment surface 641b on the other side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. It includes a front part 642 and an inclined surface part 643 that is inclined from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front part 642 to the back side.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the facing side surface of the projection plate member 620 on the front side (upper side in FIG. 38), and has a constant facing interval between the front side plane of the projection plate member 620 and the axis. formed separately.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that rotatably holds the projection plate member 620 by contacting the collar C disposed between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620, and has a cross section perpendicular to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed circularly around the axis.

Therefore, by being arranged on the projection plate member 620, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuous from an end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 and is inclined toward the back side. In addition, the angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the rear side is determined by the intersection angle θ3 between the front portion 642 and the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644. The intersection angle θ4 between the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 is set to be substantially the same (θ3=θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be explained with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39(a). 40(a) to 40(c) are partially enlarged sectional views of the projection unit 600. Note that FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c) illustrate the transition state when attaching the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. Further, FIGS. 39 and 40 illustrate a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b), when the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction is located on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 39(b) (lower side) and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (guide groove 641).

Furthermore, the distance L1 between the tip end surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface 641a of the groove forming member 640 is larger than the distance L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. is also set small (L1<L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap, the projection plate member 620 is rotated in the vertical and horizontal directions by the gap. Even if the groove forming member 640 is shifted, the contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held at the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be rotated smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c), attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 40(a), the collar C is placed on the shaft portion 612f with the projection plate member 620 placed on the front base 612.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is placed on the front base 612 by placing the groove forming member 640 inside the inner groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the distance dimension in the radial direction of the inner groove 612d is formed larger than the distance dimension in the radial direction of the groove forming member 640, and by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner groove 612d, the projection plate Member 620 can be positioned and placed.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the cutout portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f where the collar C is disposed. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the collar C can be placed on the front base 612 with the projection plate member 620 placed thereon.

Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is such that the axis of the collar C is aligned with the axis of the shaft portion 612f, and the back side (upper side in FIG. 40(a)) is placed on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 40(a)). It is performed with the person leaning towards the In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the inside of the notch 621 and the guide groove 641.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the opposite side is rotated toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(b)) about the tip of the projection C1 located inside the projection plate member 620. Thereby, the axis of the collar C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40(c), by displacing the collar C toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(c)), the tip surface of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact. It is placed in a position where the surfaces face each other. Thereafter, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be placed inside the guide groove 641.

Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of a circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are to be placed inside the groove, the rotating member must be lifted (operated) in order to place the collars. There was a problem in that the collars had to be placed and both hands were used to assemble them, resulting in poor assembly efficiency.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, so that it is not necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when placing the collar C, as described above. do not have. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the projection unit 600 assembled in this manner with the rear base 611 from the rear side.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

41(a) to 43(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. Note that in FIG. 41(b), FIG. 42(b), and FIG. 43(b), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted for ease of understanding.

In addition, in FIGS. 41(b), 42(b), and 43(b), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 is The light entering the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is illustrated in a perpendicular manner, assuming that this does not affect the invention. Furthermore, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the above-described display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is directed toward the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. The light is incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by being irradiated onto the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 620 toward the center. Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side in FIG. 41(b)).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is irradiated onto the front or back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, It is conceivable that the amount of light that enters the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side of the projection plate member 620 and travels inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed from a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, so that the projection plate member 620 has a lower refractive index. Even when the light traveling through the member 620 is irradiated onto the front or back side of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, It can be totally reflected on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of light incident from the edge of the projection plate member 620 from decreasing.

That is, when light passing through a medium with a high refractive index travels to a medium with a low refractive index, if the incident angle is increased, the light will not be incident on the medium with a low refractive index and will be totally reflected. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed into a plate-like member, and light is incident from the end face (edge) thereof, so that the incident angle of the light is made sufficiently large. Therefore, the light does not enter the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low curvature from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed from decreasing.

Similarly, regarding the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air, the refractive index of air is a value (refractive index 1) that is sufficiently smaller than the amount of transparent material. The light does not enter the air (atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed from decreasing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and can be allowed to travel toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other), the light that has been reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be made to enter the projection plate member 620 side. .

That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is in a state adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel, similar to the light at the irradiation angle α. Note that the reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the emitted light from the LED 651. can.

That is, the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651 not only enters from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated to the groove forming member 640 can enter from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting part 622 of the projection plate member 620, so that the light reflected by the reflecting part 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. By increasing the amount of , patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult to see from the player, and the appearance is accordingly reduced. Deterioration can be suppressed.

Here, the light that enters the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is different from the light that enters the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. Since the position of the groove forming member 640 is shifted from the position of the groove forming member 640, the incident angle of the light when the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is irradiated becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to completely reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on the inner side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected. The above-mentioned state (a state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle β and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed so that its intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the front portion 642 and the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 (FIG. 38 ), after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 644, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light at the irradiation angle β can be directed to the projection plate member. The area reflected to the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected at the outer edge of the groove forming member 640 and can be easily made to enter the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and is allowed to travel toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other), the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be made to enter the projection plate member 620.

That is, in a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, since the gear member 630 is formed from a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, irradiation is prevented. The projected light can be made incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light that is incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620, similar to the light at the irradiation angle α, and is caused to proceed toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. Note that the reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light from the light source A emitted at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

That is, the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651 not only enters the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated to the gear member 630 can enter from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting section 622 of the projection plate member 620, thereby reducing the amount of light reflected at the reflecting section and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. By increasing the number of images, patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the gear member 630 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance deteriorates accordingly. can be restrained from doing so.

Further, compared to the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is smaller than the light incident on the gear member 630 when the gear member 630 is connected to the light source A in the back direction (downward in FIG. 43(a)). The incident angle when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is made smaller as the position is shifted. This makes it difficult to completely reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on its side surfaces, but at least a portion of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, resulting in the above-mentioned state. (a state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed so that its intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38 ), after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 634, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted at the irradiation angle γ can be The area of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected at the outer edge of the gear member 630 and can be easily made to enter the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the attachment structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

44(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44(b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). Further, FIG. 45(a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 as seen in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 45(b) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 as seen along the FIG. Note that FIGS. 44 and 45 illustrate a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (in this embodiment, two each) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are provided.

The substrate member 652 is formed from an elastically deformable material into a horizontally long belt shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LEDs 651 are light emitting means that emit light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along the left-right direction (FIG. 44(b)).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and the two first blocks 653 are arranged on the longitudinal center side of the substrate member 652. At the same time, second blocks 654 are arranged on both sides of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed from a resin material in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and have higher rigidity (characteristic of being less likely to be elastically deformed) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, when it is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be explained with reference to FIG. 46.

46(a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46(b) is a sectional view of the first block 653 taken along the line XLVIb-XLVIb in FIG. 46(a). Further, FIG. 46(c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46(d) is a sectional view of the second block 654 taken along the line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c).

The first block 653 is connected to the front side (FIG. 46(a), paper surface It is shaped like a box with an open front side.

A fastening hole h is recessed in the front end surface of the opposing side wall part 653b (standing upright from the short side of the bottom wall part 653a) among the four side wall parts 653b, and the screw S1 can be fastened thereto. It is said that Further, side wall portions 653b other than the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected by a connecting wall 653c, and a protrusion 653c1 is provided protruding from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

The second block 654 is formed from a bottom wall portion 654a that is rectangular in front view, and a side wall portion 654b that stands upright from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side (FIG. 46(c), this side of the page). It is shaped like a box with open sides). An opening 654a1, which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the bottom wall portion 654a, through which an electrical connection line can be inserted.

A fastening hole h is recessed in the front end surface of the side wall part 654b, which stands up from the short side of the bottom wall part 654a of the four side wall parts 654b, so that a screw S1 can be fastened thereto. Further, the side walls 653b standing from the long sides of the bottom wall 654a are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c has a fastening hole h recessed in its front end surface, and a screw S1 can be concluded.

In the first block 653 and the second block 654, insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are bored at two places in each of the side wall parts 653b and 654b that stand up from the long sides of the bottom wall parts 653a and 654a (Fig. 45 (a) and FIG. 46(b)). The holding pin 612g of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. This makes it possible to position the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and to hold them at these positions.

Note that the first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(a)) (i.e., a virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h). , and is formed in a shape that is symmetrical with respect to a second imaginary plane that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 46(a)) and is perpendicular to the first imaginary plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two first blocks 653 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the first block 653 can be shared, reducing the number of parts and reducing product cost. I can do it. Furthermore, when assembling the first block 653 to the board member 620, the first block 653 does not have vertical or longitudinal directionality with respect to the board member 620, which improves workability during assembly work. can be achieved.

Similarly, the second block 654 is connected to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(c)) (i.e., a virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h). It is formed into a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two second blocks 654 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the second block 654 can be shared, reducing the number of parts and reducing product cost. I can do it. Furthermore, when assembling the second block 654 to the board member 620, since the second block 654 does not have vertical directionality with respect to the board member 620, workability during assembly work can be improved. I can do it.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 44 and 45. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652, with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and with a predetermined interval between adjacent blocks. Ru.

Specifically, the first block 653 and the second block 654 have their front surfaces overlapped with the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole drilled in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 to the front side.

On the board member 652, only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front side, and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back side of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with an open front, and are arranged with the open side overlapping the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 653 and 654 are provided with a recess on the side that is superimposed (arranged) on the board member 652, electronic components and connectors mounted on the board member 652 are placed in the recess (inner space). can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and connectors can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to suppress damage to the electronic components and connectors caused by contact with surrounding displacing members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can.

Further, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, since such a circuit can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) due to contact with surrounding displacing members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can. In addition, since the portion of the substrate member 652 where both blocks 653 and 654 are not provided is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape convex toward the back side (see FIG. 34), the circuit can be projected accordingly. It can be spaced apart from the plate member 620. Thereby, damage to the circuit (disconnection) can be suppressed even in areas where both blocks 653 and 654 are not provided.

A method for installing (assembling) the irradiation unit 650 configured in this manner on the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 in an area between the intermediate upright portion 611b and the outer upright portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, each of the holding pins 612g erected from the back surface of the front base 612 is inserted into each of the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. .

As a result, both blocks 653 and 654 (i.e., the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the installation position of the irradiation unit 650 (i.e., the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34 reference). Thereafter, the front surface of the rear base 611 is superimposed on the rear surface of the front base 612, so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed (assembled) on the base member 610.

In this embodiment, when the irradiation unit 650 is disposed on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are disposed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer circumferential side of the projection plate member 620, as described above. In other words, not only the circumferential spacing between the LEDs 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential spacing between the LEDs 651 in that one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to that one irradiation unit 650 are the same as the others. be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 allows the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of LEDs 651, the arrangement (attachment) of each LED 651 is such that the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 is adjusted to face the center of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 is arranged respectively. It is necessary to do so, which increases the time and effort of the installation work.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on a board member 652 that is formed to be elastically deformable, so one board member 652 (irradiation unit 650) By arranging (attaching) the LEDs 651 to the front base 612 (base member 610), the installation work of a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the effort required to arrange the LED 651 can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, by inserting the holding pins 612g of the back base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the board member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, and the LED 651 can be held in a predetermined posture. The direction of the irradiation surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, there is no need to individually adjust the irradiation surfaces of a plurality of LEDs 651 and assemble them to the back base 612, and each LED 651 can be assembled by simply inserting the holding pin 612g into the insertion holes 653b1, 654b1 of both blocks 653, 654. Since the attitude (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), the effort required to arrange (install) the LED 651 can also be reduced from this point of view.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the rear base 612, vibrations etc. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture by suppressing the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 due to external force input, or by correcting the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 itself. As a result, the attitude of each LED 651 is suppressed from being affected by warpage or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in a region of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the region surrounded by the four side walls 653b and 654b in front view). will be established. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and deflection of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external forces such as vibrations, or it is possible to easily correct the warpage and deflection of the substrate member 652 itself, so that the posture of the substrate member 652 can be adjusted to a desired posture. It can be easily defined. As a result, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by warping or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and that orientation can be further maintained. It's easy to do.

Further, each LED 651 is mounted on the front side of the board member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the board member 652, so that the board member 652 is The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while achieving the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (left-right direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer circumferential side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, one of the two fastening holes h of the second block 654 is formed in the connecting wall 654c, so that the longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 is can be shortened. Further, the second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 with the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed facing the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are located at both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, ensuring uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620, while ensuring the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620. ) can be shortened to provide a space between adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be disposed using this space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily brought close to each other.

On the other hand, since the first block 653 has two fastening holes h formed in the connecting wall 654c, the distance between the fastening holes h and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position where the board member 652 is fastened and fixed to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LED 651 to be affected by the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration, and it is possible to easily correct the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 itself especially in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the attitude of each LED 651 from being affected by warping or bending of the substrate member 652, so that the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. It's easy to do.

In this case, in the first block 653, since the distance between the two fastening holes h becomes large, there is a possibility that the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the two fastening holes h becomes weak. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall parts 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed, and a protrusion 653c1 protruding from the connecting wall 653c is inserted through a hole formed in the substrate member 652. Insert it into the hole. Therefore, due to the engagement between the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and deflection of the board member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warpage and bending of the board member 652 itself. The attitude of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined to a desired attitude. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1, and the number of parts can be reduced, so the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction. It can be made easier to maintain.

Note that both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction (outermost in the longitudinal direction, left end and right end in FIG. 45(b)) are free ends (that is, not restrained by the second block 654). There is a possibility that the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a first block 653 and a second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the arc center is located on the front side. ) (see FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the back surface of both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a back base 830 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front base 820 stacked on the front side of the back base 830, and a front base 820 stacked on the back side of the back base 830. A drive motor 880 arranged, a displacement member 850 that is rotated with respect to the back base 830 and front base 820 by the drive force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is disposed in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

The rear base 830 has an opening 831 formed in a size that allows the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 to be inserted therethrough, and an opening 831 that protrudes from the respective axes of the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes formed shaft portions 832 and 833, and a back side regulating portion 834 that projects toward the front side and extends in a curved shape.

A shaft portion of a drive motor 880 attached to the back side of the back base 830 is inserted through the opening 831 . Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 disposed on the front side of the rear base 830.

Furthermore, the opening 831 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. Thereby, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the back base 830. As a result, the number of work steps required to replace parts when the transmission gear 861 is damaged can be reduced.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts on which transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 to be described later are supported and rotatably held, respectively, and are formed to protrude from the rear base 830 toward the front side in a cylindrical shape.

The rear side regulating portion 834 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870, which will be described later, in the rear direction (towards the back of the paper in FIG. 47), and is provided protruding from the front side of the rear base 830, and is a projection that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870, which will be described later. It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed into a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and has a slightly larger outer shape than the rear base 830. The front base 820 includes a shaft support 821 that is recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side to the back side of the paper in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 that stands on the edge of the back side, and a side wall 822 that protrudes toward the back side. It mainly includes a protrusion 823 that protrudes from the back side, a front-side regulating part 824 that extends in a curved shape, and a bulge part 825 that protrudes from the back side.

The shaft support 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 described later is inserted, and is recessed in the lower right side of the front base 820 when viewed from the front.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap between the back base 830 and the front base 820 in which a transmission mechanism 860 and a connecting member 870, which will be described later, are arranged, and the thickness of the transmitting mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with larger dimensions than the above dimensions. Thereby, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened together, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be disposed between them in a movable state.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion that is engaged with one end side (upper side in FIG. 48) of a biasing spring SP, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes from the back side of the front base 820.

The front-side regulating portion 824 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (towards the front in the paper plane of FIG. 47), and is provided protruding from the rear side of the front base 820, and also extends along the displacement of the connecting member 870. It is extended in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall disposed laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP, which will be described later, with a predetermined distance therebetween, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the front base 820 toward the back side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, which mesh in series, so that the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is transmitted to the transmission gear 863 via the transmission gears 861 and 862. will be transmitted up to.

The transmission gear 863 has a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a projection portion 863c that projects in an arc shape centered on the shaft, and a rotational position of the tooth portion 863a. It mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting.

The tooth portion 863a is a toothing surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, and thereby allows driving force to be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863b is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870, and is protruded in a cylindrical shape toward the back side, and the shaft is arranged at a different position (eccentric position) from the rotation axis of the transmission gear 863.

The protruding portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, and is formed protrudingly on the outer edge portion of the back side of the transmission gear 863, and is formed around the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is curved into a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of a position detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and is formed by the teeth 863a of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to protrude radially outward on the side surface that is not covered.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the driving force of the rotation of the transmitting mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, and is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front, and has a shape extending in the front-rear direction at one end of the curved shape (upper end in FIG. 48). A gear-side connection hole 871 formed through the gear side, a displacement-side connection hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and an abutment formed to protrude upward from the outside of the curved portion. 873.

The gear-side connection hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connection member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connection member 870.

The displacement-side connection hole 872 is a through-hole into which a shaft portion 853 of a displacement member 850 (described later) is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for regulating the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and its tip is disposed between the opposing rear side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. be done.

In addition, the abutting portion 873 has a width dimension in the front-rear direction at the tip that is slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing rear side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, by displacing the abutment portion 873 in the gap between the rear side regulating portion 834 and the front side regulating portion 824, the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced is increased. You can prevent it from happening. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-back direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by coming into contact with the front base 820 or the back base 830.

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end of the displacement member 850 (the right end in FIG. 47), is formed into a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . Further, a shaft support 841 is formed in the cover member 840 and is recessed in a circular shape from the back side toward the front side.

The shaft support 841 is a groove that holds (spins) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting the front end of the pin member 890, and is located at a position facing the shaft support 821 of the front base 820. is formed. Thereby, the pin member 890 is disposed between the opposing shaft support 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support 841 of the cover member 840, so that falling off from the vertical displacement unit 800 can be suppressed.

The displacement member 850 is a member decorated on the front side, and one end (right side in FIG. 47) is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the other end (left side in FIG. 47) is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front. The displacement member 850 is formed to include a shaft hole 851 into which the pin member 890 is inserted, a projection 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 which transmits the driving force of the connection member 870.

The shaft hole 851 is a through hole into which the pin member 890 is inserted, as described above, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at one end of the displacement member, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. is also formed large. Therefore, in the displacement member 850, the pin member 890 is inserted into the shaft hole 851, and the pin member 890 is disposed between the facing shaft support 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support 841 of the cover member 840. , the displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 in a rotatable state about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

The projection 852 is a projection to which the other end (lower end in FIG. 50) of the biasing spring SP is engaged, and is formed to protrude from the back side of the displacement member 850. Further, when the displacement member 850 is placed on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position that protrudes from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 toward the back side, and the protrusion distance is such that the protrusion distance is on the front side of the back base. is formed to a position that approximately coincides with the side surface of the Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the biasing spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the direction of gravity relative to the front base 820.

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870, and when the displacement member 850 is placed on the front base 820, it is located below the front base 820 (see FIG. 50). It is formed protrudingly at the lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connection member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connection member 870.

As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed from a rod-shaped metal body that is harder than the displacement member 850. This can suppress damage to the rotating shaft when force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

Furthermore, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates is determined by the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft supports 821 and 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistor can be divided into two parts, it is possible to prevent parts from being damaged due to an increase in the resistance at one location.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. FIG. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. It is.

FIG. 54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. It is. Note that in FIGS. 54 to 56, the rear base 830 is shown with the rear base 830 removed for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (left side in FIG. 52) is placed upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is placed upward, A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is placed in an upwardly suspended posture.

In addition, in the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b connects the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870. The straight line is placed on the same straight line.

Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can create a state (ie, dead center) in which no force component is generated in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is placed in the first position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member 850 and improve durability.

From the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880, the drive motor 880 is rotationally driven, and each transmission gear 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated. The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed down as the shaft portion 863b is rotated. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 (lower side in FIGS. 54 and 55) pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

In this case, as the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the connection member 870 are displaced. The straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 is in a state of tolerance. Therefore, the state in which the displacement member 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 (ie, the dead center) can be released. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 begins to rotate in the rotational direction that displaces the displacement member 850 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 54), the force that pulls the gear-side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780 due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 is reduced. , can be applied in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 rotates. As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 during displacement from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (i.e., the state located at the dead center), power is supplied to the drive motor 880. Explain what happens when you turn it off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the transmission gear 863 At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connection hole 871 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 are approximately perpendicular, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP occur. It is assumed that the forces are balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position described later, by turning off the power supply to the drive motor 880, the displacement member 850 is moved around the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be caused to perform reciprocating displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be made into an orthogonal projection of a uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connection member 870, the displacement described above (orthogonal projection motion of uniform circular motion) is different. In this manner, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, by simply turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, variations in displacement can be increased, and the structure and control can be improved. Since there is no need for complexity, product costs can be reduced and reliability can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotated about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force to the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is released, and the effect of gravity on the displacement member 850 is removed. When the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement due to the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP, the displacement of the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to linear movement in the vertical direction. The displacement can also be a combination of rotational motion about the shaft hole 851 as the rotation center. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be displaced in an interesting manner.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) as the displacement member 850 is displaced, and rotates the transmission gear 863. Since the attitude of 863 is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotary member among the push and pull directions. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocated, the amount of resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connection member 870 can be changed. As a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be varied, and the displacement member can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 are Since the straight line connecting the axes is approximately perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axes of the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, the force in the push-pull direction is The magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the balance position (intermediate position), and the force component can be decreased in either direction of push or pull from the balance position. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocated, the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed approximately symmetrically around the balanced position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 is This makes it easier to continue.

From the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is moved further downward. is displaced. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed down as the shaft portion 863b is rotated. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (left side in FIG. 53) is placed in the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is placed downward. , a connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed below. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is disposed downward, so that the displacement member 850 can be pushed downward.

In addition, in the second position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863, the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side connection of the connection member 870. The straight line connecting the axes of the hole 872 is arranged at the same straight line length.

Therefore, in the second position, the displacement member 850 can create a state (ie, a dead center) in which no force component is generated in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is placed at the second position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member 850 and improve durability.

Next, referring to FIG. 57, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described. 57(a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first position, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the transmitting gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the intermediate position. (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. Note that in FIGS. 57(a) to 57(c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the coupling member 870) is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), in the first position, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is disposed at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the back base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, so that the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the back base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, the displacement member 850 is preferably placed in a stopped state in order to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player by disposing the displacement member 850 upward. However, by increasing the resistance for driving the displacement member 850, it is possible to easily maintain the stopped state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 57(c), a state in which power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated beyond a certain level (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is In the state in which the driving range θ6 is being driven, the connecting member 870 and the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated beyond a certain level, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the transmitting gear 863 and the rear base 830 can be increased, so that the resistance when displacing the connecting member 870 can be increased. can be made smaller.

Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace the displacement member 850 in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time. , the displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(c), in the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

Here, when displacing a vertically displacing displaceable member downward and stopping it, the gravity of the displacing member is added to the inertia force at the time of stopping, so the problem is that the displacing member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863. The force when stopping the transmission gear 863 is divided into two forces: the force that is stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863, and the force that is stopped when the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (drive of the drive motor 880) is stopped. can be dispersed into As a result, the displacement member 850 that has been displaced from the first position to the second position can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described. 58(a) to 58(c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. Note that FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c) illustrate transition states from the first position. Further, in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the coupling member 870) is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced through the first drive range θ5, the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced from the first position to the second position. The portion where the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced as the position changes.

Therefore, when rotating the transmission gear 863 from the first position, the resistance to displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced as the displacement member 850 is displaced, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Furthermore, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacing member 850 can be increased while displacing the displacing member 850 to the first position, which is the retracted position. When the displacement member 850 is moved to a certain position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be quickly brought to a stopped state.

That is, when displacing and stopping the displacement member 850, it is difficult to quickly establish a stopped state due to the inertia force that stops the operation, but since the resistance of the displacement member 850 when stopping can be increased, the stopped state can be quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced through the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not disposed at opposing positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance to displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the extending operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

In addition, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement about the intermediate position (balanced position), the protrusion The generation of resistance due to the portion 863c can be avoided, and the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed smoothly.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c). 59(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is located between the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830. will be placed in

That is, the front side regulating part 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating part 834 of the back base 830 are formed into a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the abutting part 873 of the connecting member 870. This restricts displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction.

Here, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state where the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872, so that the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are tilted in the front-back direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 due to the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there was a problem in that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 was deformed.

On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from tilting in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59(c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830 is at a position facing the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be set to a state where it is not located.

Thereby, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 and the front base 820 and the rear base 830 at the second position can be increased. As a result, the resistance when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position can be reduced, making it easier to displace the displacement member 850 from the second position.

Further, in the vertical displacement unit 800, the contact portion 873 is located approximately on a straight line connecting the axis of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axis of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870, and It is disposed on the opposite side to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 across the axis of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 shakes with respect to the front base 820 and the rear base 830, the abutting portion 873 of the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the front base 820 and the rear base 830, thereby preventing the shaft of the transmission gear 863. The inclination of the portion 863b and the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620 was set smaller than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620 was set smaller than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. The outer diameter dimensions are set to be the same as those of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640.

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

60(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, gear member 630, and groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60(b) is a projection taken along the line LXb-LXb in FIG. 60(a). FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 2640.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 2620 on the back side and the front side, respectively. The projection plate member 2620 is formed into a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and its outer diameter is the same as the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. Further, the projection plate member 2620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light in a part of the outer edge.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material with a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. A guide groove 2641 is provided. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 60(b)) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Furthermore, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and is formed to have a concave width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide groove 2641.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. Note that in FIG. 61(b), FIG. 62(b), and FIG. 63(b), cross-sectional lines are omitted for ease of understanding.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 61(b), 62(b), and 63(b), light from light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The angle of refraction at this time is assumed to have no effect on the present invention, and the light entering the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is illustrated in a state in which the light is orthogonal. Furthermore, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, similar to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is directed toward the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. The light is incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by being irradiated onto the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 2620 toward the center (axis). Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

Note that in this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger external dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge of the projection plate member 2620 can be placed near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

As shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, irradiation irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side in FIG. 62(a)) from the guide groove 641. The light at the angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light irradiated within the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axis of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, similarly to the first embodiment, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other), the light irradiated onto the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is transferred to the projection plate member 2620. It can be made to enter.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the groove forming member 2640 on the back side of the guide groove 641 (lower side in FIG. 62(a)) is irradiated with light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651. The light having the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the edge of the groove forming member 2640 on the back side.

The light irradiated within the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated onto the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and is reflected. The reflected light can be made to enter the projection plate member 2620 by being irradiated onto the side surface at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other).

That is, by recessing the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light that enters the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 can be directed to the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and made incident on the projection plate member 2620.

Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 in a recessed manner on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, it can serve both the role of holding the color C and the role of concentrating light on the projection plate member 2620. .

Furthermore, compared to the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) that enters the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the addition of the irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the LED 651. .

Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult to see from the player, and the appearance is accordingly reduced. Deterioration can be suppressed.

Note that among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, the light irradiating the gear member 630 is the same as that in the first embodiment, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. In the first embodiment, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are in contact with the ground over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620, but the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are , a surface floating relative to the projection plate member 3620 is formed.

First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, gear member 3630, and groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) is a projection on the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630, and a groove forming member 640.

65(a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, gear member 3630, and groove forming member 640 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and FIG. 65(c) is a sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 taken along the line LXVb-LXVb, and FIG. and a sectional view of a groove forming member 640.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed into a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 3620 on the back side and the front side. placed on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 that protrudes toward the front side and the back side is formed on the outer edge thereof.

The protrusion 3623 has a substantially triangular cross section that protrudes toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64(b)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) toward the outer edge. Further, the tip of the protrusion 3623 protruding toward the front side is set on the line of an imaginary line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of a groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640, which will be described later. be done. On the other hand, the tip of the protrusion 3623 protruding toward the back side is set on an imaginary line G connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of a groove 3635 formed in a gear member 3630, which will be described later. Ru.

The gear member 3630 is formed into a plate-shaped body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 3630 also has grooves 3635 recessed in the front side (upper side of FIG. 64(b)) at predetermined intervals, and screws formed through the gear member 3635 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A stopper hole 636 is provided.

The groove 3635 is a groove extending in the radial direction, and is formed on both sides of the circumference of each stopper hole 636. Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is placed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64(b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed into a plate-shaped body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 has grooves 3645 recessed at a predetermined interval on the side surface of the back side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) and penetratingly formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. An opening 646 for screwing is provided.

The groove 3645 is a groove extending in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thereby, when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

In this case, the surface where the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are in contact with the ground has an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is inserted, as shown in FIG. The surfaces overlap in the radial direction. Thereby, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress the holding force from decreasing. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to ground the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described.

66(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. Note that in FIG. 66(b), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted for ease of understanding.

In addition, in FIG. 66(b), similarly to the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 has no effect on the present invention. The light entering the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown to be orthogonal. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is emitted from the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by being irradiated onto the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center (axis side). Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, so that the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is transmitted to the reflecting portion 622. can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can easily reach the reflection part 622, so the light reflected by the reflection part 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened, and the pattern It is possible to make the design stand out clearly.

On the other hand, light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640, the gear member 3630, and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is The light is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the above configuration.

Therefore, by making the light from the light source other than light source A of the LED 651 projected onto the projection plate member 3620 side enter the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light from the light source other than light source A is projected onto the projection plate member 3620. can be suppressed from being incident. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the display made on the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from appearing (displayed) by light other than the LED 651.

Furthermore, as described above, the ground plane of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A part where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, the light that is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 can be reliably suppressed from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

Furthermore, in this case, the ground plane of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction, so the ground plane can be secured and the Displacement of the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 with respect to the plate member 3620 can be suppressed.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light from the LED 651 is passed through the gap toward the axis of the projection plate member 3620. There was a risk that light would leak from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed on the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 is transmitted between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not illuminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress light from leaking from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

Furthermore, since the protrusion 3623 can increase the length of the side surface of the edge of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66(a)), the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the LED 651. .

Next, the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67(b) is a sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. 68(a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 near the first block 653, and FIG. 68(b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 near the second block 654. Note that FIG. 67(b) corresponds to FIG. 44(b). Further, FIG. 68 schematically shows a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is disposed on the base member 610.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 with screws S2. In this case, the height of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height of the LED 651. That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front of the board member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is attached to the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to that one screw S2. When the outer circumferential surface contacts (circumscribes) the projection plate member 620, the dimensions are set such that the outer circumferential surface of the projection plate member 620 cannot come into contact with the LED 651 disposed between the two screws S2.

Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, if it is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial wobbling due to dimensional tolerances or assembly tolerances, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 may be screwed. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is made of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is made of a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 shakes in the radial direction. It is possible to enhance the effect of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn out, and the projection plate member 620 may wobble in the radial direction. Also, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651.

In this way, by using the screw S2 to protect the LED 651, it is possible to omit the formation of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b. Therefore, in this case, since a complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

Further, since the LED 651 can be protected using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial wobbling due to component dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances can be made gentler, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer together, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be made to efficiently enter the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

Next, the projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the projection plate member 620 is formed into a disk shape when viewed from the front and is rotated around the center of the circle, but in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is formed into a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front. A case will be explained in which the case is formed as follows and is slid in one direction.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of a projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of projection unit 5600. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state with the back base 5611 removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 has a base member 5610 that is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front and has an open center portion, and is slidably disposed in the open portion of the base member 5610. a projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 that allows light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidingly displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 that is connected to the projection plate member. 5620 and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668).

The base member 5610 has a back base 5611 which is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and has a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center thereof, and is disposed in front of the back base 5611 and has approximately the same external shape as the back base 5611. A projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650, and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) is stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer standing portion 612c standing upright at the outer edge on the back side and an opening shaped like a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front in the center. a central opening 5612h, an inner upright portion 612a erected from the rear side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from both upper ends of the central opening 5612h; It is formed mainly of two shaft parts 5612k that protrude from between the pair of holding parts 5612i to the back side, and a sliding protrusion 5612m that protrudes from below the central opening 5612h to the back side. Ru.

The central opening 5612h has a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center of the front base 5612 when viewed from the front. The player can visually recognize the patterns and symbols on the third symbol display device 81 provided on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed to protrude from the rear side of the front base 5612 (the front side in the paper of FIG. 71) at both upper ends of the central opening 5612h. In addition, the holding portion 5612i has a concave groove 5612i1 formed on its protruding surface in a manner concave toward the front side (backward side of the paper in FIG. 71).

The groove 5612i1 is recessed from the central part of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 71) to the end side, and has an arc-shaped cross section, and the inner diameter of the groove 5612i1 is equal to the outer diameter of the rod member 5625, which will be described later. formed larger than. The pair of grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the direction dimension. Therefore, after the rod member 5625 is disposed on the inner circumferential surface of the groove 5612i1, a groove with a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is placed at a position facing the groove 5612i1 from the back side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 71). The rod member 5625 can be placed on the front base 5612 by arranging the holding part covers 5628 with the above on both ends (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion that serves as a rotation axis of a rotating member 5670, which will be described later, and is arranged above the central opening 5612h in a symmetrical position with respect to a perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of a rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape to protrude from the lower side of the central opening 5612h to the rear side. Furthermore, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to a perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is reflected into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at the lower end, and a reflecting portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is disposed below the central opening of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612h of the front base 5612), and is disposed at a position where it cannot be seen from the front side of the assembled projection unit 5600. Further, the rack 5627 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set to be longer than the dimension of the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72). Thereby, the movable range of sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

The rack 5627 has a rack gear 5627a engraved on its lower surface that meshes with the gear 5668, and a sliding groove 5627b that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). It is formed over the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627.

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the tilting of the rack 5627 when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661, and has a long opening in the left-right direction. A pair of sliding projections 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced relative to the rear base 5611, the direction of displacement is restricted, and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the back side of the projection plate member 5620, there is a cylindrical rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72), and a horizontally elongated rectangle in front view at a position facing the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 in between. A shaped front cover 5626 is provided.

The rod member 5625 is formed longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620, and is also formed shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611, so that the rod member 5625 The projection plate member 5620 is arranged to be sandwiched therebetween.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and its length in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be approximately the same as the length in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620, It is disposed on the projection plate member 5620 with a rod member 5625 sandwiched between it and the member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is provided with a groove 5626a on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620, which is recessed toward the front side (back side in the plane of the paper in FIG. 72) and recessed in the left-right direction. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is disposed, and is recessed to have a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recess dimensions in the vertical direction and the front side are set larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. be done.

Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be disposed inside the groove portion 5626a. This allows the projection plate member 5620 to be slidably disposed relative to the rod member 5625 in the axial direction of the rod member 5625.

Moreover, the rod member 5625 is arranged on the back side of the front cover 5626 rather than the front side surface. That is, since the rod member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be disposed on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion in the projection plate member 5620.

Here, if the bar member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove on the back side of the projection plate member 5620 into which the bar member 5625 is inserted. However, since the projection plate member 5620 is a member that allows the light incident therein to be emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or design, grooves are formed in the projection plate member 5620. When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel due to the reduced thickness dimension, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620, the front cover 5626 with the bar member 5625 disposed therein can be placed on the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light incident into the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to suppress the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

Furthermore, as described above, both ends of the rod member 5625 are disposed on the front base 5612 so that they cannot fall off, so the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid in the left and right direction. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be moved in the sliding direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 disposed in front of the first block is aligned with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. placed in opposing positions. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be made to enter from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the pattern or design of the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be highlighted.

Further, on the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed, a bulging portion 5612n that bulges out in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the back is formed on the back side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 toward the back side, and its raised dimension is set to be larger than the plate thickness of a rotating member 5670, which will be described later. Thereby, a rotating member 5670, which will be described later, can be disposed in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

Furthermore, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed in the irradiation unit 5600 by having the protrusion 612g inserted into the insertion hole 653b1 and being held between the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 disposed at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent into an L-shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front base 5612 with the bent portion located at the center in the left-right direction, and has an irradiation unit on one longitudinal side. A second block 654 of 650 is attached. Furthermore, a through hole 5671 is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670 in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612, it can rotate with respect to the front base 5612 around the shaft portion 5612k.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612, the irradiating unit 650 can be displaced. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653.

The rotating member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction to displace the tip portion on one side downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k. 5612. Further, a displacement regulating protrusion 5612j that protrudes toward the rear side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is disposed.

The displacement regulating protrusion 5612j is a member that regulates the downward displacement of one end side of the rotating member 5670, and its protruding tip is located rearward (on the back base 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 disposed on the front base 5612. The LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 is located on the front side (on the front base 5612 side). As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j, and the light irradiated from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 toward the projection plate member 5620 is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j. 5612j can be suppressed.

Next, the operation of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. 73(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

FIG. 75(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. Note that FIGS. 74 and 76 illustrate a state in which the back base 5611 is removed. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is simply a left-right reversal of the displacement operation from the first state to the second state, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed approximately in the left-right center of the central opening 5612h, the rotation The member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) so that one end thereof is displaced downward. Thereby, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 disposed on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be incident from the left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 74(a)) of the projection plate member 5620, and the projection plate member 5620 The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is slid to the right in the front view (right direction in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid to the right (see FIGS. 73(b) and 74(b)). ). Thereby, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the right side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h.

In this case, the front cover 5626 disposed on the front side of the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 comes into contact with the side surface of the other end of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 disposed in the sliding direction. Thereby, a rotational moment can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k serving as the rotation axis in a direction that pushes one end side upward. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 disposed on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and is moved in the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (see FIG. 74). (b) left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are substantially on the same straight line.

As a result, as the projection plate member 5620 slides, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

Furthermore, as the projection plate member 5620 slides, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed, so the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be reduced. It can be changed. That is, the mode of the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily keep players interested.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the amount of light on the projection plate member is kept constant by lighting an LED arranged at a different position in accordance with the displacement. Accordingly, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off, and as the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LED becomes more complicated, resulting in a problem that the reliability of the product decreases. Furthermore, there is a problem in that the product cost increases because the LED is disposed at a different position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the direction in which the LED 651 irradiates can be displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is displaced, so the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and the projection plate member 5620 is arranged at a different position. Since control such as turning on or off the LED 651 is not necessary, control of the LED 651 can be simplified, product reliability can be improved, and increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to irradiate light onto a displacing irradiation object (projection plate member), if a plurality of fixed irradiation objects (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiation object, the irradiation range of each irradiation object There is a problem in that a region where the amount of light is weak is created in between, and when the object to be irradiated is displaced, brightness and darkness are created, which reduces the player's interest. Here, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the problem is that the product cost increases because the number of irradiators to be arranged increases. There was a point.

However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always project stably regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the brightness and darkness of the light caused by the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby suppressing the player's interest from being lost. Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the number of LEDs 651 provided, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Furthermore, as described above, the illumination direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed by sliding the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 can be applied to the projection plate member 5620. It can be used both as a drive for sliding displacement and a drive for rotating the second block 654, making it unnecessary to newly provide a drive means for displacing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the product.

Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 and the blocks 653 and 654, which are made of an elastically deformable material, there is no need to form the second block 654 to be displaced as a separate member. Therefore, the irradiation unit 650 can be installed on the front base by connecting the wiring after arranging the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit on the front base 5612, so that the assembly process can be simplified.

On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h. Accordingly, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid and displaced to form the first state.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 on the side (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) whose one end is pushed up due to the displacement to the second state is rotated by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotation member 5670 and the front base 5612, so that the projection plate As the member 5620 slides to the center position in the left-right direction, one end of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed down and rotated about the shaft portion 5612k. Furthermore, as described above, the rotation range of the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is regulated by coming into contact with the displacement regulating protrusion 5612j.

As mentioned above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is simply a left-right reversal of the displacement operation and displacement direction from the first state to the second state. Explanation will be omitted. Note that the third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the left side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b)).

Next, a projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. possible.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of a projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 with the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member disposed so as to be partially visible from an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620, an irradiation unit 650 that makes light enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 that is transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. It is formed mainly of a gear train (gears 662 to 664) for

The base member 6610 includes an annular back base 611 and an annular front base 6612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has a shielding member 6612r that is annular in front view formed at the inner edge of the annular front base 612 of the first embodiment, and a part of the shielding member 6612r has an opening that opens in a fan shape in the front-rear direction. A portion 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 disposed on the back side visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612, which is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. The shielding member 6612r has a length of about ⅙ of the entire circumference, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 6612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c at the outer edge of the opening 6612p. The front surfaces of the bases 611 and 612 are placed on top of each other, so that the bases 611 and 612 are accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space).

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and its inner diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612. Further, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visible to the player.

Furthermore, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 disposed on the projection plate member 6620 are disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r). Therefore, it is difficult for players to see the player, and deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side to be transmitted therethrough and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. At the same time, when the light irradiated from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or design, and the front base 6612 The player is allowed to visually recognize it through the opening 6612p. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) in the interior space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

Furthermore, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting section 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside thereof. The reflective portion 6622 is a portion whose interior has been roughened by laser processing or the like, and a pattern, design, etc. is formed by dividing the projection plate member 6620 into a plurality of pieces in the circumferential direction over the entire area when viewed from the front of the projection plate member 6620. Ru. In this embodiment, the shape of the pattern, design, etc. of the reflective portion 6622 is formed by dividing into six in the circumferential direction, and six types of reflective areas 6622a to 6622f, such as patterns and designs, are formed (see FIG. 80). .

Furthermore, the projection plate member 6620 has a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 disposed on the outer peripheral edge thereof on the back side and the front side, respectively. Thereby, similarly to the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), thereby making it possible to rotate the projection plate member 6620.

Next, the operation of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. 80(a) to 80(c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. Note that FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c) illustrate transition states of the projection plate member 6620. Further, FIG. 80 shows a state in which the back base 611 is removed. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflecting portion 6622 (reflecting regions 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when the projection plate member 6620 is placed at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is placed inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front (viewed from the back to the front of the page). A reflective area 6622a is arranged. Therefore, when the light from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or design of the reflective area 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and designs appearing inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light from the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflective areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflective area 6622a, but since the front base 6612 is disposed in front of the reflective areas 6622b and 6622f, the player can Displays in areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player will not be able to see the display other than the display surface, and the player's interest will be lost due to the fact that other areas can be seen. can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(b) and 80(c), when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and designs of the reflective areas 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and designs can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or design is printed on the front surface of the irradiated object (projection plate member 6620) and the display surface is switched by displacing the irradiated object, the visible area (opening) of the irradiated object is changed. 6612p), the switching of the pattern or symbol of the irradiated object is visible, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before finishing switching the pattern or symbol. There was a problem in that it was not possible to enjoy the displacement to the end.

In addition, even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates the irradiated object is turned off and the display surface of the irradiated object is darkened, the irradiated object may be affected by the light from other devices or fluorescent lights in the store. By being irradiated, the patterns and designs of the irradiated object became visible to the player.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed from a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 6620 are made difficult to see and are brought into a transparent state. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the illumination of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching of patterns and symbols on the projection plate member 6620. You can enjoy the displacement of 6620 to the end.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated about its center as the rotation axis. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the projection plate member 6612.

In other words, in the case where the projection plate member 6620 is slidable, the installation space in the horizontal or vertical direction is limited, so it is difficult to secure the pattern of the projection plate member 6620 and the number of figures on the side. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and designs.

Next, the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the seventh embodiment, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a are formed in a winning hole unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the following, similarly to the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is taken as the gravitational direction, and the left and right rear of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 10 will be described as the front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 as the back side (or rear side).

First, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 disposed on the base plate of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 82, illustration of units (for example, center frame 86 (refer FIG. 81) etc.) other than the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arrange|positioned on the base board 60 is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a extending in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 at the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 82) of the central opening where the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and a drive unit 960 and a specific winning a prize unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning opening unit 930 is arranged from the gaming area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side from the gaming area, and each is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw or the like. In addition, the detailed structure of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning a prize opening unit 930 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83(b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 disposed on the back side of the front unit 940 (front of the page in FIG. 83(b)), and Mainly includes a drive unit 960 disposed on the back side (front side of the paper in FIG. 83(b)) of the specific winning a prize unit 950, and a displacement member 966 disposed between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940. Formed in preparation for.

As described above, the front unit 940 has an outer shape larger than the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. Therefore, by arranging the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can pass through a path other than the game ball passing path (the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a) formed in the front unit 940, which will be described later. Passing through the through hole 60a from the space can be suppressed.

Part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown inside the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. be done. In addition, detailed explanation about the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 will be mentioned later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, and a part of it (insertion part 965e of the transmission member 965) is connected to the wing member 945 arranged in the front unit via the displacement member 966. Concatenated. Thereby, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. Note that a detailed explanation of the operation of the wing member 945 will be given later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87(b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. Note that in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 includes a back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60, and a front base 943 disposed on the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. and two (a pair) wing members 945 rotatably disposed between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The rear base 941 has an approximately T-shape with an upside-down outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. In addition, the back base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and when the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is disposed on the base plate 60, the base plate 60 is penetrated through the back base 941. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

The back base 941 has a first out port 71 cut out on the downstream side of the game ball (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(b)), and an upper side of the first out port 71 (see FIG. 87(b)). b) A specific winning opening 65a which is located in the upper part and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a second winning opening 140 which is formed through and passing above the specific winning opening 65a, which is opposite to the first out opening 71. It mainly includes a first prize opening 64 formed with a notch on the side edge.

Further, the back base 941 includes a plurality of through holes 941a that penetrate in the thickness direction at the outer edge. The through-hole 941a has a first through-hole 941a1 whose diameter decreases from the front side (the front side in FIG. 87(a) on the paper) toward the back side (the front side on the paper in FIG. 87(b)), and a first through-hole 941a1 that decreases in diameter from the back side toward the front side. The second through hole 941a2 is formed by a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter is reduced.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning port unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded part of the tapping screw. be done. Further, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the front side toward the back side, so that the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back surface of the back base 941 is formed near the first through hole 941a1.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. Ru. Thereby, the back base 941 (winning a prize opening unit 930) can be positioned and disposed with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened to the rear base 941 from the rear side with screws. In this case, when removing the front base 943 from the back base 941, it is necessary to remove the winning opening unit 930 from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (playing area side) of the game board 13.

Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the back side toward the front side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heads of the screws from protruding toward the back side of the back base 941. As a result, when the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, it is possible to suppress the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific winning a prize opening unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87(b)) of the back base 941 is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 of the game board 13 (see FIG. A01). The first out port 71 is formed in such a size that the edge of the bottom of the notch (the upper edge in the direction of gravity) is spaced apart from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by at least the diameter of the game ball. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base board 60), the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the specific winning hole 65a, and the general winning hole 63() are Game balls that have not flown into either can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) through the first out port 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end of the upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first prize opening 64 is formed to have an inner edge larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving part 941g, which will be described later, can be sent to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) via the first prize opening 64.

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, there is a first receiving part 941g formed in a cup shape and protruding toward the gaming area side (the front side of the page in FIG. 87(a)), and a first receiving part 941g on the side opposite to the gaming area (see FIG. b) A first ball throwing portion 942g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side in the drawing.

The first receiving portion 941g is formed in a size that can receive one game ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side of the first receiving part 941g (first winning opening 64) in the direction of gravity can be made to flow into the inside of the first receiving part 941g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941g is formed such that the bottom surface thereof is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the gaming area (the front side in FIG. 87(b))). Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving part 941g can be thrown to the back side (first ball throwing part 942g side) through the first prize opening 64.

Furthermore, the first receiving portion 941g extends from the upper end of both ends of the base plate 60 in the transverse direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87) toward the second winning opening side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(a))). The base plate 60 is provided with a guide portion 941g1 that is inclined and erected outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite to the gaming area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. Thereby, the rigidity of the first receiving part 941g can be increased, and it is possible to suppress damage to the first receiving part 941g due to the game ball flowing down the downstream area colliding with the first receiving part 941g.

In addition, if the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, there will be insufficient placement of game nails that change the game balls flowing down the game area. It becomes difficult to change the direction of flow. Therefore, where there is a risk that the player's interest may be lost, by causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to change the flowing direction of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost. .

Furthermore, since the guide part 941g1 is formed to be inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87(a)) toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide part 941g1 The ball can be guided to the outside of the rear base 941 in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the game ball can collide again with a game nail (not shown) arranged on the base plate 60, and it is possible to easily change the direction in which the game ball flows down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

The first ball throwing portion 942g is formed in a U-shape with an open upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance between opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first ball throwing section 942g is formed such that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the gaming area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)), and the protruding tip side is formed by a ball throwing unit, which will be described later. It abuts against the edge of the inlet 982d of 970. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving part 941g to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first prize opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed cutout portion 942g1 in which the upper end of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side. The first recessed cutout 942g1 is a notch on which a second protrusion 982d1 of a ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. Note that a detailed explanation of the arrangement of the first ball throwing section 942g and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second winning hole 140 is formed through the hole in a substantially D-shape with an upward curve when viewed from the front, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball thrown between the opposing wing members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) via the second prize opening 140.

The second winning opening 140 has a front side wall part 941b that protrudes toward the front side (game area side (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(a))) and a back side (opposite side to the game area (FIG. 87(a))). (b) A second ball throwing portion 942c that protrudes toward the front side)) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that its protruding tip surface comes into contact with a ball throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second ball throwing portion 942c is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the back, and is formed at each of both ends of the lower edge of the second winning opening 140. The second ball throwing portion 942c has a dimension in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 87(b)) set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, can be prevented from falling from the upper surface of the rolling part 943a.

The pair of second ball throwing parts 942c are arranged such that the distance between the opposing sides in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 87(b)) is the width direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. The length is set to be approximately the same as the length in the left-right direction (FIG. 87(b)), and a rolling portion 943a is disposed inside. Further, in the second ball throwing portion 942c, a second recessed cutout portion 942c1 is cut out on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) of the protruding tip portion. The second recessed notch 942c1 is a portion on which a projection 981b1 of a passage unit, which will be described later, is placed, and its detailed description will be described later.

The back base 941 extends from the gaming area side of the back base 941 toward the other side in the gravity direction near the second winning opening 140 (first winning opening 64 side (upper side in FIG. 87(b))), and from the gaming area side of the back base 941 to the side opposite to the gaming area. a first shaft hole 941d recessed in two places in a circular shape, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and penetrating through the back base 941; A first guide wall 942b located on the outside in the opposing direction of the two first openings 941e and protruding from the back side, and a protruding part 941c protruding between the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. It is formed with the following.

The first shaft hole 941d is capable of supporting a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e has an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as its axis. Further, the first opening 941e allows the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 to be inserted therethrough, and is set larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. This can prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The protruding portion 941c has an isosceles triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the corner of the isosceles connecting portion is located on substantially the same plane as the center position between opposing wing members 945, which will be described later. Further, the scalene side of the protruding portion 941c is formed to extend parallel to the facing direction of the wing member 945, and its length is set to be slightly larger than the dimension between the opposing wings of the wing member 945 in the closed state. Ru. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest distance from the feather member 945 in the closed state is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being thrown into the second winning a prize opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945 facing each other). Note that a detailed explanation of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be given later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966, which will be described later, is displaced. 966 is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short direction.

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extend in a direction in which bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 can be brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed into a long rectangular opening in the direction in which the pair of feather members 945 face each other (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)), and a plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is placed inside the opening. can be inserted. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area can be sent into the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 via the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

In addition, the back base 941 includes an upright portion 942f that surrounds the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (on the opposite side to the gaming area), and a recessed part from the back side at both longitudinal ends of the specific winning opening 65a. A recessed portion 941h is provided.

The shape of the inner edge of the upright portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, which will be described later. Thereby, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 can be easily positioned and arranged inside the upright portion 942f.

The concave portion 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952 that becomes the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning a prize port unit 950 is inserted when the specific winning a prize port unit 950 is disposed on the back base 941. It is formed. Thereby, when the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the rod member 952 can be brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, and the rod member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the facing portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the facing portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and a side of the first guide wall 942b from the outer circumferential surface of the standing portion 942f (Fig. 87(b) ) a second guide wall 942d protruding upward).

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back side of the back base 941 and is connected to the upright portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c. As a result, when a displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90), which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back base 941 (on the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)), there is a gap between the displacement member 966 and the back of the back base 941 A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance in the width direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be restricted.

The back base 941 has a half-shaped structure attached to the edge of the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) at both longitudinal ends (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)) of the specific winning opening 65a toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). A second outlet 941f formed by cutting out a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for throwing the game ball that has entered the third receiving part 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side of the base plate 60 (the side opposite to the game area), formed into a shape larger than the diameter of the

Further, a third ball throwing portion 942e that is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear and protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the second out port 941f. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the back side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing section 942e.

The third ball throwing part 942e is formed so that the curved part (lower part) of a U-shape in rear view is inclined downward in the direction of gravity as it protrudes to the back side, and the third ball throwing part 942e is formed to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved part (lower part) of the U-shape in rear view protrudes to the back side. can be rolled to the back side. A detailed explanation of the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the third ball throwing section 942e will be given later.

The front base 943 is formed into an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed from a colorless and transparent plate-shaped body. This allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing front base 943 and back base 941.

The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving part 943c and a third receiving part 944a protrudingly provided at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the above-mentioned back base 941. It is formed.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from the back, and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 is arranged inside when viewed from the front. Furthermore, a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, are provided on the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (the open side of the U-shape). Furthermore, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 side is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to throw a game ball between the opposing sides of the back base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball is suppressed from flowing into the second prize opening 140 from the outside between the opposing sides of a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later. can.

The second receiving portion 943c also includes a ball throwing guide portion 943d protruding inward from its inner edge, and a first recessed portion recessed in a circular shape from the rear base 941 side (the front side in FIG. 87(b)). 943ca, and a rolling portion 943a that protrudes from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base.

A pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945 (lower side in FIG. 87(b)). Further, the pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end surfaces come into contact with each other. . As a result, the game ball that has flowed between the pair of opposing wing members 945 can be thrown between the opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) between the pair of opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d, and an end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the gravity direction is inclined downward toward the rear base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is disposed inside the recess 941j in a state where the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip thereof is located on the back surface of the back base 941. side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)).

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of opposing ball throwing guide parts 943d can be thrown to the end face 943a1 of the rolling part, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the end face 943a1 to the back side of the back base 941. He can throw the ball to.

Further, the front base 943 includes an annular protrusion 943b that protrudes in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular projection 943b has a second shaft hole 943b1 at its inner edge, into which the other end of a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, can be inserted. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be held and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943, which face each other.

The third receiving portion 944a has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is disposed inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be made to flow into the inside of the third receiving part 944a, and the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving part 944a can be passed through the second outlet 941f to the rear surface. You can throw the ball to the side (opposite the playing area).

Further, in the second receiving part 943c and the third receiving part 944a, a first recessed part 943ca and a second recessed part 944a1 are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the near side in the paper surface of FIG. 87(b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened parts into which the screw inserted into the second through hole 941a2 described above is screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. be done. Thereby, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened together.

A pair of feather members 945 are arranged with the second prize opening 140 formed in the back base 941 sandwiched therebetween when viewed from the front. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player through the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than that between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface (back surface) on the back base 941 side.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when fastening (assembling) the back base 941 and the front base 943, by inserting the shaft member 945a into the insertion hole 945c, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be connected to each other while the wing member 945 is rotatable. Can be placed between opposite sides. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be displaced between a closed state in which the opposing side surfaces are parallel to the direction of gravity, and an open state in which one side of the side surfaces is displaced outward in the opposing direction.

The protrusion 945b is connected to a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and is a transmission part that transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945, and the distal end thereof is connected to the displacement member 966 through the first opening 941e of the back base 941. The dimensions are set such that it protrudes toward the back side of the back base 941 (the side opposite to the gaming area). Note that a detailed explanation of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90. 90(a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90(b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90(c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90(b)) at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c when viewed from the front is larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area via the second winning opening 140 can be suppressed from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90(a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90(a)) in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90(a)), and It has a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90(b)) to the back side (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the transverse direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Equipped with

The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the width of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both widthwise opposing inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 and restricting the operation of the wing member 945.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed to bulge out on the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side). Thereby, the area in which the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the front base 943 and the drive unit 960, which will be described later, can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back side base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion when viewed from the back. The connection hole 966b1 is an opening into which a tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of a drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. Note that a detailed explanation of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the transverse direction of the displacement member 966, and is connected to one side abutted portion 966b2 of the inner circumferential surface on the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90(a))). , and a contact portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner circumferential surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The one-side abutted portion 966b2 is a surface that is abutted by a bulging portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The displacement member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to the open state (see FIG. 92) by slidingly displacing the bulging portion 965e1 in contact with the one side abutted portion 966b2.

The other side abutted portion 966b3 is a surface that is abutted by a side surface opposite to a bulged portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The displacement member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to the closed state (see FIG. 91) by being slid and displaced by the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 being brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3. I can do it.

Next, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). In addition, in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 91 shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 92 shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in rear view, and the first protrusion 945b is formed parallel to the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. Mainly includes a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 that is connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the gravity direction (specific winning opening 65a side), and a second surface 945b2 that is connected to the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

The sliding groove 966a2 has a lower inner surface 966a4 located on one side in the direction of gravity (the side of the connecting hole 966b1) and abuts against the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the open state, and a lower inner surface 966a4 that faces the lower inner surface 966a4 and has a protrusion. 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the closed state, and an inner surface in the transverse direction of the displacement member 966 from the outer side in the transverse direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) toward the lower inner surface 966a4 side of the displacement member 966. and an inclined surface 966a5 that is inclined to.

Note that the displacement member 966 is disposed so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back base 941 by a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The feather member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the specific winning opening 65a side (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the second winning opening 140 side (upper side in FIG. 91). It is assumed to be in an open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be explained. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is arranged inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (on the outside in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with the protrusion 945b. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that includes a drive unit that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive unit to a pair of wing members. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a protrusion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, opposing portions are formed on one end of the rotating member and are vertically opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and the protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the opposing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to set a large gap between the opposing part and the protruding part, so there is a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member is unstable. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for opening and closing operations of the wing member, the attitude of the facing part is inclined with respect to the protruding part, and the facing interval of the facing part is equal to the outer shape of the protruding part. If so, the protruding portion interferes between the opposing portions, making it impossible for the rotating member to rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the spacing between the opposing parts to a size that does not interfere with the protruding parts, and the gap between the opposing parts and the protruding parts increases accordingly. As a result, the wing members tend to wobble, making the opening and closing operations of the wing members unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960), and a displacement member 966 that is slid and displaced as the transmission member 965 rotates. A projection 945b is provided protruding from the pair of wing members 945, and a sliding groove 966a2 through which the projection 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the sliding groove 966a2 is The groove width can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 966 is a sliding displacement, and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 is not inclined with respect to the protrusion 945b, so there is no need to avoid interference with the protrusion when rotating unlike the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Furthermore, since the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966 is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be disposed substantially parallel to the wing members 945. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, since the displacement member 966 is not displaced in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the space required for disposing the displacement member in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. can. As a result, space for arranging other members can be secured.

Here, unlike the conventional product in which a rotating member is directly connected to a pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is moved in the direction of gravity. When operating in the direction of sliding upward (to the other side in the direction of gravity), the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, so the inertial force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means (the solenoid 610 described later) increases. . Therefore, it is difficult to smoothly perform an initial operation when starting the drive of the wing member 945 in the stopped state and displacing it to the open state or the closed state.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is located below the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945 in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction). be located. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (the other side in the gravity direction) is set below the rotation axis of the wing member 945 along the gravity direction. Thereby, the displacement component of the protrusion 945b that pushes up the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention where the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) to open or close it can be performed smoothly.

Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b with the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) interposed therebetween. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state using its own weight. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the direction of gravity (one side in the direction of gravity), the wing member 945 is rotated in the direction in which it is released, so that the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (its own weight). can be done. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) and opening it can be performed smoothly.

Further, the above-described inclined surface 966a5 is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even if the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5, and the displacement member The sliding displacement of 966 toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) can be started smoothly.

Furthermore, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only can the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b be reduced, but also the projection 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be made smaller. Due to this contact, not only the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the direction of gravity but also the displacement in the horizontal direction can be restricted. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 when the wing member 945 is in the closed state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibrations caused by the falling of game balls, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open or closed position.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the feather member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 moves from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (bottom side in FIG. 92). side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Moreover, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning a prize opening 140 side to the specific winning a prize opening 65a side is set to the direction of gravity (downward in FIG. 92). Thereby, when closing the wing member 945, the wing member 945 can be displaced using the weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93(a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93(b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 includes a first accommodating part 962 and a second accommodating part 963, which are formed in a box shape and are arranged facing each other. 963 , a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610 , and a connecting member 964 that is pivotally supported by the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 and connected to the connecting member 964 . The transmission member 965 is mainly formed.

The first accommodating part 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The covered portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape with the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)) and the guide portion 962b side open. Further, the covering portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the opposing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in a direction facing the outside of the opposing wall surface.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch that engages an engaging portion 963c of a second accommodating portion 963, which will be described later, and is formed into a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c when viewed from the side. As a result, the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened together. The workability of fastening can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 when the drive unit 960 is assembled, and is located on the second accommodating portion 963 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). A through hole 962da is provided that penetrates toward the front.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) that is screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing part 963 is inserted, and is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1 and has an inner diameter larger than the fastening hole 963b1. is formed. Thereby, the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e that are connected to the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a and formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side, and is connected to the pair of arm portions 962e, and has a gate shape when viewed from the front. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f, and a protrusion portion 962g that protrudes from the wall portion 962f to the side opposite to the covered portion 962a (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

In side view, the arm portion 962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85), and its protruding tip side is bent toward the other side in the gravity direction (opposite to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed into an approximately L shape. Further, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the distance between the opposing sides is approximately the same as the distance between both horizontal ends of the side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109(a)) of the distribution unit 980, which will be described later. 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the distal side (bent side) side surfaces of the arm portion 962e described above, and its shape in front view is larger than the shape of the displacement member 966 in front view. Further, the wall portion 962f has an outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93(b)) in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) in the opposing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the back base 941. (L3=L4) is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91). Furthermore, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93(a)) in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(a)) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the back base 941 to the upright portion 942f. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 91) to the outer surface (L5=L6). Thereby, the displacement member 966 can be disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the opposed first guide walls 942b. Furthermore, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966, which is disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941, can be arranged between the opposing surfaces.

The protruding portion 962g is formed to protrude from the outer side of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. It is set to be approximately the same as the protrusion dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Furthermore, the inner dimension L7 of the protruding portion 962g in the opposing direction (FIG. 93(b) vertical direction) is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the rear base 941 in the opposing direction (see FIG. 91). It is set large. Furthermore, the dimension of the protruding portion 962g in the direction of gravity is set to be approximately the same as the dimension between the opposing first guide wall 942b and the standing portion 942f.

Accordingly, when disposing the drive unit 960 in the assembled state on the back base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the opposing protrusions 962g, and the first guide wall 942b and The drive unit 960 can be positioned and disposed with respect to the back base 941 by inserting the protruding portion 962g between the opposing upright portions 942f.

The second accommodating portion 963 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed into a box-shaped body that covers the other side of the solenoid 610 (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction of the solenoid 610 (left-right direction in FIG. 93(b)), which will be described later, when viewed from above. Further, the second accommodating portion 963 is provided with recessed portions 963e recessed in a plurality of locations on both walls extending in the longitudinal direction, and from between the recessed portions 963e at the plurality of locations toward the first accommodating portion 962. an engaging portion 963c that protrudes from the side, a protrusion portion 963b that protrudes from both walls extending in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and one side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) extending in the lateral direction). ) is provided with a bearing part 963d recessed in the wall part.

The protruding portion 963b is formed to protrude outward in the transverse direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular arc shape, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962. Thereby, the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 can be fastened and fixed by screwing a screw inserted from the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating part 962 into the fastening hole 963b1.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening that circulates air in a space formed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c protrudes toward the first accommodating portion 962 from between the plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged in parallel, and has a hook-shaped tip that is bent inward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963. Ru. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, The engaging portion 963c is disposed inside the engaged portion 962c, and a bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one end surface of the first accommodating portion 962.

Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the distal end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is disposed in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess that accommodates a rotating shaft 965c of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered with the side surface of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, so that the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined. In this state, the rotating shaft 965c accommodated in the bearing portion 963d can be prevented from coming off outside the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 includes a main body 961a formed into a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b that is inserted into the inside of the main body 961a and is movable with respect to the main body 961a, and a side of the shaft 961b opposite to the main body 961a. It includes an annular portion 961c disposed at the end of the annular portion 961c, and a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a.

The main body part 961a is a coil part that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft part 961b to be inserted into the main body part 961a can be drawn inward and inserted by the magnetism.

The shaft portion 961b is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 961b is arranged with its axial direction facing the back base 941 side, and is arranged with a part of the back base 941 side protruding from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. Thereby, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP1 is disposed around the shaft portion 961b, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a facing each other. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be biased in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body part 961a, the annular part 961c can be maintained separated from the main body part 961a. Further, after power is applied (supplied) to the main body part 961a, when the application (supply) of power is cut off, the annular part 961c can be quickly separated from the main body part 961a.

The connecting member 964 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 has a base portion 964a formed in a plate-shaped body parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and a base portion 964a that extends from the other side of the base portion 964a in the gravity direction to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85 (see) an upright portion 964b bent toward the side.

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end surface on one side in the gravity direction (the back side of the paper in FIG. 93(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity when viewed in cross section. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 964c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. It is formed in a substantially U-shape with its lower side open when viewed from the rear, and is formed to open from the first recessed portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b includes an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the direction of gravity, into which a protruding portion 965d of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, is inserted. Accordingly, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protrusion 965d comes into contact with the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e, and the transmission member 965 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The transmission member 965 is bent when viewed from the side, and includes a distal end portion 965a that extends in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a rotational distal end portion 965a that is continuous with the distal end portion 965a and extends toward the connecting member 964 side. 965b.

The rotating part 965b is formed so that the width dimension in the lateral direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) of the second accommodating part 963 is smaller than the dimension between opposing bearing parts 963d formed in a pair in the second accommodating part 963. be done. The rotating part 965b also has a rotating shaft 965c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on both sides of the second housing part 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) at the end on the 964 side, and and a protrusion 965d that protrudes toward one end in the gravity direction.

As described above, the rotating shaft 965c is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Furthermore, the distance between the protruding tips of the pair of rotating shafts 965c is set to be larger than the distance between the opposing bearing parts 963d formed in the second accommodating part 963. Thereby, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and disposed inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a rotatable state about the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e when viewed from above. Furthermore, in the state before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a), the protruding portion 965d has a width dimension in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610. The width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be sufficiently larger than the width of the insertion hole 964e (in this embodiment, the width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width of the protrusion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced around the rotating shaft 965c, the projections 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b come into contact with the insertion hole 964e, and the rotation of the transmission member 965 is restricted. This can be suppressed.

The width of the tip portion 965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c is formed to become smaller as the tip portion 965a becomes farther away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 965a has an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above, and an upright portion 965f protruding from the connection side with the rotating portion 965b in one side in the gravity direction. It is formed with

The insertion portion 965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. 96(a) and 96(b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93(b). Note that FIG. 96(a) shows the state of the solenoid 610 before operation, and FIG. 96(b) shows the state of the solenoid 610 after the operation. Further, in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c is The force causes the annular portion 961c to be separated from the main body portion 961a. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (to the left in FIG. 96(a)).

When the connecting member 964 is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmitting member 965 on the solenoid 610 side (the right side in FIG. 96(a)) and the surface of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 on the solenoid 610 side is in contact with the inner surface of the As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 96(a)) about the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the gravity direction is regulated by the contact portion 965g contacting the second housing portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft 961b is drawn into the main body 961a by the magnetic force generated in the main body 961a, and the The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in a direction approaching the main body portion 961a (to the right in FIG. 96(a)).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in the direction approaching the main body portion 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmitting member 965 on the opposite side to the solenoid 610 (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 The solenoid 610 side and the inner surface of the opposite side (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) are in contact with each other. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 96(b)) about the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the gravity direction is regulated by the connection portion between the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 and the rotating portion 965b coming into contact with the first accommodating portion 962.

Therefore, by displacing the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to either the other side in the gravity direction or to the one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 can be moved to either the first accommodating part 962 or the second accommodating part 963. It can be brought into contact. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts by players.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first accommodating part 962 or the second accommodating part 963 from the player side (gaming area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire etc. Accordingly, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since an abnormality occurs in the displacement operation of the wing member 945 that is displaced by the transmission member 965, it is easy for the store operator to discover the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 includes a tip portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b that extend from the rotating shaft 965c and are connected to the displacement member 966, and a distal end portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b that extend from the rotating shaft 965c and are connected to the solenoid 610. Since the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent into a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, the amount of displacement of the displacement member 966 can be ensured. , the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed in a straight line when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is the same as that of the distal end portion 965a of this embodiment. If the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is set to be approximately equal to the total distance, the amount of sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 can be made equal to that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is increased. The whole thing becomes larger.

On the other hand, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed in a straight line when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set by rotation from the insertion portion 965e of this embodiment. When the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is set to be approximately the same as the distance to the shaft 965c (the distance between the tip end 965a and the rotating section 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made the same as in this embodiment. However, the amount of displacement of the displacement member 966 becomes smaller.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while ensuring the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the rear side (right side in FIG. 96(a)) of the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, which are opposite to the displacement member 966. Thereby, the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b can be effectively utilized, and the transmission member 965 can be downsized. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently arranged in the space between the rolling part 943a of the front unit 940 (ball throwing unit 970 described later) and the passage member 955 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, thereby reducing the overall size. can be achieved.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 930 taken along the line XCVII-XCVII in FIG. 83. 98(a) and 98(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 taken along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 97. Note that FIG. 98(a) shows the state of the solenoid 610 before operation, and FIG. 98(b) shows the state of the solenoid 610 after the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the distal end 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip end 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upward in FIG. 98(a)), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 98(b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the abutted portion 966b2 on one side of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 come into contact, and the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the direction of gravity. be done.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the gravity direction (toward the second winning port 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is brought into an open state. That is, by applying electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is brought into an open state.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is aligned in the gravity direction due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 disposed in the solenoid 610 as described above. side (lower side in FIG. 98(a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98(a), the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 contacts the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and the displacement member 966 moves to one side in the gravity direction. The slide is displaced.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to one side in the gravity direction (towards the specific winning port 65a), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is brought into the closed state. That is, by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is brought into the closed state.

In this case, the wing member 945 can be closed while power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 961a, so if the wiring of the main body 961a is disconnected or due to a player's misconduct, the main body 961a is closed. When the wiring is cut, the wing member 945 becomes open, and it is possible to prevent game balls from easily flowing into the second prize opening 140.

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 through a connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Thereby, it is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the displacement member between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, as the transmission member rotates, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, during the operation of slidingly displacing the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 as the transmission member 965 rotates, the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. When actuated, the attitude of the displacement member 966 is changed, and the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places, and is also connected to the transmission member 965 at two places. If this is the case, it is difficult to allow a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, and the resistance when sliding the displacement member 966 (that is, rotating the transmission member 965) is high. This occurs and prevents the wing member from opening or closing. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places, and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one place, so that the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at one place. Even if the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the blade members 945, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Furthermore, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the contact surface between the one side abutted part 966b2 and the other side abutted part 966b3 of the insertion part 965e is the maximum external dimension D2 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the protrusion 945b. (see (a)) is set to be smaller than three times. Thereby, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the connection between the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 By setting the width D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b, the posture of the displacement member 966 is controlled. Change can be prevented from being regulated. As a result, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Note that the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily prevent the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1 from coming into contact with each other. As a result, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Next, the specific winning a prize unit 950 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. 99(a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99(b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99(c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950. It is a diagram. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 includes a ball entering member 953 formed in a box-like body that is opened by the player side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 99), and an opening of the ball entering member 953. A plate member 951 disposed to cover the ball, a passage member 955 disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 in between, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is formed from a colored and translucent resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body part 951a formed in a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a shaft hole 951b recessed in a cylindrical shape on both longitudinally outer sides of the main body part 951a, and a shaft hole 951b recessed in a longitudinal direction of the main body part 951a. The main body portion 951a has a protrusion 951c that projects toward the ball-entering member 953 from one end thereof, and an engaging portion 951d that projects toward the ball-entering member 953 from the other longitudinal end of the main body portion 951a.

The main body portion 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and has a shape that is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. .

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the main body portion 951a, and both ends of the shaft hole 951b in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Moreover, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of a rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted into the shaft hole 951b. Therefore, by supporting the ball entry member 953 while the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953.

The protrusion 951c is formed to protrude toward one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced around the shaft hole 951b by the drive of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is inclined toward the game area, the main body portion 951a It is possible to suppress the game balls that have flown down from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 partially recessed at the protruding tip. A distal end portion 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is connected to the inside of the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted thereto. In addition, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, a part of the engaging portion 951d protrudes toward the downstream area, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the main body portion 951a can be prevented from falling from the other side in the longitudinal direction.

The ball entry member 953 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body 953a formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular box when viewed from the front, an erected wall 953b erected on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and an open side wall 953b of the main body 953a. An engaging portion 953f protrudes from the surface opposite to the opening side, an annular projection 953c protrudes in an annular shape from the surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an annular protrusion 953c protrudes from the open side of the main body portion 953a. A wall portion 953d protrudes toward the plate member 951 side from both longitudinally outer sides of the edge, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other longitudinal side of the main body portion 953a, and the main body. A protruding part 953g protrudes from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the part 953a, a protrusion 953h protrudes from the open side edge of the main body part 953a toward the plate member 951, and two parts formed through the bottom surface of the main part 953a. and an inlet 953j.

The main body part 953a is formed in a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the box-shaped inner part, and has an opening 953a1 that opens on the plate member 951 side, and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball that flows in from the opening 953a1. 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a when viewed from the front is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the upright portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. Thereby, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted into the upright portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. Note that a detailed description of the inner shape of the main body portion 953a will be given later.

Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the distance between the above-mentioned pair of wing members 945 on the outside in the opposing direction. Thereby, even if the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer circumferential surface of the pair of feather members 945, the game ball can be made to flow into the main body part 953a via the specific winning opening 65a.

The opening 953a1 has an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball, and when the plate member 951 is in an open state, the game ball can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1. can.

The rolling surface 953a2 is a lower inner edge of the main body portion 953a in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. Further, the dimension in the direction (short side direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown into the inside of the main body portion 953a from the opening 953a1 can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The standing wall 953b is a wall that holds the detection device SE1 disposed on the opposite side to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the outer circumferential surface in three directions of the detection device SE1, which is formed into a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 in directions other than the three directions surrounded by the standing wall 953b. Thereby, the detection device SE1 can be disposed inside the portion surrounded by the standing wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. Further, the distal end portion of the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the upright wall 953b, which is separated from the proximal end by a distance equal to the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, the detection device SE1 and the engagement portion 953f are engaged with each other, and it is possible to suppress the detection device SE1 disposed on the main body portion 953a from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device that detects passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE1 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular state when viewed from the rear, and the detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions where the detection hole SE1a is not formed. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is disposed on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is arranged at a position corresponding to an inflow port 953j to be described later, and can allow game balls flowing into the inflow port 953j to pass through.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed to protrude from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 is screwed into the inner edge portion of the annular protrusion 953c.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both longitudinally outer sides of the main body portion 953a, and the distance between the opposing walls is shorter than the lengthwise dimension of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be disposed between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

Further, a shaft hole 953d1 is formed in the wall portion 953d and extends in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99(a)) of the main body portion 953a. The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of opposing walls 953d, the rod members 952 are inserted into the shaft holes 953d1 and 951b from both longitudinally outer sides of the plate member 951. It can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protrusion dimension smaller than the recess distance of the recess portion 941h formed in the back base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recessed portion 941h. Thereby, the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b can be prevented from coming out.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of a transmission member 965 disposed in a passage member 955 (described later) is inserted into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 disposed in the passage member 955. be done.

The protruding portion 953g is formed to protrude on the axis of the connecting protrusion 942j of the front unit 940. In addition, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the protrusion 953g are arranged coaxially, and the protrusion The installation portion 953g and the connecting protrusion 942j are in contact with each other. Thereby, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed to protrude toward the plate member 951 side. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957, which will be described later, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge of the main body portion 953a.

Further, the protrusion 953h is formed at substantially the same position as the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the engagement portion 951d in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (left-right direction in FIG. 99(a)). This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll toward the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed to open from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side with an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole through which the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body part 953a is sent to the passage member 955, and a pair of inflow ports 953j are formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 953a.

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance. machine is known. The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. One ball at a time. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the ball entrance is made larger, the rolling distance of the game ball (the length of the rolling surface) from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member increases accordingly. Therefore, it takes time for the ball to arrive at the passage member, and by the time the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, another game ball may enter the ball from the entrance, making it easy for over-winning to occur. Ta.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a pair of inflow ports 953j (at two locations) are formed at a predetermined interval, so even if the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a is enlarged, the flow up to the inflow port 953j is The rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inflow port 953j is shortened by that amount, and the water can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, a detection device SE1 that detects the inflow of game balls into the ball entry member 953 is arranged at a connecting portion between the inflow port 953j and a recessed portion 955a of a passage member 955, which will be described later. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being entered until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In addition, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap in the direction of gravity with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize port unit 950 are fastened. That is, a pair of closed wing members 945 are arranged between a pair of inflow ports 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is arranged below the second winning a prize opening 140 (a pair of wing members 945) in the direction of gravity. Further, since the pair of wing members 945 is arranged in the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area is difficult to flow down below the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the inflow position of the game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is biased. In this embodiment, as described above, since the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where many game balls flow into the ball entry member 953. The inlet 953j can be brought closer. Thereby, the game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953 can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive winning of game balls to the ball entering member 953.

The passage member 955 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape when viewed from the front is approximately the same as the outer shape of the above-mentioned ball entry member 953 when viewed from the front. Further, the passage member 955 has a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at a position facing the detection hole SE1a of each detection device SE1, and a pair of recessed portions 955a located on the other side in the longitudinal direction from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. A pair of third openings 955c are formed through the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a recess is formed on the other side in the gravity direction of the third openings 955c. The second recessed portion 955f is located between the pair of recessed portions 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage that guides the game ball inserted through the detection hole SE1a, and the recess dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recess dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. be done.

The second opening 955b is a space in which a connecting member 957c and a transmission member 958 of a drive unit 957, which will be described later, are arranged. Further, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed on the inner circumferential surface of the second opening 955b. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space in which the detection device SE2, in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged parallel to the direction of gravity, is arranged, and is set to be approximately the same as the external shape of the detection device SE2 when viewed from the front. . Thereby, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c. Further, in the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 projects toward the ball entry member 953 side in a state arranged inside the third opening 955c.

Furthermore, an engaging portion 955e protrudes toward the drive unit 957 at the edge of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inside the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is disposed in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. Thereby, the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c can be prevented from slipping out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling portion 955d is curved into an arc shape. Further, the end of the rolling portion 955d on the plate member 951 side is connected to the third ball throwing portion 942e of the front unit 940 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be sent to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning a prize port unit 950.

Further, the other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 disposed in the third opening 955c. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. Thereby, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as a passage for the game ball as described above. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the above-mentioned drive unit 960 is disposed, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 99(c) left-right direction) of the passage member 955 is the second recess of the above-mentioned drive unit 960. It is set larger than the distance dimension of the accommodating portion 963 in the transverse direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)).

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h that is formed through the passage member 955 at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and a projection 955g that projects toward the drive unit 957 side. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw that fastens the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The projection 955g is formed in a cylindrical shape, and has a circular fastening hole 955g1 recessed in the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole into which a screw that fastens the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) is screwed together, and is opposite to the elongated hole 963f formed in the second accommodating part 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed in the position where Thereby, the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 includes a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b that covers the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c disposed at a displaced portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a includes a main body 957a1 formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 957a2 that is inserted into the inside of the main body 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body 957a1, and a side of the shaft 957a2 opposite to the main body 957a1. It includes an annular portion 957a3 disposed at the end of the annular portion 957a3, and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

The main body part 957a1 is a coil part that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and due to the magnetism, the shaft part 957a2 to be inserted into the main body part 957a1 is drawn to the inside of the main body part 957a1, so that it can be inserted. be done.

The shaft portion 957a2 is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged with its axial direction facing the passage member 955, and is arranged with a portion on the back base 941 side protruding from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced relative to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 957a2, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be biased in a direction away from the main body portion 957a1. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained separated from the main body portion 957a1. Moreover, when the application (supply) of power is cut off after power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed into a box-like body that covers the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one side of the case member 957b into which the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is open. Further, the case member 957b is formed with an insertion hole 957b1 that penetrates in the axial direction of the shaft portion 957a2, and an opening 957b2 that penetrates on the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw that fastens the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip of the screw. Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. Thereby, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body portion 957a1 via the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed into a plate-shaped body parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c has a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 99(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion. It is provided with a second recessed part 957c2 located on the solenoid 957a side of 957c1 and recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft part 957a2, and an engaging part 957c3 protruding toward the ball entry member 953 side.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the gravity direction when viewed in cross section. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity when viewed from the rear, and is opened from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. In the engaging portion 957c3, a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is provided inside the bent portion. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be given later.

The transmission member 958 is formed into a plate-shaped body that is approximately triangular in side view. The transmission member 958 has a shaft hole 958b that penetrates circularly in the plate thickness direction, a coupling portion 958a that protrudes cylindrical in the plate thickness direction from an end on the coupling member 957c side, and a tip portion that protrudes toward the plate member 951 side. 958c.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) is inserted. Further, the shaft hole 958b is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. Thereby, the transmission member 958 is rotatably supported by the passage member 955.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmitting member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the engagement portion 951d can be pushed up by displacing the tip portion 958c. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, displacement of the plate member 951 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102(a) and 102(b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 along the CII-CII line of FIG. 99(c). FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are perspective front views of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950.

Note that FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a) show the plate member 951 in a closed state, and FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) show the plate member 951 in an open state. The closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body 951a covers the opening of the main body 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body 951a covers the main body 953a of the ball entry member 953. It is in a state separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

As shown in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), when the application (supply) of power to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is cut off, the urging force of the coil spring SP2 causes the shaft portion 957a2 to become a member of the plate member. 951 side (left side in FIG. 102(a)). Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly disposed on the plate member 951 side that is spaced apart from the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmitting member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so the connecting portion 958a is pushed toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, force is transmitted to the distal end portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in the direction of rotation about the shaft hole 958b to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 102(a)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. is rotated to Thereby, the plate member 951 can be maintained in a closed state.

Further, when the plate member 951 is in the closed state, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, if a player makes an unauthorized operation and forcibly opens the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side can be pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the force of unauthorized operation from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 103(b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft portion 957a2 is drawn (adsorbed) inside the main body portion 957a1. It is said to be in a state of Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly disposed on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmitting member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so as the connecting member 957c is displaced, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) (to the right in FIG. 102(b)). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in the direction of rotating the distal end portion 958c around the shaft hole 958b in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102(b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up to the other side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. rotated in the direction of This allows the plate member 951 to be in an open state.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction using its own weight, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 It is possible to suppress the force applied to the As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104(a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104(b) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 along the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104(a). Note that FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached. Moreover, in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), the plate member 951 is shown in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body part 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a that is inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity toward the outside from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 104(a)) of the main body part 953a. A recess 954b recessed at the end of the slope 954a, a protrusion 954c protruding from the connecting portion of the slope 954a and the recess 954b, and a projection 954c provided at each end of the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side. It is formed with an upright wall 954d that stands in series.

The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface for game balls that rolls the game balls flowing between the pair of opposing inflow ports 953j toward the inflow port 953j, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. . Thereby, the game ball flowing between the opposing inflow ports 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inlet 953j (lower side in FIG. 104(b)) and is recessed toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In addition, the concave portion 954b is formed such that the concave distal end surface is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j, and receives the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a. can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that enters from the opening 953a1 of the main body part 953a can be made to flow into the recessed part 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, the game ball can be made to flow into the recessed part 955a of the passage member 955. It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the number of game balls being entered into the ball.

Further, the recess 954b extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (vertical direction in FIG. 104(b)). This allows the rolling surface 953a2 to easily receive game balls rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (left-right direction in FIG. It is possible to guide (inflow) by time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104(b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the recessed portion 954b is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when a plurality of game balls are received in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the width of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). Thereby, when a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow toward the passage member 955 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-mentioned inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 across the recess 954b, and is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j (passage member 955). It is formed by As a result, the game balls that have entered the second inclined surface 954e are rolled in front of the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward slope of the second inclined surface 954e, and quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The standing wall 954d is formed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the second inclined surface 954e, and also directs the rolling direction of the game balls flowing into the second inclined surface 954e toward the inlet 953j (path member 955) side. 2 guide surface 954d1.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inlet 953j side toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955, and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2, and also forms a contact with the longitudinal end of the rolling surface 953a2. It is arranged between the passage member 955 and the passage member 955. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the main body part 953a from the longitudinal end of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protruding portions 954c are formed at both longitudinal ends of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and protrude toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Thereby, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling outward on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 104(b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the concave portion 954b (path member 955). . That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the slope 954a through the recess 954b. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protrusion 954c is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, and one surface is connected to the surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one of the remaining two surfaces is connected to the side edge 954c3 on the side of the recess 954b. is connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the remaining guide surface 954c1 is an opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the game ball (the longitudinally outward direction of the rolling surface 953a2) of the inclined surface 954a of the game ball. Formed with a slant to the side. Thereby, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the recess 954b (path member 955).

That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the slope 954a to the second slope 954e through the recess 954b. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, as described above, the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends in the width direction of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a, so when the plate member 951 is in an open state, The end of the plate member 951 can be located on one end (upper side in the gravity direction) in the gravity direction than the rolling surface 953a2. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is in the open state, it is possible to suppress the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the main body part 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body part 951a.

Furthermore, since the game ball guided toward the opening 953a1 by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be decelerated before the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the slope 954a through the recess 954b. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inlet 953j to the side portion 954c2 at the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. This allows the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time while suppressing the game balls from jumping out from the opening 953a1. I can do it.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a facing the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is used for game balls whose rolling speed is relatively low (slow). Since there is a low risk of it flying out from the surface, by making it contact the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1, it is possible to prevent it from rolling from the slope 954a through the recess 954b to the second slope 954e. Therefore, it is possible to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided over the guide surface 954c1 to the standing wall 954d formed on the second slope 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by climbing over the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erected wall 954d, and it is possible to reliably decelerate the game ball. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be prevented from jumping out from the opening 953a1, and can be made to quickly flow into the inlet 953j (path member 955). As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In addition, a side edge 954c3 of the end face of the protruding portion 954c opposite to the standing wall 954d extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. A second side edge 954d2 of the end surface of the standing wall 954d opposite to the protrusion 954c extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The side edge portion 954c3 has a length L30 (see FIG. 104(b)) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction of Thereby, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge 954d2 of the standing wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated, and can be easily positioned near the passage member 955. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the distance L32 (see FIG. 104(a)) between the intermediate position of the standing wall 954d in its thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge 954d2 of the upright wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protruding portion 954c is located on the extension line of the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d in the inclination direction, and the game ball guided toward the recess 954b (path member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1 is rolled. Even if the dynamic speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the protrusion 954c and decelerated. Therefore, game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The distance L33 (see FIG. 104(a)) from the concave surface of the concave portion 954b to the protruding tip of the protruding portion 954c is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. In addition, as described above, the protruding portion 954c is formed in a continuous manner with the side surface of the recessed portion 954b, so that the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact with the protruding portion 954c. Therefore, such game balls can be decelerated and can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the assembled state of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described. FIG. 105(a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105(b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960. FIG. 106(a) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 105(a), and FIG. 106(b) is a sectional view on the CVIb-CVIb line in FIG. 106(a). It is a sectional view of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in .

In addition, in FIGS. 105(a) and 105(b), the wiring HS1 is connected to the solenoid 957a that operates the plate member 951, and the wiring HS1 is connected to the solenoid 610 that operates the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83(a)). A part of the wiring HS2 is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 106(b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 that detects the number of game balls that have flowed into the specific winning hole 65a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83(a)) of the winning opening unit 930 is located at a position where a part thereof overlaps with the specific winning opening unit 950 when viewed from the front. is formed. Thereby, a space can be formed on the side opposite to the gaming area (back side) of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of wing members 945).

Here, conventionally, the second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 that open or close the second winning opening 140, a first driving means that drives the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning opening 65a. A gaming machine is known that includes a board member 951 that opens or closes the specific winning opening 65a, and a second drive means that drives the board member 951. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means are respectively disposed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, so that the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member There is a problem in that it is difficult to arrange other members or devices on the back side of the member 951, and it is difficult to utilize the space effectively.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, it is possible to form a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. Yes (see Figure 97). That is, by consolidating the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), other members and devices can be arranged. A space for this can be secured on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 (second prize opening 140), and the space can be used effectively accordingly.

Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed near the central opening formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) (where the center frame 86 is disposed) is moved far from the central opening. By disposing it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) disposed on the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit that is visible to the player through the inside of the center opening (center frame 86) is attached to the base plate. 60 (opposite side to the gaming area) to make it difficult for players to see.

That is, the movable body of the operating unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 when normally (retracted), making it difficult for players to see, and when movable (extended) the movable body of the operating unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 (center frame 86). ), which makes it easier for players to see, the operation means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed near the central opening can be moved to the specific winning opening located far from the central opening. By disposing the movable body at a position horizontally overlapping with the unit 950, the movable body can be easily disposed at a position away from the central opening when retreating. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operating unit during normal (retreat) mode. As a result, when the movable body is operated to be in an extended state, it is possible to easily provide interest to the player.

Further, the projected area of the plate member 951 when viewed from the front is set to be larger than the projected area of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 that includes two displacement members (a plate member 951 and a pair of wing members 945), respective driving means (a driving unit 957 and a Since the drive unit 960) is disposed, it is possible to easily dispose each drive means on the back side of one displacement member (plate member 951), and also on the back side of the other displacement member (pair of wing members 945). You can create a space.

Furthermore, since the plate member 951 is formed to have a larger projected area when viewed from the front than the projected area when viewed from the front of the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951, The dead space on the back side of the prize opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105(a), a drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and a drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are operated in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (in the left-right direction in FIG. 105(a)). are arranged in parallel along the Therefore, the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) is disposed at a position farther from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see Figure A01) than the pair of wing members 945, and The longitudinal direction is arranged perpendicular to the separation direction. This makes it easier to secure a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. As a result, the space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling part 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling part 943a is disposed through the second prize opening 140 of the back base 941, and the drive unit 960 is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940. 941, the drive unit 960 can be held (disposed) on the front base 943 at the same time as the rear base 941 is fastened and fixed to the front base 943. This can prevent forgetting to attach the drive unit 960 when attaching the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (gaming board 13).

The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are set at substantially the same position on the opposite side (back side) to the plate member 951 side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the drive unit Wiring HS1 and wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 on the side opposite to the plate member 951 (back side). Thereby, the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610 can be easily arranged together. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wiring from coming apart on the side opposite to the gaming area (back side) of the game board 13, and it is possible to suppress the wiring HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged with the axial directions of the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957a2 facing in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the sides of the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 957a2 opposite to the shaft portions 961b and 957a2. This makes it easier to combine the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the drive unit 957.

The drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other. This makes it possible to simplify the shape of a partitioning member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and limits the flow of an electromagnetic field to the area where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are disposed.

That is, the side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed to have different sizes, or the side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed on both sides in the direction of gravity. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the direction of gravity, both side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the direction of gravity form a step, so the sections are divided according to the step. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of such a partition member becomes complicated.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed at positions where both side surfaces of the main body part 961a and the main body part 957a1 in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

Note that the partition member is a conductive barrier that partitions the area where the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are installed from other areas and restricts the flow of electromagnetic waves between these two areas. It is formed from a metal plate.

Moreover, the transmission member 965 is arranged between the passage member 955 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the rolling part 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is provided at the tip (insertion part 965e). Since a displacement member 966 is disposed that slides to open and close the pair of wing members 945 as the pair of wing members 945 rotates, compared to a conventional product in which the pair of wing members 945 is opened and closed only by a rotating member, the second prize is achieved. Space can be secured on the back side of the opening 140 and on both sides (lateral sides) of the rolling portion 943a. In addition, unlike conventional products, there is no need to bend the throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning port 140 toward the specific winning port unit 950 in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, so the second The winning hole 140 can be brought close to the specific winning hole 65a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping with the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair on the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 in front view. will be established. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, if, for example, the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1, so that such illicit act cannot be carried out. It can be made difficult.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) that drives the wing member 945 is disposed on the back side of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted through the gap in the pachinko machine 10. If a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the gaming area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like for the purpose of fraudulently operating the gaming machine, it will be difficult for store staff to discover the fraudulent activity. There was a risk of being exposed.

That is, since the plate member 951 is disposed on the gaming area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden by the plate member 951, and the store staff cannot prevent fraud caused by the ball entry member 953. is said to be difficult to discover.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in order to secure the path from the specific prize opening 65a to the first driving means, if a tool such as a drill is used to perform hole-drilling, the detection Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, fraudulent activity can be discovered by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and tampering is done to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be moved to the plate member 951 by closing the plate member 951. Since the location where the fraud has been committed cannot be seen, it is particularly effective to detect fraud by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1.

In addition, since the detection device SE1 is a reused item (ready-made product) that is the same as the detection devices that detect other game balls (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3), a degree of freedom is ensured in its external size. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the opposing detection devices SE1. Therefore, if the player drills a hole in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like, aiming at the gap, there is a risk that the player's fraudulent activity may not be reported to the clerk.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to opposite sides of the pair of detection devices SE1. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when a player penetrates the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 with a drill or the like, the wire HS3 can be broken by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 notifies the error, making it easier for the clerk to discover fraud.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure the path from the specific prize opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 may be damaged (disconnected) due to the fraudulent act. ) can be easily done. Alternatively, it is possible to make the user recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

Moreover, an annular protrusion 953c into which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is screwed is formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side (E10(a) lower side) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit 960 can be hidden, making it more difficult to commit such fraudulent acts. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. By setting the fastening position to , the unshielded area in the front of the drive unit 960 can be compensated for by the screw, making it more difficult for fraudulent acts to occur.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the wiring HS3 is arranged so as to be wound around the annular projection 953c of the ball entry member 953. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side of the ball entry member 953, such tampering can be made more difficult. Alternatively, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

Therefore, when the player aims a drill or the like to penetrate the gap between the opposing detection devices SE1, the wire HS3 can be easily broken by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 notifies the error, making it easier for the clerk to discover fraud.

Further, the wiring HS3 is arranged so as to be wound around the annular projection 953c. This makes it difficult for force in the shearing direction to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharge direction, and the detection is performed. A force in the shearing direction acts on the connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c, when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the ejection direction of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, the connecting portion with the detection device SE1 The direction of the force acting on the wiring HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connection portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position that is biased towards the end of the wiring HS3 of the detection device SE1 on the opposite side to the discharge side. Therefore, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screw engagement position (annular protrusion 953c), so the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened to tamper with the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, such tampering can be made more difficult.

Next, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. 107(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. 108(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the ball throwing unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 that is disposed on the player side (game area side) and has a space inside which a game ball can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980. and a passage unit 990 disposed on the opposite side.

The sorting unit 980 includes an opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that is continuous with the first winning port 64 and second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above, and the opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b). ) can be received inside the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the gaming area via the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 980 will be given later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction. The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first through hole 991a to second through hole 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 through the openings. A detailed explanation of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. 109(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109(b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 112(a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). It is.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the sorting unit 980 has a rear base 985, a front base 981 disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and a rotating unit between the front base 981 and the rear base. It is formed mainly of a distribution section 983 disposed in a possible state, and a cover member 987 disposed on the back side of the rear base 985 at a position corresponding to the distribution section 983.

The back base 985 is made of a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material, and includes a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recessed portion 985h recessed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b and a protruding portion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recessed portion 985h. be prepared and formed.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of circular fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating the outer edge of the base portion 985a, and an inclined surface that slopes toward one side in the direction of gravity on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw passing through a passage unit 990 described later is screwed. Thereby, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a portion of openings 985b to 985f, which will be described later, on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Thereby, the downward direction of the game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, game balls can easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side in FIG. 109(b)), and is formed approximately at the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 109(b)). be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed to a size that can accommodate a portion of a distribution section 983, which will be described later, inside, and is provided with a bearing section 985j that protrudes in an annular shape from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The opening 985b and the opening 985c are respectively formed at both ends in the lateral direction of the base portion 985a, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surfaces on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) are inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (FIG. 109(b) left-right direction), and its position in the gravity direction (FIG. 109(b) vertical direction) is approximately the same as the openings 985b and 985c. set to the position. Further, like the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward as it goes toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d. In addition, the openings 985e and 985f extend in the direction of gravity into inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, which are spaces that open on the front base 981 side, and discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, which have spaces that open on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. It is formed mainly by intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 that communicate the passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. . Thereby, the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be made to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

Furthermore, a recessed portion 985f4 is formed in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, which is recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the throwing direction (direction of gravity) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a cutout for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and disposed from the back side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. can. Thereby, game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, in the detection device SE3, since the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is formed parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily utilized when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 and the connecting portion with the detection hole SE1a. Note that the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed in a continuous manner with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the direction of gravity from increasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. In addition, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can flow into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, and the balls can be passed through the spaces and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opening 985d. Further, like the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Furthermore, since the housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semicircular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

The protruding portion 986e is provided in a cylindrical shape from a position opposite to the above-described bearing portion 985j with the base portion 985a interposed therebetween. The protruding portion 986e also includes a circular fastening hole formed in the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw inserted through a cover member 987 (described later) is screwed. By screwing the screw while the cover member 987 is in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel a magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution section 983, which will be described later, to facilitate the displacement of the distribution section 983.

The front base 981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material. The front base 981 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is larger than the back base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protruding part 982.

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g extending through the plate thickness direction at its outer peripheral edge, and a first guide wall protruding toward the rear base 985 side. 981f and a second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating near the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulge 982. It is formed mainly with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .

The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulge 982, which will be described later, sandwiched therebetween. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed below a bulge 982, which will be described later, in the direction of gravity, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two locations.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d have an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the periphery of the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and at the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. By doing so, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened together.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b that stands up along the edge thereof on the side opposite to the rear base 985 side (on the near side in the paper of FIG. 109(a)). In addition, the through hole 981c is a part that communicates with the second winning hole 140 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 140 It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the ball.

The side wall portion 981b is formed in such a size that the upright end surface contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c of the winning hole unit 930 in a state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located closer to the other end side in the gravity direction than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the back base 985 It is formed with a downward slope towards the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a projection 981b1 projecting from the erected tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside thereof, and a game ball flowing into the inside from the inflow port 982d passes through the bulging portion 982. The ball-throwing path TR0 includes a first path TR1 and a second path TR2 that branch from the ball-throwing path TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is bent toward the rear base 985 side and stands approximately halfway between the inlet 982d, which is formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity. It is formed mainly of an upright wall 982a and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inlet 982d is cut out and has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that corresponds to the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. Formed in overlapping positions.

The inlet 982d also includes a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes toward the side opposite to the rear base 985 at the edge on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the second protrusion 982d1 The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed notch 942g1.

Further, the distance L34 (see FIG. 109(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is from the inner edge of the first concave notch 942g1 to the first thrown ball. The distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)) to the inner edge of the portion 942g on one side in the gravity direction is set larger than the distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging part 982) and the first ball throwing part 942g are connected to each other. You can avoid getting caught in between.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulged portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. Further, the standing wall 982a is formed below the inflow port 982d in the gravity direction, and includes an abutment portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the standing direction above the gravity direction.

The standing wall 982a has a horizontal separation distance L36 (see FIG. 112(b)) from the inner edge of the outer circumferential portion of the bulging portion 982 that is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can be placed between the opposing sides. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed as spaces through which the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can pass.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, which will be described later, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are thrown to either direction. The distribution section 983 is configured to be able to alternately send game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the throwing of the game balls flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

On the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the standing wall 982a, a bearing portion 982c is formed which protrudes in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulge portion 982 toward the rear base 985 side. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports a distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set to be approximately the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Furthermore, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, so when combining the front base 981 and the back base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by contacting the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. Note that a detailed explanation of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be given later.

The recessed portion 982e and the recessed portion 982f are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend on one side in the direction of gravity by the distance of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982g is formed between the recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j, and the recessed direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Furthermore, a third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, it is possible to downsize the distribution unit 980. .

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and extends obliquely toward the back base 985 side toward the one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing from the opening 985b to the opening 985f when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f to make it easier to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recessed portions 982h and 982j, and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected end surfaces thereof descend toward the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 109(b)). tilted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the upright end surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1, and are guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, It is possible to easily flow into the opening 985e and the opening 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided toward the rear base 985 side, and collided with the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, thereby causing the game balls to flow through the opening 985e. and can easily flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the distance between the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the slope of the slope portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased and durability can be improved.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 become difficult to visually recognize from the player side. Furthermore, when the guide parts 982h1 and 982j1 are set up on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, so that the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily recognized even through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner, visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the facing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a substantially T-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the distribution part 983 penetrates through the T-shaped acting part 983a on one side, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting part 983a, and a connecting part between the acting part 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a through hole 983c, a contact portion 983d that bulges out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e that is connected to the working portion 983a and the back base 985 side of the intermediate plate 983b. It is formed mainly by

The through-hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution part 983, the front base 981 and the rear base can be assembled while the distribution part 983 is rotatable. 985.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed to extend toward the outside in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from its tip. The distance L37 (see FIG. 112(b)) to the inside is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. In addition, the intermediate plate 983b allows the distribution portion 983 to be rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball from one side of the first passage TR1 is regulated to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a state where it is regulated.

The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. Moreover, the connection position of the action part 983a with the contact part 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the distribution part 983 via the inlet 982d is placed in a state where a load is applied to the action part 983a side. As a result, the distribution section 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed into a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than the recess dimension of the recess portion 985h of the back base 985. is set small. Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recessed part 985h. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d can be prevented from being caught inside the recess 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 that is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b side from the through hole 983c at the radially outer end portion on the back side of the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed into a circular shape having an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated therein from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and is disposed in a state where it repels the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985. As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distributing part 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis by the magnetic force acting on the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985, so that the magnetic body 988c rotates in one direction or the other direction in which the acting part 983a extends. It can be placed in a tilted position.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled, and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is You can prevent yourself from getting out of it. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing section 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution section 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution section 983 can be simplified.

In addition, the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 can be prevented from being magnetically attracted to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is disposed on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the rear base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed with two first recesses 987a and a second recess 987b, which are circular in shape when viewed from the front and are recessed in parallel in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the above-mentioned accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating part 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b as described above, the magnetic substance 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b is accommodated. It can be suppressed from slipping out of the portion 986b.

The second recess 987b includes a through hole 987b1 on the bottom surface thereof for fastening and fixing to the back base 985. Further, the second recessed portion 987b has an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate and position the second recess 987b in the protruding part 986e of the rear base 985, and in the positioned state, screws can be inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding part 986e through the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution section 983 when game balls flow into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d will be described. 113(a) and 113(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). In addition, below, the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 is displaced from the state which regulates the throwing of a game ball to one side of 1st path|passage TR1 to the state which restricts the throwing of a game ball to the other side of 2nd path|passage TR2. Only the case will be explained, and a description of the case where the throwing of the game ball from the state of regulating the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second passage TR2 to the one side of the first passage TR1 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 (before the game ball contacts the action section 983a), as described above, the game ball is distributed to the distribution section 983. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), so that the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the second passage TR2 side. Note that the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113(a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, the connecting position of the acting part 983a with the abutting part 983d is set on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connecting position with the abutting part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. , the load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, the distribution part 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1 side, as shown in FIG. 113(b). It is said that Note that the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsion direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side of the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to a state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution section 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Furthermore, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution section 983 can be maintained. Therefore, each time a game ball is thrown, the distribution section 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b and throw the game ball one ball to the first path TR1 and the second path TR2.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings that are opened on the sorting unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 disposed in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball; a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and that throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992; The detection device SE4 is disposed between three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 also has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 side, and a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first insertion hole 991a. a second insertion hole 991b formed through the second insertion hole 991b, a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d formed on both sides of the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in front view. It is formed mainly by having a plurality of circular through holes 991f formed therethrough.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Furthermore, when combining the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980 can be received inside the recessed part 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a portion of the detection device SE3 from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the protruding portion 991c2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the left in FIG. 114(a)).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is oriented horizontally. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 114(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and the fifth insertion hole The fifth insertion hole 922 mainly includes a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating on one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the fifth insertion hole 922 in the gravity direction, and an upright wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the inner space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is continuous when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled toward the third passage member 993 side (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d that projects horizontally, and a projecting wall 992e that projects horizontally from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L-shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and has a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. Wiring for a detection device SE4 and a detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, which will be described later, are inserted between the engagement portion 992d and the vertical wall 992a. Thereby, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out from the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The protruding wall 992e is formed to protrude from both horizontal sides of the upright wall 992a in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a through hole 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the protruding wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting a screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where its internal space is continuous with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Ru. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received into the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, a guide wall 992c1 that stands upright toward the third passage member 993 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 that stands upright on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the sixth insertion hole 992c, and an end in the extending direction of the first wall portion 992c2, and and a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e formed in the third passage member 993 and the engaging portion 993d. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions on the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the inner space of the detection hole SE1a is continuous with the inner space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a and is detected by the detection device SE4, and is also thrown toward the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 includes an annular projection 992f that projects toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114(a)). The annular projection 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, and thereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed in a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the gravity direction. It mainly includes an erected wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Moreover, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position continuous with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (inclined downward toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). be done. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 114(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the gravity direction of the upright wall 992a of the second passage member 992 (lower side in FIG. 114(b)). As described above, since the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 114(b)), the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 described above can be brought close to each other, and the external shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced in size.

The standing wall 993e is such that when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance between the second passage member 992 and the first wall 992c2 is equal to the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the shorter side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of SE1a. This allows positioning of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity.

Further, a first wall portion 992c2 is formed on the upstream side (on the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown, for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in order to prevent fraud by the player, so a slight positional deviation in the height of the rolling surface of the game ball may cause damage to the inside of the hole SE1a. In this embodiment, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is provided on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being misaligned. As a result, the game ball inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 bent toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip. When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 that is equal to the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. The distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of Thereby, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f. It is formed with a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c includes a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f on the bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted from the third passage member 993 side through the through hole 993c1 and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 Since the ball throwing unit 970 (distributing unit 980) can be replaced with another unit and a different unit can be installed, the game that flows down the game area can be A different game format can be played without affecting the flow of the ball.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. 117(a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117(b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. 118(a) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line in FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 118(b) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line in FIG. It is a diagram. Note that the same parts as those of the above-mentioned distribution unit 980 are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 disposed on the gaming area side and a back base 1985 disposed on the opposite side of the front base 1981 to the gaming area side. Formed in preparation for.

The front base 1981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 when viewed from the front. The front base 1981 mainly includes a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a toward the player side (the side opposite to the back base 1985).

Further, the front base 1981 is formed from a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 (in this embodiment, yellow). This makes it easy for the player to recognize whether the game board 13 is provided with the distribution unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980.

In other words, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the sorting unit 980 is installed and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the exchange unit 1980 is installed are introduced into the same store. As will be described later, both specifications have the same shape of the gaming area (the front of the game board 13), making it difficult for the player to determine which specification it is. This makes it easier for players to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) it has.

The outer shape of the base plate 1981a when viewed from the front is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the sorting unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (the specifications are changed), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) can be placed on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set. Therefore, there is no need to change the shape of the base plate 60 when specifications are changed by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside of the bulging portion 1982. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an inlet 982d formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension in the horizontal direction of the bulging portion 1982 is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside thereof and flow down. . Furthermore, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is set at substantially the same position in the gravity direction as the inner surface of the opening 985d formed in the rear base 1985 on one side in the gravity direction. Thereby, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be thrown to the opening 985d in the order in which they flow into the inflow port 982d.

The outer shape of the back base 1985 when viewed from the front is set to be approximately the same as the outer shape of the back base 985 of the sorting unit 980, and the opening 985d that communicates with the inner space of the bulging portion 1982 and the inner space of the through hole 981c communicate with each other. It is formed with an opening 985g.

According to the exchange unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the outer shape of the base plate 1981a when viewed from the front is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980. can be easily replaced (change of specifications).

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball entrance unit is arranged. machine is known. According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one with a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while reusing the game board. can. However, in the game machine described above, since the ball entry unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space in advance in front of the game board, for example, according to the maximum number of passages. Therefore, when using a ball entry unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem in that space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (ball entry unit) has an inlet 982d, a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 connected to the inlet 982d, and A winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the front side, and a winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 through the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and is connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Since the passage unit 990 is provided with a passage unit 990, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning slot unit 930 on the front of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front of the game board. There's no need. Therefore, by replacing the sorting unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, the game board 13 (base board 60 and front unit 940) can be used (commonly used) and the front side of the game board 13 can be changed when changing the specifications of the game board 13. space can be used effectively.

In addition, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed to have a smaller external shape than the winning opening unit. In addition, since it is disposed at a position overlapping the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, the player can see the distribution unit 980 through the front unit 940, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, in order to make the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential that the base plate 60 be made of a light-transmitting material; for example, the base plate 60 may be made of a plywood board. , a sticker is attached to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since it is also permissible to paint the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is made of a colored semi-transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the flow passes through the front unit 940 and flows down the inside (passage) of the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest in the game can be increased.

Further, since the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the front Through the unit 940, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball changes its position in the front-back direction and flows down, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, the game ball passage of the distribution unit 980 is formed to include a ball throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the ball throwing passage TR0. Further, the sorting unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 that detects game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when manufacturing a game machine with a different specification by changing from the distribution unit 980 with many passing paths for game balls to the replacement unit 1980 with fewer passages, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

That is, in a structure in which the detection device SE3 is disposed in the passage unit 990 disposed downstream of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be disposed for the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the downstream passage When changing from the distribution unit 980 with two flow passages to the replacement unit 1980 with one flow passage, it is sufficient to install one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980 is There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 will be provided accordingly. On the other hand, if the detection device SE3 is arranged in a path branching from the ball throwing path TR0, when changing the distribution unit 980 to the replacement unit 1980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is installed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in determining the number of locations.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 that detects the inflow of game balls into the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990, as described above. Therefore, the detection devices disposed in the sorting unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be distributed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

Further, the exchange unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b that throws the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 at the same position as the distribution unit 980. Therefore, similarly to the sorting unit 980, when disposing the exchange unit 1980 in the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930), the side wall portion 981b can be used to position the exchange unit 1980. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling part 943a and the side wall part 981b are connected is the same, so by positioning the side wall part 981b with respect to the rolling part 943a, the replacement unit 1980 However, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

Furthermore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, the purpose of positioning the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is to suppress positional deviation (step) from occurring at the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of positional deviations (steps) can be more effectively suppressed compared to the case where other portions are positioned. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the arrangement of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described. FIG. 119 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CXIX-CXIX in FIG. A01.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in a state where they are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portion formed on the ball throwing unit 970 is It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

To explain in detail, in the first ball throwing section 942g and the inflow port 982d, the second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d is arranged inside the first recessed notch 942g1 formed at the first ball throwing section 942g. Further, in the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, a protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside a second recessed notch 942c1 formed on the second ball throwing portion 942c.

Further, the second ball throwing section 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall section 981b of the distribution unit 980 are arranged in an internal space surrounded by an arm section 962e formed in the drive unit 960 and a wall section 962f.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a first member communicating with the first passage of the first member. A game machine is known that has two passages and a second member disposed on the back side of the game board. The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and flows into the second passage on the back side of the game board. Pass through 2 passages. Thereby, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front and back direction, which can provide interest to the player.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball will be inhibited, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member will be ensured. You are requested to do so. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the first member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, it is necessary to invert the game board. This requires a separate step of forming a positioning hole just for the second member, which is not practical.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 are placed between the opposing projections 962g of the drive unit 960. Wall 942d is inserted. When the ball throwing unit 970 is disposed in the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 970 is inserted between the opposing arm portions 962e from which the protruding portion 962g is protruded.

That is, the drive unit 960 includes a protruding portion 962g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. Equipped with. Thereby, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located on the outer side of the pair of second ball throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940 in the opposing direction. As a result, the protruding portion 962g of the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970, so that the front unit The positioning of the ball throwing unit 970 relative to the ball throwing unit 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the purpose of positioning the ball throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is to suppress positional deviation (level difference) from occurring at the connecting portion between the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. (The connecting part between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b) can be directly positioned by the guide part 962b (arm part 962e), compared to the case where other parts are positioned by the guide part 962b. The occurrence of positional deviations (level differences) can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed in the inner space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 while being disposed in the front unit 940. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide an opening for arranging the drive unit 960. In other words, the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second ball sending part 942c and the side wall part 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as an arrangement space, so that the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly. , it is possible to reduce product costs.

As described above, since the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed (formed so as to be able to be held) in the front unit 940 including the second ball throwing portion 942c, the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are provided on the front and back surfaces of the game board 13. When attaching each ball throwing unit 970, there is no need to separately attach the drive unit 960, and by attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of attachment can be improved accordingly.

Furthermore, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the protruding portion 962g and arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball throwing portion 942c, respectively. Ru. Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, it is necessary to engage the projecting part 962g and the arm part 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball throwing part 942c, respectively. There is no need to do this separately. Therefore, the installation workability can be improved accordingly.

Further, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed to be able to engage with the ball throwing unit 970 from the opposite side of the front unit 940, so that By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back of the base plate 60 after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. can. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other, and when the front unit 940 and drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f are connected to the front unit 940. The above-mentioned displacement member 966 is disposed between facing the back base 941. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the projections 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are inserted, in the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 can be blocked from the outside by the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960, and it is possible to suppress dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, the sliding movement of the protruding portion 966a is prevented from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and the pair of wing members can be stably opened or closed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state between the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b will be described as a representative example. 120(a) and 121(a) are partially enlarged sectional views of the game board 13 in range CXXa in FIG. 119, and FIG. 120(b) and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 along the line -CXXb. In addition, in FIGS. 121(a) and 121(b), a state in which the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120(a) and 120(b) is illustrated. Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, a distance L38 between the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 and the rolling surface 981c1 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which the game ball flowed down from the first passage member passes. machine is known. However, in this structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected, misalignment between them is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There was a problem in that a step was formed at the connecting part, which could impede the smooth flow of the game balls.

Moreover, the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60, respectively, as described above. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (thickness is increased), there is a risk that the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may become separated in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 120(a)). There is. In that case, there was a problem in that a gap was formed between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b, which could hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball can It is possible to make the timing of passing through the step and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, the gap K1 of the space formed between the game ball rolling part 943a of the second ball sending part 942c and the game ball rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall part 981b, and the second ball sending part The gap K2 of the space formed between the second recessed part 942c1 of 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall part 981b is formed at a different position in the rolling direction of the game ball (left and right direction in FIG. 121(a)). . Thereby, the game ball rolled from the second ball throwing part 942c to the side wall part 981b can be suppressed from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance that the game ball receives can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from stopping in the gap between the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, a displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the sliding groove 966a2 is formed linearly, but the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment is formed on both outer sides in the lateral direction of the displacement member 8966. It is provided with a recessed portion 8966a6 recessed toward the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the thickness direction at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in front view is formed larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and when the displacement member 8966 is disposed in the front unit 940, a Two winning openings 140 are arranged.

The displacement member 8966 also has a protrusion 966a that protrudes from one end (top in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) in the transverse direction (horizontal direction in FIG. ) and a bulging portion 966b that bulges out from the back side (toward the front side in FIG. 122).

The protruding portion 966a has a sliding groove 8966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the thickness direction, and contact portions 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the transverse direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Be prepared.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted, and extends in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and has a recess 8966a6 on the outside in the lateral direction on the other side in the gravity direction (gravitational direction). It is recessed toward the upper side (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension of the concave portion 8966a6 in the short direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusion 945b. Further, the moving side side surface of the protrusion 945b extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (left-right direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction is the same as that of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, at least a part of the protrusion 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 is connected to the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be restricted by contacting the protrusion 945b.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slid to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), so that the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is moved to the recess 8966a6. It can be extracted from inside. Thereby, the protrusion 945b can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2, and the protrusion 945b can be displaced.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, it is possible to restrict the drive from being transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 By releasing the engagement with the protrusion 945b, the protrusion 945b can be displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the displacement member 8966 is slid to one side in the gravity direction (downward in the gravity direction). Furthermore, since the recessed portion 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (the direction of gravity), it can receive the protrusion 945b as the displacement member 8966 slides. Therefore, the state in which the protrusion 945b is received in the recess 8966a6 can be easily maintained by using the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 8966.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the distal end of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is disposed inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, but in the ninth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is The tip of the connecting hole 966b1 protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit 8960 and a displacement member 966 in the ninth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) correspond to FIG. 96(a). Further, in FIG. 123(a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 123(b), the wing member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forcibly opened) by the player and changed from the closed state to the open state. An engaged state in the middle of displacement is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment is bent when viewed from the side, and has a distal end portion 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a distal end portion 9965a. The rotary portion 965b is connected to the rotary portion 965b and extends toward the connecting member 964.

As in the seventh embodiment, the width of the tip portion 9965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as it moves away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 9965a has an insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 at the distal end, and an upstanding portion protruding from the connecting side with the rotating shaft 965c toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). 965f.

The insertion portion 9965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1, and the tip end thereof is formed in the connecting hole 966b1. Projected from 966b1. In addition, the insertion portion 9966e includes an engaging portion 9965e3 that protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and an engaging portion 9965e3 that bulges out from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. A bulging portion 965e1 is formed.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed to protrude in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and is formed at a position where the abutting surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotating shaft 965c side is separated from the front surface of the displacement member 966 by a slight gap. be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123(b), when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y (the other side in the gravity direction), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact and the transmission is transmitted. Displacement of member 9965 can be regulated.

To explain in detail, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y, the abutted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 abuts the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. . In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y due to rotational displacement and is also displaced toward the rotation axis 965c. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by displacing the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotating shaft 965c. This restricts the displacement of the transmission member 9965, and therefore the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of arrow Y is similarly restricted.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the coupling member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 rotates before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are connected to each other. Contact can be suppressed. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the transmission member 965, the displacement member 966 can be displaced.

As described above, the projections 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are connected to the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other, so that rotation of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member 945 from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 9965e and an engagement portion 9965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 9965e, and allows the displacement member 966 to be displaced with the wing member 945 closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged with each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

Next, referring to FIG. 124, a transmission member 10965 and a displacement member 10966 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is only disposed inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, but in the tenth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 10965 The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connecting hole 10966b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

124(a) and 124(b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit 10960 and a displacement member 10966 in the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 124(a) corresponds to FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 124(b) corresponds to FIG. 96(b). Further, FIG. 124(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 124(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment is bent when viewed from the side, and has a distal end 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a distal end 10965a. It is formed from a rotating part that is connected to the connecting member 964 and extends toward the connecting member 964 side.

As in the seventh embodiment, the width of the tip portion 10965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as it moves away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 10965a has an insertion portion 10965e inserted into a connecting hole 10966b of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, and a rotating shaft 965c that protrudes toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with an upright portion 965f.

The insertion portion 10965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connection hole 10966b. In addition, the insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 that protrudes from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and a bulging portion that bulges toward the inner surface of the connecting hole 966b1 from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed into a plate shape that is curved around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is disposed inside a recessed portion 10966d of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, when the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 includes an abutment surface 10965e4 on the side surface (inner surface) on the rotating shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed to face a contact surface 10966dc of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, with a predetermined gap in between when the wing member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124(a)) at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c when viewed from the front is larger than the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 and the second ball throwing section 942c (see FIG. 88), and the second opening 966c is in a state where the second ball throwing section 942c is inserted inside. It will be placed in Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area via the second winning opening 140 can be suppressed from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 10966 also has a protrusion 966a that protrudes from one end in the longitudinal direction in the transverse direction, a protrusion 966b that protrudes from the other end in the longitudinal direction toward the back side, and a protrusion 966b on the opposite surface of the protrusion 966b. It mainly includes a recessed portion 10966d.

The recessed portion 10966d is recessed so as to be continuous with the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and includes an abutted surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The contact surface 10966d1 is formed by being curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above when the wing member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap with the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are placed facing each other and separated from each other. Further, the abutted surface 10966d1 includes an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed to be inclined toward the back side toward the one side abutted portion 966b2 side. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed radially inward from the abutted surface 10966d1 centered on the rotating shaft 965c.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the distance dimension between the opposing portions from the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 to the one side abutted portion 966b2 is the insertion portion in a front view with the wing member 945 closed. It is set larger than the width dimension L39 in the gravity direction of 10965e (see FIG. 124(a)). As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the abutment surface 10965e4 is displaced toward the back side, and the abutment surface 10965e4 and the abutted surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other, thereby restricting the rotation of the transmission member 10965. This can be suppressed.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven to displace the wing member 945 to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. be done. As a result, the transmission member 10965 is rotated about the rotating shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, so that the transmission member 10965 rotates around the rotation shaft 965c. When the contact surface 10965e4 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a slight gap from the contact surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, since the distance between the opposite contact portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 and the one side contact portion 966b2 is formed to be larger than the width L36 of the transmission member 10965, the transmission member By rotating 10965, insertion portion 10965e disposed inside recess 10966d of displacement member 10966 can be brought out to the outside of recess 10966d. Thereby, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slid and displaced. Therefore, the pair of wing members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

Further, when displacing the pair of wing members 945 from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 slides along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the abutted surface 10966d1. By doing so, it is possible to displace the engaging portion 10965e3 inside the recessed portion 10966d while displacing the displacement member 10966 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is displaced to the open state, when the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slid and displaced with the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 disposed inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced along with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 10966, the engagement portion 10965e3 is displaced toward the back side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 contacts the contact surface 10966d1 of the recessed portion 10966d, and rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is regulated. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, one side abutted portion One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction is brought into contact with the insertion portion 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction (bulging portion When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the gravity direction to the position where the transmission member 965e1) comes into contact, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released, so that the transmission member 10965 can be displaced without rotating. Slide displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly protected from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated to a position where the engagement portion 10965e3 comes out from the inside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 can be slid to the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

Next, the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been explained, but the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment is arranged from the second winning opening 140. The ball is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment. 126(a) and 126(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that FIG. 126(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 126(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the front unit 940 in the eleventh embodiment has a pair of second guide walls 11942b extending in the direction of gravity on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the opposing second ball throwing portions 942c is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second ball throwing portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b have first tooth surfaces 11942b1, which are gear tooth surfaces, formed on opposing sides thereof. Further, the pair of second guide walls 11942b are set so that the distance between them facing each other is larger than the width dimension in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126(a)) of the displacement member 11966, which will be described later. will be placed.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is meshed with a first gear GY1 that is pivotally supported by a displacement member 11966, which will be described later. Thereby, by slidingly displacing the displacement member 11966, the first gear GY1 that meshes with the first tooth surface 11942b1 can be rotated.

The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed as a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a second member 11968 disposed in a displaceable state on the first member 11967, and an axis attached to the first member 11967. The first gear GY1 is supported and meshed with the second member 11968.

The first member 11967 has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the thickness direction at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The first member 11967 also has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and a second opening 966c on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c. It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e that protrude in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction.

The support portion 11966d is provided to protrude toward the first member 11967, and its tip is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. Thereby, the first gear GY1 can be rotatably supported by the first member 11967.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is provided to protrude toward the first member 11967, and its tip is inserted into the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. Thereby, the second member 11968 can be disposed on the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material into a plate-like body that is substantially gate-shaped when viewed from the front, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126(a)), and a A sliding groove 11968b formed through the plate thickness direction in the form of a long hole along the extension direction of the two tooth surfaces 11968a1 (vertical direction in FIG. 126(a)) and a horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in a gate shape. The blade portion 11968c is formed to include a blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction on the end face extending from the side.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are meshed with the first gear GY1, respectively. Thereby, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both horizontal sides of the second member 11968 where the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in the shape of a long hole along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding protrusion 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted into the sliding groove 11968b. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slid relative to the first member 11967 by the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 is rotationally displaced by the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and The second member 11968 is displaced in the direction in which the second tooth surface 11968a1 extends.

The blade portion 11968c is formed to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and its lower end portion is lower than the inner surface of the second ball throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the gravity direction when the wing member 945 is closed. , is placed on the other end side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the tip of the blade part 11968c can be placed on the other end side in the direction of gravity than the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140.

Further, the protruding distance of the second ball throwing portion 942c is set to a length such that the second ball throwing portion 942c comes into contact with the back side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the opposing second ball throwing portions 942c is set to approximately the same position as the tip position of the second ball throwing portion 942c. Thereby, the end of the rolling surface flowing from the second winning opening 140, the blade part, and 11968c can cut the foreign matter inserted into the inside of the second winning opening 140.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126(a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is moved to the rolling portion 943a. Since the tip of the second ball sending part 942c can be disposed lower than the tip of the second ball throwing part 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 may be cut off by unauthorized operation while no drive is being transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When 945b is forcibly opened, the displacement member 11966 can restrict the flow of game balls entering from the second prize opening 140.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, thereby displacing the second member 11968. Note that the amount of displacement of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 is displaced twice as much as the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140 The ball can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the ball, by a distance greater than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, it is possible to allow the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140 to flow down.

That is, the second member 11968 crosses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second prize opening 140 when the displacement member 11966 is slid from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where it is closed, and also crosses the edge of the path. (the ends of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c), so it is possible to cut the illegal object that is illegally inserted into the rolling path of the game ball from the second prize opening 140. I can do it.

For example, a detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) that glues the tip of a thread to a game ball, causes the game ball to enter from the second winning opening 140, and passes through the rolling part 943a, detecting the passage of the game ball. ), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the player multiple times by manipulating the other end of the string (feeding out, pulling) and causing the game ball to reciprocate. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the eleventh embodiment, even if the game ball described above is entered with the wing member 945 open, the displacement member moves from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where it is closed. 11966 (second member 11968) is slid and the blade part 11968c crosses the path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c, the blade part 11968c cuts the middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball. At the same time, when the blade part 11968c is brought into frictional contact with the edges of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, the blade part 11968c and The thread can be cut between the rolling part 943a or the edge of the second ball throwing part 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Next, the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. In the seventh embodiment, the displacement member 966 is not placed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140, but the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment is moved from the second winning opening 140. The ball is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment. 128(a) and 128(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that FIG. 128(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 128(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the front unit 940 in the twelfth embodiment has a pair of second guide walls 12942b extending in the direction of gravity on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the protruding distance of the second ball throwing part 942c and the rolling part 943a is set short, and the protruding tip surface is set to a position where it comes into contact with the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966, which will be described later. Ru.

Further, on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940, there are provided a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 that protrude toward the displacement member 12966 side. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are inserted into shafts of a first gear GY1 and a second gear GY2, which will be described later, respectively, and can pivotally support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has contact portions 12942b2 protruding in opposite directions on one end side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) of opposing side surfaces thereof. The distance between the pair of opposing contact portions 12942b2 is set to be slightly larger than the width in the lateral direction of the first member 12967, which will be described later. Thereby, the first member 12967 can be disposed between the pair of abutting portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a plate-shaped body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a second member 12968 disposed in a displaceable manner on the first member 12967, and a pivot support on the rear base 941. It is formed mainly of a first gear GY1 that is rotated and meshed with the first member 12967, and a second gear GY2 that is pivotally supported by the rear base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on its outer peripheral surface, and as described above, is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the back base 941, and the tooth surface is connected to the first member 12967 and the second gear. It meshes with GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two stages of gears each having a different size, and is formed with a small-diameter gear GY2a on the small-diameter side and a large-diameter gear GY2b on the large-diameter side. Further, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the rear base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1, and the teeth of the large diameter gear GY2b are engaged with the first gear GY1. The surface is mated to second member 12968.

The first member 12967 is formed from a metal material, and has a second opening 12966c formed therethrough in the thickness direction at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The first member 12967 also has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the short direction of the first member 12967 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 12966c, and a second opening. It is formed with sliding protrusions 12966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides of 12966c in the lateral direction, and third gear tooth surfaces 12966f on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.

The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 12966c when viewed from the front is set larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. Further, the second opening 12966c is provided with a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed to be inclined downward from the rear base 941 side toward the second member 12968 side, which will be described later. The second opening 12966c is such that when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140, and the pair of wing members 945 is closed. In the open state, the second blade part 12966c2 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is provided to protrude toward the second member 12968, and its tip is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 12968b of the second member 12968. Thereby, the second member 12968 can be disposed on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are meshed with the first gear GY1, respectively. Thereby, the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slidably displaced in accordance with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, so that the first gear GY1 can be rotated. Moreover, as described above, the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2 is meshed with the first gear GY1, thereby allowing the second gear GY2 to rotate.

The second member 12968 is formed from a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is disposed with a pair of extended portions oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). Further, the second member 12968 has a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface on the outside in the opposing direction of the pair of extending portions, and a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface along the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). A sliding groove 12968b formed in the form of a long hole penetrating the plate in the thickness direction, and a blade part 6683 on the end surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the connecting part that connects the pair of extended parts. be done.

As described above, the sliding groove 12968b is formed in the shape of a long hole along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a, and the sliding protrusion 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted into the sliding groove 12968b. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slid in the direction of gravity relative to the first member 12967 by the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 12968a are meshed with the large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2, respectively. Therefore, by rotating the second gear GY2, the second member 12968 is slid. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated by the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 by the transmission member 965. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be displaced as the first member 12967 is displaced.

Note that the directions of sliding displacement of the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 are set to be opposite to each other, and the amount of displacement of the second member 12968 is set to be large due to the displacement of the second member 12968 via the second gear GY2 having a small diameter.

The blade portion 6683 is formed to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and its upper end portion is located on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second ball throwing portion 942c when the wing member 945 is closed. ) on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). That is, the second member 12968 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps the first member 12967 when viewed from the front with the wing member 945 closed.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, they cross the rolling path of the game ball in the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, and also rub their edges against each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 (displaceable member 12966) are provided with the second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683, it is possible to cut the illegal object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the second prize opening 140. can.

For example, the tip of a thread is glued to a game ball, and the game ball enters from the second prize opening 140 and passes through the rolling path of the game ball of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, and the detection device SE4 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 is detected multiple times by manipulating the other end of the string (feeding out, pulling) to make the game ball reciprocate in a state where the game ball has reached the detection position. In order to deal with such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the pair of wing members 945 open, the pair of wing members 945 will be displaced from the open position to the closed position. When the second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683 cross the path of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is inserted between the pair of second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683. Can be pinched and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the second member 12968 has the blade part 6683 on the other side in the gravity direction than the rolling surface (rolling part 943a) of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 when the wing member 945 is opened. Placed. As described above, when the feather member 945 is open, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140. Therefore, in the state where the pair of wing members 945 are opened, the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140 can be passed between the blade part 6683 and the second blade part 966c2.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 can block the rolling path of the game balls flowing into the second winning opening 140, so the displacement distance of the second member 12968 is The number can be smaller than the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in can flow into the rolling path at the timing when the pair of wing members 945 are closed. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a drive unit 13960 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 through three members, the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965, and the displacement member 966. However, in the thirteenth embodiment, the solenoid 610 Transmission of drive from the blade member 945 to the wing member 945 is performed by one member. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 129(a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 129(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXIXb-CXXIXb in FIG. 129(a). In addition, in FIG. 129(b), only the external shape of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is illustrated with a chain line for easy understanding. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of wing members 945 is closed, and the shaft portion 961b is extended from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are opened.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 in the thirteenth embodiment is disposed on the back side of the specific winning a prize unit 950 (right side in FIG. 129(b)), and the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is (vertical direction in FIG. 129(b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 includes a base portion 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and an end portion of the base portion 7658 on the front unit 940 side that is erected toward the protrusion 945b side of the wing member 945. and an engaging portion 13965j.

An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base 7658 at an end opposite to the engaging portion 13965j. Thereby, by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in its axial direction, the transmission member 13965 can be slid.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position that overlaps the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129(a)) in a rear view (or front view). Furthermore, the length of the engagement portion 13965j is set to exceed the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, so that the engagement portion 13965j overlaps the protrusion 945b when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, a supporting portion 13965j1 having a substantially C-shape in side view projects from the upright end of the engaging portion 13965j. In the support portion 13965j1, the dimension between opposing sides inside the opening is set to be larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the opposing direction of the pair of engaging portions 13965j (left-right direction in FIG. 129(a)) is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be disposed inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

Therefore, as described above, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid in the direction of gravity, the engaging portion 9965j is slid in the direction of gravity, and the projection 945b is displaced in accordance with the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are disposed on the back side of the plate member 951. A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, by consolidating the installation space for the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, space for arranging other members and devices can be created on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 (second prize winner). It can be secured on the back side of the opening 140), and the space can be used more effectively.

Next, a displacement member 14966 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. In the seventh embodiment, the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape in front view of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965. However, in the fourteenth embodiment, the displacement A case will be described in which the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 130(a) and 131(a) are rear views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 130(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXb-CXXXb in FIG. FIG.

In addition, in FIG. 130(a) and FIG. 131(a), the outer shape of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the closed state of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut. The open state of the pair of wing members 945 in the case where the blade member 945 is opened is illustrated. Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is formed at a position farther away from the second winning a prize opening 140 than in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the displacement member 14966 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. It is formed to penetrate in the plate thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 130(b)).

The displacement member 14966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 130(a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130(a)) in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130(a)), and It includes a bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 130(b)) to the back side (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The bulging portion 14966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back side base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed in the inner portion when viewed from the back. The connecting hole 14966b1 is an opening into which a tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of a drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

The connecting hole 14966b1 has an inner edge having a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is connected to a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130(a))). , and a contact portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner circumferential surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the separation distance L40 between opposing sides in the gravity direction (from the other side abutted part 966b3 to the one side abutted part 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion part 965e in the gravitational direction. When the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3.

In addition, the connection hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction from the separation distance L40 between the opposing sides in the gravity direction (from the other side abutted part 966b3 to the one side abutted part 14966b2). It is set larger than the distance L42 from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 minus the diameter of the game ball (L40-L41)>(L42-Game ball) diameter). Thereby, when the displacement member 14966 falls to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the rolling path of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 can be blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

Next, a case where the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b). As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e, and when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the other side cover is Since the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), when the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut, one side is abutted. The displacement member 14966 is allowed to fall freely to one side in the gravity direction by the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connection hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is set larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)>(L42 - the diameter of the game ball), by allowing the displacement member 14966 to fall freely, the rolling path of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 can be blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

That is, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are not in communication with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b)), the displacement member 14966 Since a part of the game ball is placed in the path of the game balls flowing in from the second prize opening 140, for example, even if the projection 945b of the feather member 945 is cut and the feather member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second The flow of the game ball entered from the prize opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 14966.

Next, a drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is arranged and positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is positioned on the side wall portion 981b. It is arranged and positioned inside the section 981b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

132(a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment, FIG. 132(b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. It is a diagram. FIG. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133(a). Note that FIG. 133(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a).

First, a drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment is formed into a box shape, and includes a first accommodating part 15962 and a second accommodating part 963, which are arranged facing each other. A solenoid 610 disposed in the space between the second housing part 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 964 that is pivotally supported by the first housing part 15962 and the second housing part 963. The transmission member 965 is connected to the transmission member 965.

The first accommodating part 15962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The drive unit 15960 is arranged in a space between a first accommodating part 962 and a second accommodating part 963 that are formed in a box shape and are arranged facing each other, and between the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963. Mainly includes a solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 pivotally supported by a first housing part 962 and a second housing part 963 and connected to the connecting member 964. be done.

The first accommodating part 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The guide portion 15962b includes a pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape in side view, a wall portion 962f connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e, and a wall portion 962f formed in a gate shape in front view. A protruding part 962g protrudes from the covering part 962a on the opposite side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 125)), and a protruding part 962g protrudes from the wall part 962f on the other side in the gravity direction of the pair of arm parts 15962e. The third arm portion 15962h is formed to protrude from the opposite side of the second arm portion 15962j with the wall portion 962f in between.

The arm portion 15962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side is bent toward the other side in the gravity direction (opposite to the solenoid 610 side) when viewed from the side. It is formed into an approximately L shape. Further, the protruding position of the arm portion 15962e in the direction of gravity is set below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm 15962j is connected to the inner edge of the wall 962f, and the distance L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set smaller than the width between the opposing arms 962e. In addition, the diameter is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the distance dimension of the second arm portion 15962j in the direction of gravity is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing sides in the direction of gravity of the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980, and when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are combined, It is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b.

Further, the distance dimension of the pair of second arm portions 15962j on the outside in the opposing direction is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the opposing sides in the horizontal direction of the side wall portions 981b. Thereby, when arranging the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) in the winning a prize opening unit 930, it can be positioned by arranging the second arm part 15962j inside the side wall part 981b.

The distance dimension between the third arm portions 15962h facing each other is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the opposing arm portions 15962e. Further, a protrusion 15962h1 is formed on the third arm 15962h to be connected to the end of the second arm 15962j on the back base 941 side.

The protruding distance of the protruding portion 15962h1 from the end of the second arm portion 15962j toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85) is set to be approximately the same as the concave dimension of the second concave notch 942c1. Further, the protruding portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed notch 942c1 when the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is arranged inside the second recessed notch 942c1.

Therefore, since the protruding portion 15962h1 and the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing when the game ball passes the step on the bottom side and the side surface The timing of passing the step on the side can be made different. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and the influence of both is dispersed, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can serve both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and is also a part of the passage path of the game balls flowing in from the second prize opening 140. becomes. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily tolerate dimensional effects or mounting overlaps.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second ball throwing portion 16942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second concave notch 942c1 of the second ball throwing portion 942c, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the second ball throwing portion 16942c The protrusion 16942c2 is arranged inside the recessed part 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(a), in the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the sixteenth embodiment, when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate, the upright end surface is the winning opening unit. It is formed in a size that makes contact with the tip of the second ball throwing section 16942c of the ball 930.

Further, the side wall portion 16981b includes a recessed notch 16981b2 recessed on the proximal end side of the protruding distal end surface. The concave notch 16981b2 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity, and its concave shape when viewed from the side corresponds to the side view shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball throwing section 16942c, which will be described later. is set almost the same as .

Thereby, when a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

Further, the recessed notch 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side, and the inner surface of the proximal end of the side wall 16981b is formed to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c can be suppressed from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the 16th embodiment, since the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, the game ball that collides with the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 can be pressed toward the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from jumping up and bouncing on the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed to protrude from the protruding distal end surface of the second ball throwing part 16942c, and its outer shape in side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed notch 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b. As a result, when a game ball rolling on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is thrown to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980, the game ball is transferred to the concave notch 16981b2 of the distribution unit 980. This can prevent it from getting caught inside. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game balls to smoothly pass (flow down) from the rolling portion 943a of the prize opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, the recessed part 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b and the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is placed on the bottom side. The timing at which the vehicle passes through the step on the side can be made different from the timing at which the vehicle passes through the step on the side surface. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Furthermore, according to the 16th embodiment, the recessed part 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side, so that the downstream end of the side surface of the second ball feeding part 942c and the rolling The downstream end of the bottom surface of the moving part 943a can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream bottom surface of the side wall section 16981b. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second ball throwing section 942c is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling section 943a, the upstream end of the side surface of the side wall section 16981b Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball throwing section 942c. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has relatively low rigidity and may break, but according to the 16th embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the direction in which the game ball passes, so if the protrusion 16942c2 breaks. Even in the case of The timing of passing through a step can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse the influence of both, allowing the game ball to flow down (pass) smoothly. be able to.

In addition, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the recessed notch 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, so that the rolling portion 943a It is possible to prevent the distribution unit 980 from shifting upward in the direction of gravity. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is at a higher position than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to be bounced up when riding on it. Compared to the opposite step, it tends to impede the smooth flow down (passage) of game balls. Therefore, being able to prevent the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b from shifting upward in the direction of gravity relative to the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second ball throwing portion 17942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, when the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall part 981b and the end of the second recessed part 942c1 of the second ball throwing part 942c are formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the rolling direction of the game ball when viewed from the side. However, in the seventeenth embodiment, the end portions of the second ball throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed to be inclined in side view. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the seventeenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134(b) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distributing unit 980 in the seventeenth embodiment has a distal end surface 17981b3 at its upright distal end inclined downwardly from the proximal end toward the distal end. . In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second ball sending part 17942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 is formed such that a tip end surface 17942c3 of its protruding tip surface is inclined upwardly along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling part 943a. In addition, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second ball throwing section 17942c is in a state substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall section 17981b mentioned above when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate. will be placed.

Therefore, since the side upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game ball. Compared to the case of (seventh embodiment), the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be made to slide along the slope and be less likely to be bounced back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

Furthermore, since the entire side upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, compared to the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having a concave cutout portion 16981b2 as in the sixteenth embodiment, for example. , stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. In addition, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape of the injection mold cavity (hollow portion) can be gently changed, suppressing air bubbles and filling defects, and improving moldability. You can improve your performance.

Next, a displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not placed on the rolling path of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball that enters from the prize opening 140. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

135(a), FIG. 136(a), and FIG. 137(a) are schematic diagrams of the winning opening unit 930 in the 18th embodiment when viewed from the back, and FIG. 135(b) is the same as that of FIG. 135(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning a prize opening unit 930 along the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). FIG. 137(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a).

Note that FIG. 135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 in the open state. The condition is illustrated. Moreover, in FIGS. 135(a), 136(a), and 137(a), only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966, and the second winning hole 140 are illustrated. In FIGS. 135(b), 136(b), and 137(b), only the pair of wing members 945, the back base 941, the front base 943, the displacement member 18966, the transmission member 19958, and the solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment has a larger outer shape in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135(a)) than the displacement member 966 in the seventh embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 has a non-transmission portion 18966a6 that is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extends in the gravity direction, and a sliding groove 18966a that extends from the lower end of the non-transmission portion 18966a6 in the gravity direction. A transmission portion 18966a7 is provided, which is bent and extended toward the center in the left-right direction.

In addition, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the through hole 966c1 is arranged lower than the second prize opening 140 in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, it is possible to restrict the game ball passing through the second prize opening 140 from flowing into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970 from the rolling part 943a.

Furthermore, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896g that is inclined toward the front side as it goes downward, on the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the direction of gravity of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is brought into contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second ball throwing portion 942c. That is, in a rear view, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 1896g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball throwing portion 942c are arranged at a position where they overlap.

Further, the transmission member 18958 in the eighteenth embodiment has a larger rotation range on the tip end 965a side when the solenoid 961 is driven than in the first embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension of the tip portion 965a side in the gravity direction is set large, and the displacement dimension is set larger than the opening dimension of the second winning a prize opening 140 in the gravity direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade part 1896g can be placed above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning opening can be placed inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in rear view. A mouth 140 opening may be located.

Further, as the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. When the projection 945b slides inside the sliding groove 18966a, the projection 945b first slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6, and then slides inside the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, since the extending direction of the non-transmission part 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the protrusion 945b with respect to the back base 942 changes when sliding on the non-transmission part 18966a6. It slides inside the non-transmission part 18966a6 without being transmitted. On the other hand, when the projection 945b slides on the transmission section 18966a7, it is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission section 18966a7. Thereby, the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members are in the open state, the game ball passing through the second prize opening 140 can be allowed to flow into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970 from the rolling part 943a.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, thereby rotating the wing member 945. In this case, as described above, the blade part 18966g of the displacement member 18966 is disposed below the inner peripheral edge of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity, and the front side surface is the protruding tip of the rolling part 943a and Since it comes into contact with the protruding tip of the second ball throwing part 942c, as the blade part 18966g moves downward in the direction of gravity, the second winning ball is generated between the blade part 18966g, the rolling part 943a, and the second ball throwing part 942c. The biasing object inserted onto the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140 can be cut off.

That is, when the displacement member 18966 is slid from the position where the pair of wing members 945 is opened to the position where it is closed, the displacement member 18966 crosses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second prize opening 140, and Since it is equipped with a blade part 18966g that rubs against the edge of the passageway (ends of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c), it is possible to avoid any damage caused by unauthorized insertion of the game ball from the second prize opening 140 into the passageway where the game ball is placed. You can cut off power.

For example, a detection device SE4 (Fig. 114 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 is detected multiple times by manipulating the other end of the thread (feeding out, pulling) and causing the game ball to reciprocate when the game ball reaches the point (see). In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the 18th embodiment, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing member 945 open, the displacement member moves from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed. 18966 is slid and displaced, and when the blade part 18966g crosses the path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the blade part 18966g and rolled. 18966g and the rolling part 943a or the second ball sending part 942c are pressed against the edge of the part 943a or the second ball sending part 942c, and when the 18966g is rubbed against the edge of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c. The thread can be cut between the edges. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, if the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut (broken) due to a fraudulent act by the player, the through hole of the displacement member 18966 966c1 is placed on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the player forcibly opens the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966 can restrict the flow of the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is biased by the solenoid 961 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) in a direction in which the distal end portion 18965a side is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is biased in the direction of closing the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are forcibly opened due to a fraudulent act by the player, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly opened in the same way. As a result, fraudulent acts by players can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments described above, a case has been described in which a total of four first blocks 653 and four second blocks 654 are disposed on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600, but this is not necessarily the case. The total number of first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and it may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the LED 651 is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side is explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in the front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is made incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 of the projection unit 600 are made of a light-transmitting material has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 may be formed from two layers of a light-transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

For example, the back side 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front side 642 side of the groove forming members 640, 2640 are formed of a layer of non-transparent material, and the projection plate member 620, 2620 side of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 is formed of a layer of non-transparent material. It may also be formed of a layer of transparent material. In this case, the layer of non-transparent material can prevent light emitted from other devices in the gaming area from entering the projection plate members 620, 2620. That is, light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transparent material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the projection plate members 620, 2620, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620), the light from other devices It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620, 2620 and patterns or designs are displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620.

Additionally, in this case, the layer formed from the non-transparent material is formed from a metal material or flexible material with high reflectance, or the layer formed from the non-transparent material is formed between the layer of the non-transparent material and the layer of the transparent material. It is preferable to use a metallic material or flexible material with high reflectance. This makes it easier to reflect the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 from the LED 651 onto the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflection section 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620, 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be made to stand out clearly.

In the first and second embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640, 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere), but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rear view 632 and the front part 642 are attached with a sticker of a material (such as silver foil or aluminum) that has a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, or a color with a higher reflectance is attached. (For example, white printing) may be applied.

In this case, the sticker or printing can prevent light emitted from other devices in the gaming area from entering the projection plate members 620, 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the projection plate members 620, 2620, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620), the light from other devices It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620, 2620 and patterns or designs are displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620.

Furthermore, by using a sticker or printing, it is possible to more easily reflect the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 from the LED 651 onto the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflection section 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620, 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be made to stand out clearly.

In addition, when a seal is attached, the seal may be attached in such a manner that it protrudes from the back surface 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface 642 of the groove forming members 640, 2640 toward the outer edge side. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. You may intervene.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is reliably totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance, and can be allowed to travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (amount of light) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3, and to strengthen the light reflected by the reflection section 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620. It can make patterns and designs stand out clearly.

Furthermore, the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance can prevent light emitted from other devices in the gaming area from entering the projection plate member 3620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is allowed to enter the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), light from other devices is reflected on the projection plate. It is possible to prevent patterns and designs from being incident on the member 3620 and being displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the means for biasing the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It may be a leaf spring. Note that the attachment method is exemplified by connecting the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823, or by attaching it between the rotating shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support 821 of the base member 820.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotated around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. 850 may slide in a guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravitational direction), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction can be controlled as in the first embodiment. Since the motion can be an orthogonal projection of a uniform circular motion and the displacement speed can be varied, the displacement member 850 can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surface of the gear member 630, 3630 or the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case as well, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident on the side end surface of the gear member 630, 3630 or the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate is Patterns and designs can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620.

Also, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is placed in a position where it does not face the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (i.e., the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is The light emitted by the LED 651 is arranged at a position different from the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 in the front-rear direction. The projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear member 630, 3630, and the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 may be arranged so that the portion is incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, the light is irradiated obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651 while irradiating other non-irradiation members different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 with light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651. Part of the light can be made incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used both as light for displaying patterns and designs on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and as light for irradiating other objects to be illuminated.

In the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments described above, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are arranged in parallel has been described. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Specifically, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed toward the back side, and the light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be irradiated. In this case, when a pattern or design is displayed on the surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light from the LED 651 leaks from the inner edge of the front base 612, 6612, which is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. can be suppressed.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed facing the front side, and the light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed to the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It may also be a position where the side end face is irradiated.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted toward the back side or the front side with respect to the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the installation position of the LED 651 is The position may be such that the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 are irradiated with light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted toward the back side or the front side with respect to the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the placement position of the LED 651 is adjusted. The position may be such that the front part 632 of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 or the back part 632 of the gear member 630, 3630 is irradiated with light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651.

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620. Although a case has been described in which the amount of emitted light is increased, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by light incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased by increasing the amount of emitted light. The pattern or design may be different from the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620.

That is, by forming the projection plate member 5620 with an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside, and dividing the area of the reflecting portion 622 (for example, dividing it into three areas), the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 The light incident from the front side is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the first area, and the light incident from the left side is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the second area, and the light is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the second area. The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the third region. Thereby, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns of patterns and symbols to be displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third areas are provided around the object to be irradiated (projection plate member 5620), and the first to third areas are irradiated (for example, The arranged light sources enter light from the top end and illuminate the first region, the light sources arranged on the left enter light from the left end surface and illuminate the second region, and the light sources arranged on the right enter the light from the right end. It is also possible to irradiate the third area by entering the light from the surface, but this requires the provision of a plurality of light sources, which poses a problem in that the product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that Since the irradiation direction of the light from the LED 651 arranged in the front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas: when irradiating the second or third area and when irradiating the first area. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be provided can be reduced accordingly, and an increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the direction of light irradiation of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is changed in accordance with the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be rotated by being connected to the shaft of a newly installed drive motor.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the sliding position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the direction of light irradiation from the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654. The amount of light emitted from the front can be partially increased or decreased. That is, by changing the direction of light incident on the projection plate member 5620, it is possible to change the shade of the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

In the first embodiment, a projection plate member 620, a plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and a gear that transmits the driving force of a drive motor 661 are arranged between the opposing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. Although a case has been described in which the columns (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit, the case is not limited to this. Two or more of the plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying patterns and designs on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize the combination of the patterns and designs displayed on each projection plate member 620. As a result, by changing the rotational position of each projection plate member 620, display patterns of a plurality of patterns and symbols can be formed, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the light from the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is disposed, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the bolt T may be made of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel), and the light projected onto the side surface of the bolt T may be reflected toward the center of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

In addition, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals to partially form areas on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 where the pattern or design is not displayed (light from the LED 651 is not incident). The display may be separated.

Furthermore, as described above, the ground plane of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A part where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, the light that is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 can be reliably suppressed from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light from the LED 651 disposed on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually perceive the projection plate member 620 as being displaced (rotated). .

Note that the displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation direction of each LED 651 disposed in the first block 653 and the second block 654 is displaced in different directions. It may be something.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments in any way, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. can be easily inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 945b is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed into a circular shape when viewed from the rear. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in an irregular shape in rear view or the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a curved manner, the protrusion 945b slides on the sliding groove 966a2, so that the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b changes. Therefore, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b is increased, the protrusion 945b becomes easier to move by the gap, and the wing member 945 becomes more likely to wobble.

On the other hand, by forming the protrusion 945b in a circular shape in rear view and by extending the sliding groove 966a2 linearly in the displacement member 966, the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 during the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 is formed. The gap between the projection 945b and the projection 945b can always be kept constant. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, since the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly along the direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening caused by recessing the sliding groove 966a2 can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the displacement member 966 can be improved.

In the seventh embodiment, the screw threaded into the annular protrusion 953c formed between the opposing detection devices SE1 is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a screw may be used to fasten and fix the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

In the fifth and twelfth embodiments, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is projected from the main body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. Although we have explained the case where For example, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, power may be applied to the main body portion 961a, and the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 may be in a state drawn inside the main body portion.

In this case, the displacement members 11966, 12966 have blade parts 11968c, 6683 and second blade part 12966c2 inserted into the rolling path of the rolling game ball of rolling part 943a and second ball sending part 942c. The illegal object (thread) can be cut using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) using electromagnetic force, the driving force thereof can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object using the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the fifth and twelfth embodiments, the coil spring SP1 is disposed in a compressed state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a. Although a case has been described in which the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is drawn into the interior of the main body portion 961a), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in an expanded state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. It may also be displaced in the direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the displacement of the blade parts 11968c, 6683 and the second blade part 12966c2 in the cutting direction (pinching direction) is performed using electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object using the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

In the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed from two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed as the second member 11968 having a larger displacement amount than the first member 11967. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member, and the amount of displacement of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965 may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of the one member.

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the annular projection 953c formed between the opposing pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is formed to protrude in an annular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1 may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as it moves away from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific prize opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when drilling is performed using a tool such as a drill, the direction of advance of the drill is set at the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (disconnected) by causing the wiring HS3 to shift (sideways) in the lateral direction (the direction away from the axis of the annular protrusion 953c in the radial direction) on the surface (the outer circumferential surface of the enlarged diameter portion).

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is visible to the player, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is visible to the player. A sticker on which information consisting of text or figures is displayed may be attached to the side.

In this case, since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the gaming area (front) side of the ball throwing path TR0, first path TR1, and second path TR2 of the sorting unit 980, the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930 ), even when viewing the distribution unit 980, the player can easily recognize the position of the distribution unit 980 by using the display as a landmark (reference position). Note that the form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, but may also be ink printing, two-color printing, or the like.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In the game machine, the transmission mechanism includes a drive unit that generates a drive force for rotating the drive unit, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive unit to the pair of wing members, wherein the transmission mechanism generates a drive force of the drive unit. a rotating member that is rotated by a rotating member; and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates; a protruding portion is provided protruding from one of the sliding member or the pair of wing members; A gaming machine A1 characterized in that a sliding groove into which the installation part is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. A game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive means to a pair of wing members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20111- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a protrusion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, opposing portions are formed on one end of the rotating member and are vertically opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and the protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the opposing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there was a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member was unstable because it was necessary to set a large gap between the opposing part and the protruding part. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for the opening/closing operation of the wing member, the attitude of the facing part is inclined with respect to the protruding part, and the distance between the facing parts is determined by the outer shape (thickness) of the protruding part. If it is the same as (a), the protrusion will interfere between the opposing parts, and the rotating member will not be able to rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the spacing between the opposing parts to a size that does not interfere with the protruding parts, and the gap between the opposing parts and the protruding parts increases accordingly. As a result, the wing members tend to wobble, making the opening and closing operations of the wing members unstable.

On the other hand, according to game machine A1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and includes a sliding member or a pair of sliding members. A protrusion is provided protruding from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, so that the sliding The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the sliding member is a sliding displacement and the attitude of the sliding groove is not inclined with respect to the protruding part, there is no need to avoid interference with the protruding part when rotating unlike the conventional product. Therefore, for example, by setting the width of the sliding groove to be equal to the size (thickness) of the protruding part, the groove width can be suppressed, so the gap between the sliding groove and the protruding part can be reduced. . As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

Note that the sliding groove may be a concave groove (indentation) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed such that the inserted protrusion can slide along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction perpendicular to the groove width direction).

A game machine A2 in the game machine A1, wherein the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the slide member is substantially displaced relative to the wing members. Can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member and extends in a straight line along a direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member. A gaming machine A3 is characterized in that it is extended in a shape.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1 or A2, the protrusion is provided protruding from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the protrusion can always be kept constant during the opening and closing operations of the wing member. Therefore, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Moreover, since the sliding groove extends linearly along the direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, the length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening caused by recessing the sliding groove can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the sliding member can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A3, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member, and the sliding member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the position of the protrusion at the time of starting is set below along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member.

Here, unlike the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, the sliding member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, so that the sliding member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation, the weight of the slide member is added, and the inertial force becomes large, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform an initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in a stopped state to open or close the wing member.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines A1 to A3, the protruding portion is provided protruding from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member, so that the sliding The position of the protruding part when the member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotating shaft of the wing member, so the protruding part is pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. It is possible to increase the horizontal direction component and reduce (minimize) the gravitational direction component of the displacement component of the part. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in a stopped state and opening or closing it can be performed smoothly.

A game machine A5 in the game machine A4, wherein when the slide member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which it is released.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the direction in which it is released. It can be rotated by its own weight. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) and opening it can be performed smoothly.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the inner wall of the sliding groove, which the protrusion comes into contact with when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity, includes the rotation axis of the wing member and A gaming machine A6 characterized in that an inclined surface is formed that is inclined with respect to a plane perpendicular to the direction.

According to the gaming machine A6, in either the gaming machine A4 or A5, the inner wall of the sliding groove that the protrusion comes into contact with when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity has a wing member. Since an inclined surface is formed that includes the rotation axis and is inclined with respect to a plane that is orthogonal to the direction of gravity, even if the position of the protrusion is set below the rotation axis of the wing member in the direction of gravity. By guiding the protrusion along the direction of the slope of the slope, it is possible to smoothly start the slide displacement of the slide member upward in the direction of gravity.

In addition, by forming an inclined surface on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only can the gap between the inner wall and the protrusion be made smaller, but also the protrusion can be brought into contact with the inclined surface. In addition to the displacement of the installation part in the direction of gravity, it is also possible to restrict displacement in the horizontal direction. Therefore, rattling of the wing member in the open or closed stopped state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibrations caused by the falling of game balls, the wing member can be easily maintained in the open or closed position.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove is recessed with a receiving part that receives the protruding part when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed; A game machine A7 characterized in that rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state in which the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives a protrusion when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed. When the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion, rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member is prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

A gaming machine A8 in the gaming machine A7, wherein the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion by sliding the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A7, since the sliding member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, the protruding part is received in the receiving part, so that the weight of the sliding member (self-weight) is reduced. ), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protruding part is received in the receiving part.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to close the wing member. a one-side abutted part with which one side of the abutting part comes into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, and a predetermined interval apart from the one-side abutted part in the direction of the sliding displacement. the other side abutted part that is arranged oppositely to the other side and is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member, the wing member In the closed state, one side of the abutting part is brought into contact with the one side abutted part, the projecting part is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other side abutted part is brought into contact with the other side abutted part. A game machine A9 characterized in that when the rotary member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting portion abuts, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and an overhanging portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member has the following effects: One side abutted part that comes into contact with one side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted part and the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval and is abutted by the other side of the abutment part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the sliding member is slid toward the one side, causing the wings to While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member slides towards the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is opened.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the abutting part is in contact with the one-side abutted part and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, so the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting part abuts at least the other side abutted part, the engagement of the overhanging part with the sliding member is released, so the rotation By further rotating the member toward the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side, and the wing member can be opened.

In gaming machines A1 to A8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes the sliding member or the pair of rotating members. A protrusion is provided protruding from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, and the rotation The member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. a one-side abutted part against which one side of the abutting part is abutted, and a one-side abutted part and the one-side abutted part arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement for opening the wing member. and an abutted part on the other side with which the other side of the abutting part abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the protruding part The slide member is disengaged from the slide member and is slid from a state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the projecting portion is engaged with the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes an abutting part and an overhanging part extending from the tip of the abutting part, and the sliding member has the following effects: One side abutted part that comes into contact with one side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted part and the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval and is abutted by the other side of the abutment part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the sliding member is slid toward the one side, causing the wings to While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member slides towards the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is opened.

In this case, when the slide member is slid from the state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one-side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion, the overhang portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhang portion is not engaged with the slide member, so by further rotating the rotary member toward the other side, the slide member is slid toward the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang part is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang part and one side contact part can be changed to allow rotation of the rotating member to the other side. It is necessary to form it into a specific shape, which makes the shape complicated. Therefore, not only the strength may decrease, but also the engagement may become more likely to be released. On the other hand, in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shape of the overhanging portion and one side contact portion can be rotated. There is no need to shape the member to allow rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified to ensure strength, but also a shape that is easy to maintain engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

Any of the gaming machines A1 to A10 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and when the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the A gaming machine A11 characterized in that a part of the slide member is disposed within the passage of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the gaming machine A11 includes a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the protruding portion is not disposed in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is placed in the passage of the passage member, so even if the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside by cutting the protruding part, the ball will not enter from the ball entrance. The sliding member can restrict the flow of the game ball.

Any of the game machines A1 to A11 includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the slide member slides the wing member from a position where it is opened to a position where it is closed. A game machine A12 characterized by comprising a friction contact portion that crosses the path of the passage member and rubs against the edge of the passage member when the member is slid and displaced.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, when the sliding member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, the sliding member crosses the passage of the passage member and the passage member Since the slide member is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge of the ball, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

For example, the end of a thread is glued to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the path of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects multiple times by manipulating (feeding out, pulling in) and moving the game ball back and forth. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, the slide member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed. When the rubbing part crosses the path of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing part crosses the passage member. When rubbed against the edge, the thread can be cut between the rubbed part and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that the frictional contact portion of the slide member is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (friction portion) may be formed from a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion with which the friction contact portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Further, it is preferable that the frictional contact portion and the portion (edge of the passage member) with which the frictional contact portion comes into contact with each other are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

Any of the gaming machines A1 to A11 includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the transmission mechanism is configured to displace the wing member from an open position to a closed position. A gaming machine A13 characterized in that it includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and bring their edges into rubbing contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the wing member crosses the passage of the passage member and touches each other's edges. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that come into frictional contact with each other, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

For example, the end of a thread is glued to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the path of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects multiple times by manipulating (feeding out, pulling in) and moving the game ball back and forth. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the pair of cutting members When the thread crosses the path of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip end is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that it is preferable that the pair of cutting members be formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that rub against each other) may be formed from a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that rub against each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the gaming machine A12 or A13, the drive means is configured to displace the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force and to displace the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The actuator is formed as a solenoid actuator that is actuated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A gaming machine A14 characterized by.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A12 or A13, the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A14, the rotating member includes an abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to engage the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. one side abutted part with which one side of the contact part abuts, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member arranged opposite to the one side abutted part. A game characterized in that the other side abutted part is abutted by the other side of the abutting part, and the one side abutted part and the other side abutted part are formed approximately at the center in the width direction. Machine A15.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines A1 to A14, the rotating member includes a contact portion, and the sliding member has an effect when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged opposite to the one side of the abutted part. The other side of the abutting part is provided with an abutted part on the other side, and the abutted part on the one side and the abutted part on the other side are formed approximately at the center in the width direction, so that rotation with the pair of wing members is provided. Changes in the posture of the slide member relative to the other members can be easily tolerated. Therefore, as the rotating member rotates, the sliding member can be smoothly slid and displaced, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of slidingly displacing the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member to open or close the pair of wing members, When the attitude of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and is also connected to the rotating member at two places, the slide member rotates with the pair of wing members. Changes in the attitude of the slide member with respect to the member are difficult to tolerate, and resistance occurs when sliding the slide member (i.e., rotating the rotating member), which prevents the wing member from opening or closing. . On the other hand, according to the present invention, the sliding member is connected to the pair of wing members at two locations and is connected to the rotating member at one location, so that one of the pair of wing members is connected to the sliding member at two locations. Even if the load from the game ball is applied to only one side, the change in attitude of the slide member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member can be easily tolerated.

Note that the approximate center in the width direction where the one-side abutted part and the other-side abutted part are formed is defined as passing through the approximate center between the pair of protruding parts when the pair of wing members are open or closed. , and means a position on an imaginary line along the direction of sliding displacement.

A gaming machine A16 in the gaming machine A15, wherein the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the abutting part are set to be at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A15, the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the abutting part are set to at least three times the maximum external dimension of the protruding part. Changes in the posture of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member can be easily tolerated. In addition, it is preferable that the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the contact part are set to twice or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding part. This is because the above-mentioned attitude change tolerance can be more easily achieved.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
a first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and a second ball entrance. In a gaming machine comprising a second opening/closing member that opens or closes a mouth, and a second driving means for driving the second opening/closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are configured to drive the second opening/closing member. A gaming machine B1 is characterized in that it is arranged on the back side.

Here, a first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance; A game machine is known that includes a second opening/closing member that opens or closes a second ball entrance and a second driving means that drives the second opening/closing member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member, so the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member There was a problem in that it was difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the device, and it was difficult to use the space effectively.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening/closing member, so that space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the installation space for the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening/closing member, the space for installing other members and devices is freed up from the first opening/closing member (first entrance). It can be secured at the back of the ball opening), allowing for effective use of space.

A gaming machine B2 in the gaming machine B1, wherein a front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than a front projected area of the first opening/closing member.

A gaming machine B3 in the gaming machine B1 or B2, characterized in that the front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than the total front projected area of the first driving means and the second driving means.

According to the gaming machine B2 or B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the front projected area of the second opening/closing member is made larger than the front projected area of the first opening/closing member, or the first driving means Since the total front projected area of the second driving means is larger than that of the second driving means, the dead space on the back surface of the second ball entrance (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine B3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one direction being the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are connected to the second opening and closing member on the back side of the second ball entrance. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that opening/closing members are arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are connected to the second ball entering ball. Since they are arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction of the second opening/closing member on the back side of the mouth, the dead space on the back side of the second ball entry opening (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4, the first driving means and the second driving means include a main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft that drives the drive shaft and drives the main body. a drive unit housed in the main unit, and wiring that supplies power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit, and the first drive unit and the second drive unit move the drive shaft to the second drive unit. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture facing an opening/closing member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the first driving means and the second driving means include a main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft thereof. The first driving means and the second driving means move the drive shaft to the second drive shaft. Since it is disposed in a posture facing the second opening/closing member, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily integrated.

In the gaming machine B5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving shaft and wiring are arranged on the outer surface of the main body. A game machine B6 characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where one outer surface, excluding the outer surface, is substantially flush with each other.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving portion of the outer surface of the main body Since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the one excluding the outer surfaces on which the shaft and the wiring are arranged are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means Even if the two drive means have different outputs and the sizes of their main bodies are different, the shape of the shield plate for separating the first drive means and the second drive means from other regions can be simplified.

That is, when the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body portion and the other main body portion form a step. It becomes necessary to form a shield plate by bending it along the step, and the shape of such a shield plate becomes complicated. In contrast, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the main body are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step, so that the shield plate can be made into a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

Note that the shield plate is a shield plate that separates the area where the first drive means and the second drive means are disposed from other areas (for example, the area where the detection sensor and control board are disposed), and between the two areas. A barrier made of a conductor for restricting (suppressing) the flow of electromagnetic fields, and is formed, for example, as a metal plate.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, a first passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the first ball entry port and a passage for a game ball entered into the second ball entry port are provided. and a first transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening/closing member, and the first opening/closing member is rotated to a position sandwiching the ball entrance. The first transmission mechanism includes a pair of wing members that are pivotably supported to open or close the ball entrance, and the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first drive means and is configured to rotate the first passage member and the second passage. A game machine B7 comprising: a rotating member disposed between the members; and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the transmission mechanism between the first passage member and the second passage member is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means. Compare this with conventional products in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member, as it is equipped with a rotating member disposed in the rotary member and a sliding member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members. Thus, space can be secured on both sides (lateral sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entry port. In addition, unlike conventional products, there is no need to bend the first passage member toward the second passage to avoid interference with the rotating member, so the first ball entrance can be moved closer to the second ball entrance. I can do it.

In gaming machine B7, the rotating member includes a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the sliding member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. A game machine B8, wherein the first part is bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B7, the rotating member includes a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the sliding member. Since the first part is bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, the sliding amount of the slide member can be secured while the first part is driven by the first drive means. The distance between the slide member and the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension (distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the sliding member) of the first portion is determined by the distance from the rotating shaft to the sliding member in the present invention. If the distance is set equal to the straight line distance to the part where the sliding member is located, the amount of sliding of the sliding member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the sliding member increases and the overall size increases. . On the other hand, when the first portion is formed linearly and the length of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, Although the distance between the drive means and the slide member can be made the same as in the present invention, the amount by which the slide member slides becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the sliding amount of the sliding member is ensured, and the sliding distance between the first driving means and the sliding member is secured. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

A game machine B9 in the game machine B8, wherein the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first portion opposite to the slide member.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first portion opposite to the slide member, so that the first portion is bent. By effectively utilizing the space created by this, it is possible to downsize the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently disposed in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member, and the overall size can be reduced.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B9 includes a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is connected to the second opening/closing member and the first drive means. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that it is arranged between.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B9, the game machine B10 includes a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is set to the second opening/closing state. Since it is disposed between the member and the first drive means, for example, if the second opening/closing member is opened and the first drive means is tampered with from the second ball entrance, a part of the detection sensor will detect the first drive means. Since the drive means can be hidden, such fraudulent acts can be made difficult.

In this case, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure the path from the second ball entrance to the first drive means, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, fraud can be detected by monitoring the state of such detection sensors. In addition, in the present invention in which the first driving means is disposed on the back side of the second opening/closing member, even if the second opening/closing member is opened and tampering is done to the first driving means from the second ball entrance, By closing the second opening/closing member, the first drive means is shielded by the second opening/closing member, making it impossible to see the location where fraud has been committed, and therefore fraud can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. is particularly effective.

The gaming machine B10 includes a case member that accommodates the detection sensor, and a screw member fastened to the case member, and a pair of the detection sensors are provided, and at least a portion of each of the pair of detection sensors is provided. is arranged between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B10, at least a portion of each of the pair of detection sensors is disposed between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and is fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, the first drive means cannot be hidden by the screw member. This makes it more difficult for such fraudulent acts to occur. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with the pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of opposing detection sensors. By setting this as the fastening position of the screw member, the unshielded area in front of the first drive means can be supplemented by the screw member, thereby making it more difficult for fraudulent acts to occur.

Note that the case member may consist of two members and the screw member may be for fastening and fixing these two members together, or it may be for fastening and fixing another member to the case member. good. Moreover, it is preferable that the screw member is made of metal.

A gaming machine B12 in the gaming machine B11, wherein the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other, so that, for example, the second opening/closing member can be opened to open the second input. When tampering with the first driving means is attempted from the ball mouth, such tampering can be made more difficult.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure the path from the second ball entry port to the first drive means, the wiring may be damaged due to the unauthorized act. (disconnection) can be easily caused. Alternatively, it is possible to make the user recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (breaking) the wiring, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

In the game machine B12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wirings of the pair of detection sensors are wound around the seat portion.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wires for the pair of detection sensors are wound around the seat portion. , can be routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

In the gaming machine B12 or B13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening/closing member increases. Game machine B14.

According to the game machine B14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B12 or B13, the case member includes a seat portion to which a screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening/closing member increases. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second ball entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform hole-drilling, the direction of advance of the drill is set to the seat. Wiring can be easily damaged (broken) by causing it to shift laterally (slip) on the outer peripheral surface of the wire.

A game machine B15 characterized in that, in any of the game machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the opposite side to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member, so that the wiring is connected to the first driving means. can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes; a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member; a second member disposed on the back side of a game board; a first engaging part that engages with the first member; and a second engaging part that engages with the second member. A game machine C1 characterized by comprising a third member having the following.

Here, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member. A gaming machine is known that includes a second member disposed on the back side of the gaming board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and flows into the second passage on the back side of the game board. Pass through 2 passages. Thereby, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front and back direction, which can provide interest to the player.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball will be inhibited, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member will be ensured. You are requested to do so. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the first member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, it is necessary to invert the game board. This requires a separate step of forming a positioning hole just for the second member, which is not practical.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the third member has the first engaging part that engages with the first member and the second engaging part that engages with the second member, the third member It is possible to position the second member with respect to the first member using the following.

In the game machine C1, the game board is formed with an opening, and includes an opening in which a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space, and the opening A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the third member is disposed in an internal space of the gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the gaming board is formed with an opening, and the connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space. Since the third member is disposed in the internal space of the opening, there is no need to separately provide an opening for disposing the third member. In other words, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arranging space for the third member, the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly, leading to a reduction in product cost. can be achieved.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the third member is configured such that the first engaging portion engages with the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging portion engages with the second passage of the second member, respectively. A game machine C3 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine C3, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, the third member has the first engaging part in the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging part in the second passage of the second member, respectively. Since they are engaged, the second member can be effectively positioned relative to the first member. That is, the purpose of positioning the second member with respect to the first member is to suppress positional deviation (level difference) from occurring in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, but the purpose of positioning the second member with respect to the first member is Since the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage can be directly positioned by the third member, positional deviations (level differences) can be effectively prevented compared to the case where other parts are positioned by the third part. can be suppressed to As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down.

In the gaming machine C3, a gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a part of the inner wall of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member, so that the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage are reduced. Tolerances or installation tolerances can be more easily tolerated.

A gaming machine C5, which is any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, wherein the first member is formed to be able to hold the third member.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed to be able to hold the third member, so the first member and the second member are attached to the front and back of the game board. When attaching each member, there is no need to separately attach the third member, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine C5, a first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member when the third member is held by the first member. .

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C5, when the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After the first member and the third member are attached to the game board, there is no need to perform a separate operation to engage the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed to be able to engage with the second member from the opposite side to the first member. A game machine C7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member engages the second member from the opposite side of the first member. Therefore, by attaching the second member to the back of the game board after simultaneously attaching the first member and the third member to the game board, the second member of the third member can be engaged with the third member at the same time as the attachment operation. The two engaging portions can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In any of gaming machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is disposed, and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the third A gaming machine C8 characterized in that the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C5 to C7, the first member has a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixed to or integrally formed with the fixing member, the third member can be held (arranged) in the first member at the same time as the fixing member is fastened and fixed to the main body member. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first member and the second member to the game board.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first member is formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and is rotated to a position sandwiching the ball entrance and the ball entrance which is communicated with the first passage. a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported and open or close the ball entrance; a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members; and a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members; a transmission mechanism for transmitting transmission to the member; the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means; and a sliding member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members. A gaming machine C9, characterized in that the third member is formed to be able to guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a pair of rotating members that are slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. Since it is equipped with a slide member that opens and closes the pair of wing members, compared to the conventional product in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by a rotating member, the blade members can be opened and closed on the back side of the ball entrance and on both sides (sides) of the first passage. space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed to be able to guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the sliding displacement of the sliding member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine C9, the pair of wing members are provided with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the slide member, and the slide member is provided with a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted, A game machine C10 characterized in that the third member includes a covered surface portion facing an opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the pair of wing members are provided with a protruding part that protrudes toward the sliding member, and a sliding member through which the protruding part is slidably inserted is provided. Since the slide member includes a sliding groove, and the third member includes a covering surface facing the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the sliding member, the sliding of the slide member is prevented by the covering surface of the third member. By shielding the opening of the groove from the outside, it is possible to suppress dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, the pair of wing members can be stably opened or closed while preventing the sliding movement of the protrusion from being obstructed by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove.

<About the concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
A ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, a rolling surface on which a game ball rolled after entering the ball entrance, and the rolling surface thereof. A gaming machine D1 comprising a passage member into which game balls rolling on a surface flow, wherein a plurality of said passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, the ball entrance is formed such that a game ball can enter therein, an opening/closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, and a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. Gaming machines are known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-3092). The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. One ball is poured into the ball. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance of the game ball (length of the rolling surface) from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member increases accordingly. Therefore, it takes time for the ball to reach the passage member, and by the time the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, another game ball may enter the ball from the entrance, which causes the problem that over-winning is likely to occur. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, even when the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance of the game ball to the passage member (rolling surface (length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time it takes to reach the passage member is shortened by that amount, and the water can flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A game machine D1 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry hole, and the detection sensor is disposed at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, it is equipped with a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the detection sensor is disposed at the connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball entering the ball entrance can be detected more quickly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a first guide means having a first inclined surface that is inclined from the ball entry hole toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball rolling on the rolling surface. , the ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means is located at one end of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. and the passage member.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first inclined surface is inclined from the ball entrance toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means extends along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is disposed between the side end and the passage member, when a game ball enters from near the longitudinal end of the ball entrance, the game ball is guided by the first inclined surface of the first guiding means. By guiding it to the passage member, it is possible to prevent it from getting stuck at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that enters from the ball entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. This can prevent over-winning.

A game machine D4, which is any one of the game machines D1 to D3, and includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member. .

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member. Therefore, the rolling surface can receive game balls rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide them to the passage member. That is, when the game ball rolls in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, it can be suppressed from passing through the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that enters from the ball entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. This can prevent over-winning.

A gaming machine D5 in the gaming machine D4, wherein the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D4, the guide grooves extend linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The game ball rolling in the direction can be easily received into the guide groove, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (flowed) into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine D4 or D5, characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball, so when a plurality of game balls are received in the guide groove, The game balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In any of gaming machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is disposed. A gaming machine D7 characterized in that the second area is formed with a downward slope toward the first area.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface has a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is disposed. The second area on the opposite side of the area is formed with a downward slope toward the first area, so a game ball that enters the second area or a game ball that rolls from the first area to the second area. can be quickly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the downward slope of the second region. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine D7 comprising a second guide means protruding from the second region of the rolling surface.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D7, since it is provided with the second guide means protruding from the second region of the rolling surface, the rolling speed is increased due to the downward slope of the second region. The game ball can be decelerated before the passage member. That is, by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (just before) the passage member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second area through the passage member to the first area. . Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In a game machine D7 or D8, the game is arranged in a second region of the rolling surface and is rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface in the second region of the rolling surface toward the passage member. A gaming machine D9 comprising a second guide means formed to be able to guide a ball to the ball entry side.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D7 or D8, the second area of the rolling surface is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is directed toward the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the second guide means is formed to be able to guide the game balls rolling along the path toward the ball entrance side, the game balls whose rolling speed has been increased due to the downward slope of the second area are guided in front of the passage member. It can be slowed down. That is, by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (just before) the passage member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second area through the passage member to the first area. . Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine D10 in the gaming machine D9, wherein the opening/closing member is disposed at a position where a gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact when the ball entry opening is open.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D9, when the ball entrance is open, the opening/closing member is disposed at a position where the game balls rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact. The game ball guided toward the ball entrance by the second guide means can be brought into contact with the opening/closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the game machine D9 or D10, the second guide means has a side edge opposite to the first guide means that is inclined in a direction away from the ball entry hole as it becomes farther away from the first guide means, and A gaming machine D11 characterized in that its upper surface is sloped downward toward the side opposite to the first guide means.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D9 or D10, the second guide means is separated from the ball entrance as the side edge on the opposite side of the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. Since the upper surface is tilted downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, the game ball can be prevented from flying out from the ball entry hole and quickly flow into the passage member. can be done.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region facing the passage member, for game balls whose rolling speed is relatively low (slow), the ball is rolled from the ball entrance. Since the risk of the ball flying out to the outside is low, by making it come into contact with the side edge of the second guide means and guiding it toward the ball entrance side, it is possible to prevent the ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. By suppressing this, it is possible to flow into the passage member faster. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided to the first area (first guide means) by being made to climb over the upper surface of the second guide means. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by climbing over the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and it is possible to reliably decelerate the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from jumping out of the entrance hole and to quickly flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the gaming machine D11, the second guide means has a side edge facing the first guide means extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and extends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is larger than the dimension of the side edge of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine D12.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D11, the dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is larger than that in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the size is larger than the side edge of the second guide means, the game ball that has climbed over the top surface of the second guide means can come into contact (collide) with the first guide means and be reliably decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily located near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

A gaming machine D13 in the gaming machine D11 or D12, characterized in that a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball is included in the side edge of the second guide means.

According to the game machine D13, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D11 or D12, since the side edge of the second guide means includes a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball, the upper surface of the second guide means The game ball that has climbed over can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge of the first guide means, thereby being able to be reliably decelerated and easily positioned near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

A gaming machine D14, which is any one of the gaming machines D8 to D13, wherein the second guiding means is located on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in the inclined direction.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D8 to D13, the second guiding means is located on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in the inclined direction, so that the first guiding means Even if the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of , can be decelerated and can be easily located near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

The gaming machine D14 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and sloping downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member, and the second guide means is formed from the bottom surface of the guide groove. A game machine D15 characterized in that the height dimension to the top is larger than the radius of the game ball.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D14, it is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is Since the height dimension from to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is increased. When the ball is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact with (collide with) the second guide means. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated, and can be easily positioned near the passage member, and can be caused to quickly flow into the passage member.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D15 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member, and the guide groove has a groove width. The game machine D16 is characterized in that the size decreases toward the passage member.

According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D15, the gaming machine D16 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member. Since the groove width of the guide groove becomes smaller toward the passage member, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface comes into contact with (collides with) the side wall of the guide groove, causing The rolling direction of the game ball can be easily changed to the direction toward the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
A game machine comprising a ball entry unit having a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged, The game board has an opening formed in the board thickness direction, and the ball entry unit has the ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is disposed on the front side of the game board. and a second unit having a second passage disposed on the back side of the first unit through an opening of the game board and connected to the first passage. A gaming machine E1 characterized by.

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball entrance unit is arranged. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one with a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while reusing the game board. can. However, in the game machine described above, since the ball entry unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space in advance in front of the game board, for example, according to the maximum number of passages. Therefore, when using a ball entry unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem in that space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the ball entry unit has a ball entrance and a first passage connected to the ball entrance, and a first passage disposed on the front side of the game board. The second unit is provided on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and has a second passage connected to the first passage. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and there is no need to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passages) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one with a different number of second passages), you can reuse the game board and change the specifications of the game board. The space in front of the can be used effectively.

In the gaming machine E1, at least a part of the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit, and the second unit has a smaller outer shape than the first unit. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is arranged in an overlapping position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and the second unit has a smaller external shape when viewed from the front. Since it is disposed at a position overlapping one unit, the second unit can be seen by the player through the first unit, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential that the game board be made of a light-transmitting material; for example, the game board may be made of plywood, or a sticker may be pasted on the game board. Since it is also permissible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

A gaming machine E3 in the gaming machine E2, wherein at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, at least the front side of the second passage of the second unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that the flow of water through the first unit and down the second passage of the second unit is made of a light-transmitting material. It is possible to make the game ball visible to the player and increase the interest of the game.

Note that the first unit may be entirely formed from a light-transmitting material. Furthermore, when only a portion of the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion of the second unit that overlaps with the second passageway is formed of a light-transmitting material when viewed from the front. This is because the falling of the game ball can be visually recognized, increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E3, since the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material, When the second unit is made visible to the player, the player can easily understand the positional relationship in the front and back direction between the first unit and the second unit. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball changes its position in the front-back direction and flows down, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E4, a gaming machine E5 is characterized in that information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the front side of the second passage of the second unit.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit can be visually recognized through the first unit. Even in such a case, the player can easily recognize the position of the second passage (front-back direction position) by using the display as a landmark (reference position). Note that examples of the display mode include printing with ink, pasting of a sticker, two-color molding, and the like.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second passageway includes a second upstream passageway connected to the first passageway, and a plurality of second branch passageways branched into a plurality of lines from the second upstream passageway. and a plurality of second connection passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit being disposed on the back side of the first unit and connected to the second upstream passage. and a second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connection passages are formed, A gaming machine E6 characterized in that detection sensors for detecting passage of game balls are arranged in the plurality of second branch passages.

According to the gaming machine E6, in any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second unit is disposed on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which a plurality of second connecting passages are formed, and detects passage of game balls through the plurality of second branch passages. Since detection sensors are installed, for example, when changing the second upstream unit to another unit with fewer second branch passages to manufacture a gaming machine with different specifications, the number of detection sensors installed can be reduced. It can prevent workers from making mistakes.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are disposed in the second connecting passages, it is possible to arrange the detection sensors for the number of second connecting passages, but for example, in the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed, When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it would be sufficient to install one detection sensor, but only one detection sensor would be required for the number of second connecting passages. There is a possibility that a detection sensor will be installed. On the other hand, if the structure is such that a detection sensor is installed in the second branch passage, when changing the second upstream unit to another unit, the number of detection sensors that correspond to the unit will be installed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of the arrangement.

In the gaming machine E6, the first unit includes a second ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entry port passes. A detection sensor is formed across each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage that is formed in the second downstream unit. A game machine E7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E6, the first unit is provided with a second ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, and when a game ball is inserted into the second ball entrance. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed across each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is passed through a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensors for detection are arranged, the detection sensors arranged in the second unit can be distributed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

In the gaming machine E7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit directly or indirectly engage with each other. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by aligning the second unit with the first unit.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passage of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Since the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by engaging directly or indirectly, positioning can be performed even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so the position where the second passage is connected to the first passage is the same. By directly or indirectly engaging the or the third passages with each other for positioning, it is possible to position the first unit even if it is a separate unit.

In addition, the purpose of positioning the second unit with respect to the first unit is to prevent positional deviation (level difference) from occurring at the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target part (the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting part between the third passages) can be positioned, the positional deviation ( (steps) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be caused to flow down smoothly.

In any of gaming machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit, and the protruding A gaming machine E9 characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a portion of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. At the same time, since a receiving part is formed in the second downstream passage to receive a part of the protruded detection sensor, the positioning of the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit is performed by the engagement of the detection sensor and the receiving part. It is possible to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole by suppressing a portion of the detection sensor from protruding outside.

In the gaming machines E1 to E6, the first unit includes a second ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entrance passes. is formed between at least the second branch passage in the second unit.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E1 to E9, the third passage through which the game ball entered the second ball entry hole passes is located between at least the second branch passage in the second unit. Therefore, the second unit can be made smaller.

In any one of gaming machines E1 to E10, the second passage has a bent portion bent from the front side to the back side of the second unit, and an inner surface of a wall portion on the outside of the bent portion in the bent portion. A gaming machine E11, characterized in that an upright portion is erected from above, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines E1 to E10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the bending portion is bent from the front to the back of the second unit. An upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outside of the bend in the portion, and the wall portion on the outside of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downstream direction of the game ball. To make it easier for a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down a curved part of a passage. In other words, by erecting the erected portion from the inner surface of the wall on the outside of the bent portion, the rigidity of the passage is increased and durability is improved, and the game ball is placed along the tip of the erected portion. While the curved part can be guided and flowed down smoothly, the upright part is located in front of the game ball when viewed from the front, so the game ball is hidden by the upright part and the visibility of the game ball is reduced. decreases. On the other hand, by slanting the curved outer wall so that it is located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball, it is possible to ensure rigidity and guide the game ball while also allowing the wall to stand upright. Since the thickness of the installation part in the front and back direction can be reduced, visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
A game machine comprising a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowed down from the first passage member pass. , a game machine F1, characterized in that at least a bottom upstream end on the bottom side and a side upstream end on the side side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. .

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which the game ball flowed down from the first passage member passes. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in this structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected, misalignment between them is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There was a problem in that a step was formed at the connecting part, which could impede the smooth flow of the game balls.

On the other hand, in the game machine F1, at least the bottom upstream end on the bottom side and the side upstream end on the side surface of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. , the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom side (the upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the side surface side (the upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

In the gaming machine F1, a gaming machine F2 is characterized in that a position spaced apart by a radius of the game ball from the upstream end of the bottom surface is included in the upstream end of the side surface.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, since the side upstream end includes a position spaced apart by the radius of the gaming ball from the upstream end of the bottom surface, the gaming ball moves from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), such a game ball can be inscribed in the upstream end of the side surface. That is, the position of the step on the bottom surface side and the position of the step on the side surface side, which are affected by the game ball, can be reliably made different in the direction of passage of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the game ball being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and it is easier to disperse these influences, so the game ball can flow down (pass through) smoothly. ) can be done.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, of the downstream ends of the first passage member, a bottom downstream end on the bottom side and a side downstream end on the side side are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the first The passage member includes a protruding piece that protrudes from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and whose protruding tip is the downstream end of the side surface; A gaming machine F3, comprising a recessed portion that receives the protruding piece and a portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first passage member projects from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and its protruding tip is connected to the downstream end of the side surface. In addition, the second passage member includes a recess provided at its upstream end to receive the protrusion piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protrusion piece is the upstream end of the side wall. A side downstream end and a bottom downstream end of the member can be proximate to a side upstream end and a downstream side end of the second channel member. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface, the game ball reaches the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively low rigidity and there is a risk of breakage, but according to the game machine F3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the direction of passage of the game ball). Even if the protruding piece is broken, the bottom upstream end and the side upstream end of the second passage member can be maintained at different positions in the direction in which the game ball passes, and the game ball can The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (the upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Further, according to the game machine F3, since the game machine protruding piece is formed in the first passage member and the recess is formed in the second passage member, the side surface of the recess is brought into contact with the protruding piece, so that the first It is possible to restrict upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member. In other words, at a level difference where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be bounced up when riding on it. Compared to a step in which the upstream end of the second passage member is at a lower position, the smooth flow down (passage) of the game ball is likely to be inhibited. Therefore, as in game machine F3, the ability to restrict upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member means that the upstream end of the second passage member is at a higher position than the downstream end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress the formation of steps, and it is particularly effective for the smooth flow of game balls.

In the gaming machine F3, a gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F3, since the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member Compared to the case where the game ball is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be made to slide along the slope, making it difficult to bounce back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

A gaming machine F5 in the gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the second passage member The side upstream end of the upstream ends can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, compared to the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member is not allowed to slide along the slope. You can make it harder to bounce back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F5, the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined, so compared to, for example, a case where it is formed in a shape (step-like) having a protruding piece or a recessed part. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stress concentration and ensure the durability of the passage member. In addition, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the injection mold cavity (hollow part) can be gradually changed, suppressing air bubbles (air trapping) and filling defects, and molding. It is possible to improve sexual performance.

In the gaming machines F4 and F5, a gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be sloped downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine, the side surface of the second passage member The game ball that collides with the upstream end can be pushed toward the bottom side. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from jumping up and bouncing at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

<About the concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In the game machine, the game machine includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the drive means, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, wherein the pair of wing members move from the outside in an opening direction. A gaming machine G1, wherein the transmission mechanism is configured to be able to regulate displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction when the wing members are displaced.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry hole, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball entry hole. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means, the pair of wing members are placed in a permissible position that allows entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means disposed at a regulating position that regulates the entry of game balls into the ball entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is arranged at the permissible position, thereby preventing the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members from entering the ball entrance. You can let the ball enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is placed in the regulating position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball will be directed to the ball entrance. It is possible to restrict the ball being thrown into the ball.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so for example, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside, it is possible to displace the regulating means from the regulating position to the permissible position. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of regulating game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the pair of wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forced open. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members. A receiving part is recessed in the inner wall of the blade member to receive the protruding part when the slide member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed, and when the protruding part is received in the receiving part, the receiving part is recessed. , a gaming machine G2 characterized in that rotation of the wing member is regulated.

According to gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives a protrusion when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed. When the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion, rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member is prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

A game machine G3 in the game machine G2, wherein the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, since the sliding direction of the sliding member is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, the wing member is displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Therefore, even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the protruding portion and the receiving portion, a sliding displacement component of the slide member is less likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forced to open.

Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

A gaming machine G4, which is the gaming machine G2 or G3, wherein the protruding part is received in the receiving part by sliding the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2 or G3, since the sliding member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, the protruding part is received in the receiving part, so that the weight of the sliding member is reduced. (self-weight) can be used to easily maintain the state in which the protruding part is received in the receiving part.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is , comprising an abutting portion and an overhanging portion protruding from a tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate the rotating member toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and the one side of the abutted part and the one-side abutted part are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. the other side abutted part with which the other side of the abutment part abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the one side abutted part to a position where one side of the abutting part is abutted and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other side of the abutting part abuts the other side abutted part. A game machine G5 characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the projecting portion with the sliding member is released.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the rotating member includes an abutting part and an overhanging part extending from the tip of the abutting part, and the sliding member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutting part comes into contact with the one side abutted part, and the one side abutted part is spaced apart from the one side abutted part by a predetermined interval in the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged facing each other and which is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated towards the other side in order to open the wing member, so that the rotating member is on one side. When the wing member is rotated to , the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the slide member is slid toward the one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member is slid towards the other side. , the wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the abutting part is in contact with the one-side abutted part and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, so the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting part abuts at least the other side abutted part, the engagement of the overhanging part with the sliding member is released, so the rotation By further rotating the member toward the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side, and the wing member can be opened.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is , comprising an abutting portion and an overhanging portion protruding from a tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate the rotating member toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and the one side of the abutted part and the one-side abutted part are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. and an abutted part on the other side with which the other side of the abutting part abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the protruding part When the sliding member is disengaged from the member and is slid from the closed state of the wing member to a position where the one-side abutting portion abuts one side of the abutting portion. , a game machine G6, wherein the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the rotating member includes an abutting part and a projecting part extending from the tip of the abutting part, and the sliding member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutting part comes into contact with the one side abutted part, and the one side abutted part is spaced apart from the one side abutted part by a predetermined interval in the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged facing each other and which is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated towards the other side in order to open the wing member, so that the rotating member is on one side. When the wing member is rotated to , the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the slide member is slid toward the one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member is slid towards the other side. , the wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid from the state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one-side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion, the overhang portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhang portion is not engaged with the slide member, so by further rotating the rotary member toward the other side, the slide member is slid toward the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang part is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang part and one side contact part can be changed to allow rotation of the rotating member to the other side. It is necessary to form it into a specific shape, which makes the shape complicated. Therefore, not only the strength may decrease, but also the engagement may become more likely to be released. On the other hand, in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shape of the overhanging portion and one side contact portion can be rotated. There is no need to shape the member to allow rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified to ensure strength, but also a shape that is easy to maintain engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

Any of the game machines G2 to G6 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and when the protrusion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the A gaming machine G7 characterized in that a part of the slide member is disposed within the passage of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G2 to G6, the gaming machine G7 includes a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the protruding part does not fit into the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is placed in the passage of the passage member, so even if the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside by cutting the protruding part, the ball will not enter from the ball entrance. The sliding member can restrict the flow of the game ball.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In a game machine comprising a drive means for generating a drive force for rotating the ball, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, the game ball inserted into the ball entry hole. A game machine H1 comprising a passage member forming a passage, and a part of the transmission mechanism traverses the passage of the passage member when displacing the wing member from an open position to a closed position.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. A game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive means to a pair of wing members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20111- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side, the wing member is opened or closed.

In this case, for example, the end of the thread is glued to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects the ball multiple times by manipulating the other end (pulling out or pulling it) to move the game ball back and forth. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem in that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent activity in which the tip of the thread is glued to the game ball and the detection sensor is detected multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so the thread whose tip end is glued to the game ball The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game balls, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that are caused to be detected by the detection sensor multiple times.

In the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism causes the slide member to cross the path of the passage member and rub against the edge of the passage member when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising a frictional contact portion.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism allows the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position, and the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member. Since the ball is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball enters the ball with the wing member open, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the friction portion of the slide member crosses the path of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the friction contact part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the friction contact part is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the friction contact part and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that the frictional contact portion of the slide member is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (friction portion) may be formed from a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion with which the friction contact portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Further, it is preferable that the frictional contact portion and the portion (edge of the passage member) with which the frictional contact portion comes into contact with each other are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub their edges against each other when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. The gaming machine H3 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a pair of blades that cross the passage of the passage member and rub their edges against each other are provided. Since the transmission mechanism is provided with the cutting member, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pair of cutting members cross the path of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be cut by sandwiching it between a pair of cutting members. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that it is preferable that the pair of cutting members be formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that rub against each other) may be formed from a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that rub against each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine H2 or H3, the drive means is configured to displace the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force, and also displace the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The actuator is formed as a solenoid actuator that is actuated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A game machine H4 featuring the following.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H2 or H3, the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and having a reflective portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end face of the light transmitting member, the light transmitting member being made of a light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. In the gaming machine, the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is set to a high proportion of the light emitted from the light irradiation means, in which the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the output increasing means is provided outside the display area.

Here, the light transmitting member is formed into a plate shape from a light transmitting material and has a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating light to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the gaming area, under normal conditions, the display on the liquid crystal display device can be viewed by the player through the light transmitting member. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmission member, and the light traveling inside the light transmission member is reflected by the reflection part. Then, the light is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflective section is provided with a plurality of groups each consisting of a plurality of reflective surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or design. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member as a pattern or design. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, patterns and designs can be made to appear (display) on the front of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the light reflected by the reflective portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly highlight (display) patterns and designs. In this case, increasing the output of the light irradiation means not only increases cost and power consumption, but also increases the amount of heat generated, causing problems in that the heat affects other members and equipment.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the output increasing means increases the proportion of the light emitted from the front side of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light emitting means, so that the light is reflected by the reflecting part. The light emitted from the front of the transparent member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it is difficult to be seen by the player, and deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition, the formation position of the reflection part of a light transmission member may be sufficient as the back surface of a light transmission member, or the inside of a light transmission member may be sufficient as it, for example.

A gaming machine I2 in the gaming machine I1, wherein the output increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along an outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I2, the output increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means is emitted onto the side end face of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected on the outer edge member can be made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the amount of light that is incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member is accordingly reduced. Light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light irradiation means that reaches the reflective part of the light transmitting member, so that the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , it is possible to clearly highlight (display) patterns and designs. Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this way, the output increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member, so that when another device in the gaming area emits light, In this case, the outer edge member blocks the light from such other devices, thereby preventing the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the light-transmitting member, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the light-transmitting member), light from other devices may not enter the light-transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress patterns and designs from being displayed on the front side of the light-transmitting member.

In the gaming machine I2, the gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front and back sides of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the outer edge member is disposed on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, so that part of the light emitted from the light irradiation means is absorbed by the light transmitting member. The light that is not directly incident on the side end face and deviates to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that deviates to the back side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and is made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased.

Furthermore, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light-transmitting member in this way, even when light emitted by other devices in the gaming area reaches the light-transmitting member from either the front or back side, Since the light can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the light-transmitting member, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the light-transmitting member), light from other devices may not enter the light-transmitting member. This makes it possible to more reliably suppress patterns and designs from being displayed on the front side of the light-transmitting member.

A gaming machine I4 in the gaming machine I2 or I3, wherein the outer edge member is disposed to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is The light can be reflected by the protruding portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member), thereby making it easier for the light to enter the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased.

A gaming machine I5 in any one of gaming machines I2 to I4, wherein the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine I5, in the effect produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, since the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed from materials having the same refractive index, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is difficult to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface of the outer edge part (boundary with air) and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light that returns from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflecting section is reduced. On the other hand, as in game machine I4, by forming the outer edge member from a material with a smaller refractive index than the light-transmitting member, light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can be transferred between the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or it can be totally reflected) at the boundary with the reflective part, it is possible to ensure that the light reaches the reflective part.

A gaming machine I6 in any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, wherein the outer edge member is arranged with a predetermined gap formed between the outer edge member and the front or back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine I6, in the effect produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected at the front or back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is difficult to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface of the outer edge part (boundary with air) and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light that returns from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflecting section is reduced. On the other hand, by arranging the outer edge member with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member, as in the game machine I5, the light is not incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the front or back surface (boundary with air) of the light-transmitting member, it is possible to ensure that the light reaches the reflecting portion.

Any one of the gaming machines I2 to I6 includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and , a curved rack gear is carved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism rotates a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and the pinion gear. A gaming machine I7 comprising a driving means.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines I2 to I6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and extends along the circumferential direction of the outer circumferential surface or inner circumferential surface of the annular shape. The rotating mechanism includes a pinion gear that meshes with the curved rack gear on the outer edge member, and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, thereby allowing the light transmitting member to rotate together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member serves both the role of condensing the light irradiated from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmission member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the light transmission member and rotating it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

Any one of gaming machines I2 to I7 includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and A gaming machine I8, characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface thereof, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I2 to I7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and a guide groove is provided along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotation mechanism is provided with a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed due to the action of these guide grooves and the support ring. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can enter from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the player can visually recognize the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can serve both the role of focusing the light irradiated from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, thereby reducing product cost and improving reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

Note that the support ring may be rotatably supported, or may be fixed in a non-rotatable manner. In this case, the supporting wheel may be guided along the guide groove in a manner in which the rotatably supported support wheel rolls or slides along the guide groove, or in a manner in which it is non-rotatably supported. An example is illustrated in which a fixed support ring slides along a guide groove.

In addition, in a gaming machine I8 subordinate to the gaming machine I7, the outer edge member on which the curved rack gear is engraved is placed on one of the front or back side of the light-transmitting member, and the outer edge member on which the guide groove is recessed is placed on the light-transmitting member. It is preferable to arrange them on the other side of the front side or the back side. That is, by disposing the outer edge members on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means does not directly enter the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the light emitted from the light transmitting member does not directly enter the side end face of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and can be made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In addition, by disposing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light-transmitting member, light emitted by other devices in the gaming area can reach from either the front or back side of the light-transmitting member. Even in such a case, the light can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, and it is possible to suppress the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine I8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape such that its outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined distance, and the opposing gap between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine I9 characterized in that it is a groove.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape such that its outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined distance, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member Since the opposing gap between the two is used as a guide groove, the structure including the light transmitting member and the outer edge member can be downsized. That is, by having one inner wall of the guide groove on the front or back side of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member to have a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transferred to the front side of the light transmitting member. Or it can be made easier to reflect on the back (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has a direction in which light is irradiated from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine I10 characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture perpendicular to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means Since the irradiation surface is arranged to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in such a manner that the direction of light irradiation from the surface is perpendicular to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated with light from the light irradiation means. It is possible to easily reflect the light incident from the front or rear surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<About the concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture with each irradiation surface facing the target member, the plurality of light emitting means The present invention includes one or more substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and formed to be elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Features of gaming machine J1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged with their irradiation surfaces facing the target member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -29735). According to this gaming machine, by emitting light from the light emitting means and making it enter from the outer circumferential surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting part. The light can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant forms the target member into a disk shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflective part, and at the same time, attaches a plurality of light emitting means to the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member) on the irradiation surface. A structure was devised (unknown at the time of filing of this application) in which the light emitting means is arranged so as to surround the target member in a posture facing toward the target member, and the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer circumferential surface of the target member.

However, it has been newly discovered that in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem in that a plurality of light emitting means must be arranged around the target member, which increases the time and effort of the arrangement work. In particular, it is necessary to arrange the plurality of light emitting means with their respective irradiation surfaces facing the outer circumferential surface of the target member (that is, in different directions), which also increases the labor and effort of the arrangement work. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or more board members are formed to be elastically deformable, and the board members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Since the base member is provided with a base member, the work of disposing at least two or more light emitting means can be completed by disposing one substrate member on the base member. Therefore, the effort required to arrange the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when a substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is elastically deformed and held in a predetermined posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to individually arrange a plurality of light emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing toward the outer circumferential surface of the target member, it is also possible to reduce the labor involved in disposing the light emitting means.

A gaming machine J2, which is a gaming machine J1, further comprising a block body formed to have higher rigidity than the base member and disposed on the base member, and the block body being held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1, it is provided with a block body formed to have higher rigidity than the base member and disposed on the base member, and the block body is held by the base member. By suppressing warping and bending of the substrate member, it is possible to easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, the attitude of the light emitting means is suppressed from being affected by warping or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine J2, the gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is disposed in a region of the substrate member where the block body is disposed.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the light emitting means is arranged in the region of the board member where the block body is arranged, so that the posture of the light emitting means is adjusted to prevent warpage of the board member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the effects of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be maintained even more easily.

In gaming machine J2 or J3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged at predetermined intervals on the base member, and the base member is held in a posture in which the base member located between the block bodies is elastically deformed. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being held on the body.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J2 or J3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the substrate member at predetermined intervals, and the substrate member located between the block bodies is made elastic. Since it is held on the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture (orientation of the irradiation surface) of the light emitting means is stabilized compared to the case where the base member directly holds the substrate member in an elastically deformed posture. be able to.

In any one of gaming machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the front side of the substrate member opposite to the target member. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being arranged on the back.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is located on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is disposed on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front side of the base plate member, and the head of the screw is protruded from the front side of the base member J6.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the board member, and the heads of the screws are protruded from the front of the board member, so that the light emitting means can be emitted. Can be protected by screw head. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, thereby suppressing damage caused by contact with the light emitting means.

In the game machine J6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two of the screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

Note that the two screws are preferably disposed along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws disposed in this manner, the movable member can be easily brought into contact with the heads of the screws, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J7, one of the base body or the block body is provided with a protrusion, and the other of the base body or the block body is provided with a fitting hole that receives and fits the protrusion. A gaming machine J8 characterized in that it is recessed.

According to gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines J2 to J7, one of the base body or the block body is provided with a protrusion, and a fitting is provided in which the protrusion is received and fitted. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body or the block body, by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, the block body can be arranged on the base body, and the labor of the installation work can be reduced. . In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one block body is positioned by fitting (temporarily fixed). ), the substrate member can be elastically deformed (bended) and the other block body can be fitted into the base member, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines J2 to J8, the block body has a recessed portion on the side that is disposed on the substrate member, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recessed portion of the block body. A gaming machine J9 characterized by:

According to gaming machine J9, in any of gaming machines J2 to J8, the block body is provided with a recessed portion on the surface on the side to be disposed on the substrate member, and the block body is disposed on the substrate member in the recessed portion of the block body. Since the electronic components are housed, the electronic components can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid damage caused by the movable member coming into contact with the electronic component.

<About the concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member. The machine includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position due to the action of gravity. disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction, and in a state where the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A game machine K1 characterized in that the gravitational force acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member are provided. A gaming machine is known that provides an effect by displacing a displacing member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position (e.g., one of the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area; When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the operation of the displacement member being displaced toward the overhanging position is performed as a game. A performance is performed for people to see. However, in the gaming machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. The displacement member is disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction toward the second position, and when the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately, a simple harmonic) is caused by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, centering on this balance position (predetermined position). ) can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be made into an orthogonal projection of a uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied to the displacement member from the driving means, the displacement member can be displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (orthogonal projection movement of uniform circular motion). Therefore, the variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. In other words, simply by switching whether or not to apply driving force from the drive means to the displacement member, variations in displacement can be increased, and there is no need to complicate the structure or control, which reduces product cost and improves reliability. It is possible to improve the performance.

The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the displacement member has one end rotatably supported by the base member and the other end raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. Game machine K2.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. , when the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is canceled and the displacement member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, such The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only linear movement in the vertical direction but also rotational movement about the one end side as the center of rotation. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement.

The gaming machine K2 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. and a connecting member, one end of which is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the other end of which is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the transmission means includes a rotating member that is rotatably disposed on the base member and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means that is eccentric from the center of rotation of the rotating member. Since the connecting member is connected at one end to the position where the displacement member is connected and the other end is connected to the displacement member, application of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are prevented. When a displacement member is caused to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) due to a force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotary member of the force in the push and pull directions. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. Such a displacement member can be caused to perform interesting displacements.

In the gaming machine K3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotational center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member are The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially perpendicular to each other.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connection position of the rotating member and the connecting member Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and displacement member is approximately perpendicular to the direction connecting the The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the balance position (predetermined position), and the force component can be decreased in either direction of push or pull from the balance position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed approximately symmetrically about the balance position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a protruding portion that protrudes toward the other, and the predetermined position within the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced through the central range including the central range, the protruding portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the position is closer to the first position or the second position than the central range. A game machine K5 characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to , the protruding portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member is provided with a protruding part that protrudes toward the other, and between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range that includes a predetermined position within the movable range, the protruding portion is not opposed to the other rotating member or the connecting member, and When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range near the second position, the protruding portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so the application of driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released. When the displaceable member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement around the balance position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displaceable member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protrusion in the central range. On the other hand, in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the protruding portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other in the outer range, and the rotation of the member is prevented. Shakiness between the member and the connecting member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center range, and the center range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. Since the position of the displacement member is set within the range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member is adjusted by using the protrusion to suppress rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protrusion, which acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted toward the outer edge of the gaming area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is extended toward the center of the gaming area, In the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member is suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the performance of other members can be suppressed from being inhibited. When displacing from the first position to the second position (extended position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the production effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. .

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that, in the second position, the center of rotation of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. A gaming machine K7.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K6, in the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially aligned. Since it is located on a line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the direction of the push and pull will be toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member will be It is possible to create a state in which this does not occur (ie, a dead center). Therefore, when displacing the displacement member toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to sliding of the protruding portion and to displace the displacement member smoothly (quickly). After the displacement member is placed in position, the above-mentioned dead center action suppresses rattling of the displacement member, thereby improving the appearance and durability.

In any one of gaming machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes a contacting portion formed to be able to come into contact with the base member, and the contacting portion is configured to adjust the connection position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is disposed substantially on a straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member, and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member, with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. Game machine K8.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes a contact portion that is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the base member, and the contact portion is connected to the displacement member and the base. It is located substantially on a straight line connecting the connecting position of the members and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and on the opposite side from the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member in between. , when the displacement member shakes with respect to the base member, the abutting part of the connecting member comes into contact with the base member, so that the rotating member and the connecting part of the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member can rotate) It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft (with respect to the shaft support hole of the part connected to the shaft). As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<About the concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means includes a first drive means and a first drive means. and two driving means, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in different manners.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs effects by displacing the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge of the gaming area, but when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the displacement member An effect is performed in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position, and the player is made to visually recognize the movement of the displacement member that is displaced toward the extended position.

However, conventional gaming machines have had a problem in that the effect of the performance produced by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in conventional gaming machines, the displacement mode of the displaceable member (trajectory when the displaceable member displaces with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, so the performance due to the displacement of the displaceable member is limited to one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to perform a performance that would surprise the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by increasing or decreasing the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member will only increase or decrease, and the displacement mode (trajectory) will remain constant, so it will not be possible to create an effect that surprises the player. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the driving means includes a first driving means and a second driving means, and in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. Since the displacement member is displaced in different manners depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means, the effect of the performance by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. In other words, unlike conventional products in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced relative to the base member) is limited to one pattern, the effect does not follow one pattern, and one displacement member can be moved in at least two ways. Since it can be displaced in a normal displacement manner, by switching the displacement manner, it is possible to perform a performance that surprises the player.

In the gaming machine L1, a first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first driving means, and a first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the second driving means. a second member driven by a game machine L2, wherein a first portion and a second portion of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. .

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1, the first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first driving means; and a second member driven by the second drive means, the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member being at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side can be formed, while the second member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, a displacement mode can be formed in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to gaming machine L2, the two displacement modes are not formed by having the same center of rotation and different directions of rotation, but by having different directions of rotation and different centers of rotation. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and it is possible to easily perform performances that surprise the player.

In the game machine L2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protrudes from either the first portion of the displacement member or the first member. A game machine L3 is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first part of the displacement member or the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, or the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case where the first member and the second member are slidable on a curved trajectory. If so, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism that can continuously apply a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. For example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be used and the structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve durability and operational reliability.

In the game machine L3, a game machine L4 is characterized in that the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel, so that the first driving means or the second driving means In addition to a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated by driving only one of the drive means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is linearly displaced (for example, transversely) by driving both the first drive means and the second drive means. Embodiments can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, by switching the displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprise effect for the player.

In particular, according to the game machine L4, as for the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are different, and the type of displacement itself is different. (that is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is easier for the player to perform surprise effects.

In the gaming machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, a displacement in which the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine L5 characterized by a speed.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed of the member is different from that of the displacement member, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can not only be displaced (linear movement) parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but also can be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform performances that surprise the player.

Note that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , as in the present invention, it has become possible for the first time to utilize two driving means.

Any of the game machines L1 to L5 includes a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the second displacement member, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. Game machine L6.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines L1 to L5, the second displacement member is disposed displaceably on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means. When the displacement member is moved, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. , it is possible to increase the device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means. Therefore, by switching the displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a performance that surprises the player.

<About the concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiation means for irradiating light toward the target member, at least one or both of the target member or the light irradiation means is formed to be displaceable. A gaming machine M1, wherein the manner in which the target member is irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the light irradiation means.

Here, a game includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this gaming machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is disposed inside the displacement member, and a transparent part made of a light-transmissive material is provided on the front side of the displacement member (the surface facing the player). By irradiating the light section from the back side with the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize that a part of the displacement member (light-transmitting section) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light irradiation means irradiates the target member in a constant manner, there is a problem in that there is little change in the aspect visually recognized by the player, making it difficult to provide interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable, and the manner in which the target member is irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed by displacement of one or both of them. It is possible to change the way the player views the game. As a result, it is possible to easily keep players interested.

Examples of forms in which the light irradiation mode is changed include changes in the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means, and changes in the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member. For example, a form in which a combination of these forms is used, a form in which these are combined, etc.

A gaming machine M2, characterized in that the gaming machine M1 includes a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed movably on the base member.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed movably on the base member, so that the electricity of the light irradiation means This allows the wires to be kept in a fixed state, and the occurrence of disconnections can be suppressed to that extent.

The gaming machine M2 includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, allowing the player to see a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member, and allowing the target member to be exposed to light. It is formed in a plate shape from a transparent material and is provided with a reflecting part, and the light emitted from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting part and emitted from the front of the target member. A game machine M3 featuring the following.

Here, in the reflecting section, a plurality of groups each consisting of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a shape of a pattern or a design. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member as a pattern or design.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2, it includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, and allows the player to see a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, different parts of the target member can be made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position where a first group of a plurality of groups constituting the reflective section is visible through the opening, and a second position where the second group, which is a different group from the first group, is visible through the opening. When the target member is displaceable between the second position and the second position where the target member is visible through the opening of the shielding member, by placing the target member in the first position, the first group can displace the target member through the opening of the shielding member. While making the first pattern or pattern formed visible to the player, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. , the second pattern or pattern formed by the second group can be changed.

In this case, the target member is made of a light-transmitting material, so when displacing the target member in order to change the pattern or design that the player visually recognizes, the light from the light irradiation means must not be irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the target member is formed in a circular or annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular or annular shape. Game machine M4.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatable to the base member around the center of the circular or annular shape. Compared to the case where the target member can be slid and displaced, the target member can be arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols that the player can see through the opening of the shielding member. The space required can be reduced.

In the game machine M2, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape when viewed from the front and is provided with a reflective portion, and is configured to reflect light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end surface. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are distributed around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the side end surface of the target member. A gaming machine M5, wherein the target member is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular shape.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material in the shape of a circular plate and is provided with a reflective section, and is irradiated by the light irradiation means and is illuminated from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by a reflecting part and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the side end face of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible to make the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member visible to the player in the rotated state. can.

A gaming machine M6 in the gaming machine M5, wherein the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in a circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M5, since the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, the rotational position ( It is possible to easily keep the light emitted from the front of the target member constant regardless of the phase). That is, patterns and designs displayed by light emitted from the front of the target member can be stably formed.

A gaming machine M7, which is characterized in that the gaming machine M1 includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are disposed movably on the base member.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, since the light irradiation means and the target member are disposed movably on the base member, the combination of the displacements of the two allows the light irradiation means to affect the target member. It is possible to increase variations in the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the visual appearance of the player, and it is possible to make the game more interesting to the player.

The gaming machine M7 includes a driving means for displacing the target member by applying a driving force thereto, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. A gaming machine M8, characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M7, the gaming machine M8 is provided with a driving means for displacing the target member by applying a driving force to the target member, and the light irradiation means is configured to displace the target member by applying a driving force to the target member. Since the member is displaced together with the target member by being brought into contact with the member, it can also be used as a driving means for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the light irradiation means. can.

Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6, and A gaming machine K1 in any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6, and A gaming machine K2 in any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6, and A gaming machine K3 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board 60 Base board (game board)
60a Through hole (opening)
64 1st prize opening (1st aisle)
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance, 1st ball entrance)
65a Specified prize opening (second ball entrance)
410 Base member 420L Left displacement member (displacement member)
420R Right displacement member (displacement member)
422 Connection hole (first part or second part)
423 Sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 Truck member (first member or second member)
481 First drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 Projecting member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L Lower left rack (first member or second member)
488R Lower right rack (first member or second member)
488b Drive pin (connection pin)
491 Second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610,5610,6610 Base member 611,5611,6612 Back base (base member)
612,5612 Front base (base member)
612g holding pin (protrusion)
6612p Opening 6612r Shielding member 620, 2620, 3620, 5620, 6620 Projection plate member (target member, light transmitting member)
622, 6622 Reflector 630, 3630 Gear member (outer edge member, output increasing means)
631 Teeth (curved rack gear)
640, 2640, 3640 Groove forming member (outer edge member, output increasing means)
641,2641 Guide groove 651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiation means)
652 Substrate member 653 First block (block body)
653b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 2nd block (block body)
654b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 Drive motor (drive means)
820 Front base (part of base member)
830 Back base (part of base member)
850 Displacement member 863 Transmission gear (rotating member)
863c Projection part 870 Connection member 880 Drive motor (drive means)
940 Front unit (first member, first unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
942c Second ball throwing part (part of first passage member)
943 Front base (main body member)
943a Rolling part (first passage, part of first passage member)
945 Wing member (first opening/closing member)
945b Protrusion (Protrusion)
951 Plate member (second opening/closing member, opening/closing member)
953a1 Opening (ball entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Annular projection (seat)
954b Recess (guide groove)
954c Projection part (second guide means)
954c2 Side portion 954c3 Side edge portion 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 Second guide surface (first inclined surface)
954d2 Second side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Recessed portion (passage member)
957a1 Main body part 957a2 Shaft part (drive shaft)
960 Drive unit (third member)
961a Main body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962e Arm part (second engaging part)
962f Wall part (covered surface part)
962g Projection part (first engagement part)
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance, 2nd ball entrance)
965,18965 Transmission member (rotating member, part of first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (part of the first part)
965b Rotating part (part of the first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Projection part (second part)
965e Insertion part (contact part)
966, 8966, 11966, 12966, 14966, 18966 Displacement member (slide member, part of first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Recess (receiving part)
966b2 One side abutted part 966b3 Other side abutted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 Second blade part (part of cutting member)
6683 Blade (part of cutting member)
970 Throwing unit (second unit)
980 Sorting unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall part (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b Inclined part (bending part)
982h1, 982j1 Guide part (erected part)
985e1, 985f1 Inflow passage (second connection passage)
900 Passage unit (second downstream unit)
991c1, 991d1 Recessed part (receiving part)
TR0 Ball throwing passage (part of the second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1 1st passage (part of 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
TR2 2nd passage (part of 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
SE1 Detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 Detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 Detection device (detection sensor)
HS1 Wiring HS2 Wiring HS3 Wiring SP Biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 Screw C Collar (support ring)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center range)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A gaming machine is known which includes a ball entry unit that is provided with a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is disposed. (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-131046

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that space on the front side of the gaming board is wasted.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can effectively utilize the space in front of the game board.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a ball entry unit having a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port; and a game board on which the unit is arranged, the game board has an opening formed in the board thickness direction, and the ball entry unit is connected to the ball entry port and the ball entry port. a first unit disposed on the front side of the game board, and a first unit disposed through the opening of the game board on the back side of the first unit; a second unit having a second passage connected to the second unit.

According to the game machine according to the first aspect, the space in front of the game board can be effectively utilized.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. 20 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 19. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. 22 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 21. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. 24 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 23. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 2nd aspect. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 25. FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 3rd aspect. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit as seen from the rear in FIG. 27. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rear base. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front base and the irradiation unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front base. 35 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. FIG. It is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member taken along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. 37. FIG. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39(a). (a) to (c) are partially enlarged sectional views of the projection unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). (a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit as seen in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 44(b). (a) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a sectional view of the first block taken along the XLVIb-XLVIb line in FIG. 46(a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block taken along the line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the second position. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the second position. (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connection member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connection member in the intermediate position, and (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connection member in the second position. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gear and the connecting member. (a) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 55, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. , is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56. (a) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove taken along the line LXb-LXb in FIG. 60(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. (a) is a side view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and (b) is a side view of the projection plate as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 65(c) is a sectional view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of an irradiation unit in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the irradiation unit. (a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of a projection unit in the vicinity of the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front base. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the projection unit. (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the front base in a state where the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (a) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. It is a front view of the game board in 7th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base board, a winning opening unit, and a throwing unit. (a) is a front view of the winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning a prize mouth unit. (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective back view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit. . (a) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). (a) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93(b). It is a sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit taken along the XCVII-XCVII line in FIG. 83. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit taken along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 97. (a) is a front view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit, (b) is a back view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit, and (c) is a top view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of specific winning a prize mouth unit 950. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning a prize mouth unit along the CII-CII line of FIG. 99(c). (a) and (b) are perspective front views of a specific winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of the specific winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the specific winning a prize mouth unit taken along the line CIVb-CIVb of FIG. 104(a). (a) is a top view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit and a drive unit, (b) is a side view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit and a drive unit. (a) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 105(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIb-CVIb line in FIG. 106(a). It is a sectional view of a drive unit. (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is a front view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a side view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. (a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit in range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). (a) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit. (a) is a front view of the replacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit. (a) is a sectional view of the replacement unit taken along the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line in FIG. 117(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the replacement unit taken along the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line in FIG. 118(a). 82 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line CXIX-CXIX in FIG. 81. FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). It is a back view of a front unit and a displacement member in an 8th embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a drive unit in a ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a drive unit and a displacement member in a tenth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective back view of a back base and a displacement member in an 11th embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. It is an exploded perspective back view of a back base and a displacement member in a 12th embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. (a) is a rear view of the front unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line CXXIXb-CXXIXb in FIG. 129(a). (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the CXXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 130(a). (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the CXXXIb-CXXXIb line of FIG. 131(a). (a) is a side view of a drive unit in a 15th embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the seventeenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic rear view of the winning opening unit in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 135(a). (a) is a schematic diagram of the winning opening unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). (a) is a schematic diagram of the winning opening unit viewed from the back, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137(a).

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 1 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 2. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize winning machine. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 76 formed of The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (top left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode by the lighting state, or indicate whether it is in the variable mode by the lighting state. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 1, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is in a gaming state where the probability is not changing or the time is being shortened (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is opened is changed, and it is longer than during the normal period. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in an open state (open state), the access to the second prize opening 140 is different from when the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, one winning The first electric accessory 140a may be opened more often than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and the first electric accessory At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is released, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are released with one win. It may be possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol to be increased compared to the normal one without changing the number of times the second symbol is played.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 66 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second winning hole can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a per win, etc. 140 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize opening 140. This first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a It becomes an open state (enlarged state) and becomes a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving period, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change or time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 140 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning hole 140, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state. Since the ball is easy to hit, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R jackpot by opening the first electric accessory 140a and winning the second prize opening 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment allows the player to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 so as to represent the symbol. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, for example, It may also be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Ru. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 481, 491, 661, and 880, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control device 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and also controls the payout control device 111 to issue a payout initialization command to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. Moreover, FIGS. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In addition, in FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485 of the displacement unit 400, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the retracted position, whereas in FIG. 8, the slide unit The left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protrusion member 485 of 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are shown respectively displaced to the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are installed in the internal space of the back case 300, respectively. They are accommodated in order.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and having a picture frame shape when viewed from the front, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R and a right displacement member 420R disposed on the base member 410 so as to be displaceable. The left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protrusion member 485 are retracted to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (i.e., the third symbol display device 81) can be displaced between the projecting position projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) that drive the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485), By selecting the driving means to drive, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied (forming a plurality of types of displacement modes). Details of this structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape in front view disposed in front of the displacement unit 400, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and a projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner circumferential side of the base member 610. It includes a plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display on the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, and when light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is reflected into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

In this case, the projection unit 600 adopts a structure that increases the efficiency of the light emitted from the LED 651 entering the projection plate member 620, and intensifies the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns or designs). can be brought to light clearly). Further, a structure is adopted that increases workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610. Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 disposed at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. The other end of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between a retracted position above the opening 301a of the back case 300 (i.e., the third symbol display device 81) and an extended position extending toward the front side. Yes (see Figures 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a biasing spring SP that biases the displacement member 850, and at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the biasing spring SP By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) around the balance position (predetermined position) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

Next, the displacement unit 400 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and displacement members (a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420L and member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) that apply driving force to the displacement member, and as described above, the lower drive mechanism When displacing the displacement member by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when displacing the displacement member by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when displacing the displacement member by driving the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is configured to be able to be displaced in different ways. The details of the structure will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R, which are formed as displacement members that perform effects by displacement. , the left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the truck member 440, the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is an elongated member disposed in a vertical position, and has a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 drilled in the upper end, and a slider drilled in the lower end. A moving groove 423 is provided. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

The length of the connecting shaft 421 is set such that the tip of the connecting shaft 421 protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L. (see FIGS. 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421, and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

The connection hole 422 is a hole with a circular cross section, and one of the two connection shafts 441 of a truck member 440, which will be described later, is rotatably inserted therethrough. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative attitude change (rotation about the axis of the connection hole 422) relative to the cart member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a drive pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L, which will be described later, is rotatably and slidably inserted therethrough. . Therefore, when only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the attitude of the left displacement member 420L relative to the base member 410 changes (rotates). can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is installed between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L and is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, and has a connecting hole 431 bored at one end (upper end). and a sliding pin 432 protruding from the back surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole with a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted therethrough. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a sliding groove 410a formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing its relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The trolley member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending in the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper part of the base member 410 (upper intermediate part 410f and upper front part 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a member that includes two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel, and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the cart member 440 as each rolling wheel 442 of the cart member 440 rolls on the rolling surface. .

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing upward in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the truck member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended and supported by the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the cart member 440.

The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide section extending along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper part of the base member 410 (upper middle part 410f and upper front part 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a long plate-shaped member, and is carved along the longitudinal direction on two connecting holes 451 into which the two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 are rotatably inserted, and on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L. A rack gear 452 is provided.

Here, the right displacement member 420R is approximately symmetrical to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R is approximately symmetrical to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R is approximately symmetrical to the upper left rack 450L. Since they have substantially the same configuration, the same parts are given the same reference numerals and their explanation will be omitted.

However, the upper right rack 450R has a rack gear 452 engraved on the front thereof. Further, the upper right rack 450R has a portion where the connecting hole 451 is formed offset toward the front side, and is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction than the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. In this case, a pinion gear 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410 is meshed with both rack gears 452 .

Therefore, along with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slides) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Since the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (i.e., 1), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are The directions of displacement can be opposite directions (directions toward or away from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 may be an even number, and the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R may be displaced in the same direction.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Moreover, illustration of the raised cover 413 is omitted in FIGS. 13 to 16.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a drive mechanism in which the pinion gear 482 is meshed. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protrusion member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the back of the protrusion member 485, and the rack gear 486. It mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) to which the leading gear 487a is meshed, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R which are meshed to the tail gear 487e of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 that protrudes from the back of the left front cover 411L. Ru. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

The drive gear 483 includes an eccentric pin 483a located eccentrically from its rotation center and protruding from the back surface. The drive arm 484 has a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted. It includes a driving pin 484c that projects from the front at the end opposite to the side where the supporting hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484 is rotated from the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction about the pivot hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The protruding member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a into which the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is disposed in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescoping linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical position with its expansion and contraction direction along the vertical direction. Note that the slide rail SL is a base end rail disposed on the front side of the base member 410, a distal end rail disposed on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a base end rail disposed between the base end rail and the distal end rail. It includes an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protrusion member 485 is pushed up or down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded or contracted, and the protrusion member 485 is moved to the base. The member 410 is raised and lowered in the vertical direction.

The rack gear 486 is carved along the ascending and descending direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is arranged on the front and right front of the base member 410, with the leading gear 487a meshing with the rack gear 486. They are each rotatably supported between the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by raising and lowering the protruding member 485, the linear motion of the rack gear 486 can be used to rotate the gear train (gears 487a to 487e).

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and include a rack gear 488a carved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction, and a drive pin 488b protruding from the front at the longitudinal end. and are provided respectively. These lower left rack 488L and lower right rack 488R are located at different positions in the vertical direction, with their rack gears 488a facing each other, and between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412 in the left-right direction (width direction). , the left-right direction in FIG. 19).

The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the back side through an opening 410b drilled in the base member 410, so that the gear 487e at the end of the gear train is attached to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. It is meshed with each rack gear 488a of rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is rotated as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gear 487a at the end causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to be mutually moved. They can be linearly moved in opposite directions (towards each other or away from each other).

The drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are projected to the front side through the linear insertion grooves 410c formed in the base member 410, so that the left displacement member 420L can be moved as described above. and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In addition, the extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the truck member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of linear movement of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is approximately parallel to the direction of linear movement of the upper left rack 450L and upper right rack 450R, which will be described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 17 and 18, for easy understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are illustrated between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a drive mechanism in which the pinion gear 492 is meshed. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

The base member 410 has a divided structure in which the upper part (the upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape when viewed from the front) is formed by overlapping an upper rear part 410e, an upper intermediate part 410f, and a front part 410g in order on the front side. be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f, and a pinion gear is attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 that protrudes from the back surface of the projecting portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a located eccentrically from its rotation center and protruding from the back surface. The drive arm 494 has a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and A linear drive groove 494c is provided at an end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494 is rotated from the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction about the pivot hole 494a, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced from side to side.

As described above, the distal end of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating around the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c, which is displaced from side to side, to act on the connecting shaft 421, the bogie member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced from side to side.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced left and right and the trolley member 440 (rolling wheels 442) rolls on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L is moved to the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. The right displacement member 420R can be displaced. Note that the rolling surfaces on which the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440 roll are formed in the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protrusion member 485). The first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are rear views of the displacement unit 400 in FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. FIG.

Note that FIGS. 19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 correspond to the left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R. This corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is placed in the extended position in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed at the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed at the outermost position (the position where they are furthest apart from each other in the left-right direction), and A protruding member 485 is arranged at the lowest position.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are respectively driven from this state, the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 is reached after passing through the state shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. To the state (the extended position in the first aspect), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protrusion member 485 is raised. In addition, in the extended position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protrusion member 485 are in a combined state (the side surfaces of the three are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state shown in FIG. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the protruding member 485, the protruding member 485 is raised (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Furthermore, when the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e), and the rack gear 488a (FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surfaces of the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction in which they approach each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is 421. As a result, the cart member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). (see 18).

Further, when the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side of the left displacement member 420R is The upper end side (truck member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In this embodiment, the displacement amount of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is such that the displacement amount on the lower end side is smaller than the displacement amount on the upper end side ( That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is made shorter than the movable range of the truck member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20) at the same time, and the extended position in the first mode ( The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so that the position (see FIGS. 23 and 24) is reached substantially simultaneously. That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (carriage member 440) is made faster than on the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

Thereby, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotation while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the displacement member while rotating the posture in this manner with a configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the first drive means. This is the first time that it has become possible to use a drive means for this purpose.

Furthermore, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (the truck member 440) is different from that on the lower end side (the driving pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the truck member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the driving pin 488b, changes in the distance between the two can be absorbed. That is, there is no need to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b can be formed to be rotatable and slidable, which reduces product cost and improves operational reliability and durability. be able to.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are respectively driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the state shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 After passing through the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 (retracted position), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction in which they are separated from each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protruding member 485 is lowered.

Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in a non-driven state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, A second mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In addition, in the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25. Note that FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the extended position in the second embodiment.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (disposed at the retracted position), the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is rotated by the left displacement member 420L on its upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422). It is placed in an orientation that allows rotation around the center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pin of the drive arm 484 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485, the protruding member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced (linearly moved) in a direction in which they approach each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated about their upper ends (the axis of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in a non-driven state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and A third mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In addition, in the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27. Note that FIGS. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the extended position in the third embodiment.

Here, the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are elongated holes extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b. Member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (disposed at the retracted position), as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the drive arm The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 is acted on by the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. In addition, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, thereby displacing the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R in the direction of approaching the left displacement member 420L. (linear motion).

That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated about their lower ends (sliding groove 423 side) as rotation centers. Further, in the third aspect, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protrusion member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

Here, in the conventional game machine, a guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended to the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one type. Therefore, the performance based on the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, making it difficult to perform a performance that surprises the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, a driving motor) is changed by increasing or decreasing the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and its displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to perform a performance that surprises the player.

In contrast, the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment includes a lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and an upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), and selects (changes) the drive state thereof. As a result, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protrusion member 485) can be displaced in three types of modes (first mode, second mode, and third mode). That is, unlike conventional products in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one type, the effect does not become one pattern, but the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so such displacement modes can be switched. By doing so, it is possible to perform a performance that surprises the player.

In particular, in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can perform displacements in which parallel movement (linear movement) is dominant, while in the second aspect In the third aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational movement), and the movement form of the displacement can be different. can be set. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, making it easier to perform performances that surprise the player.

In this case, there are conventional products in which the center of rotation remains constant and only the direction of rotation is changed to change the displacement mode, but the second and third embodiments of this embodiment , they do not have the same center of rotation but only different directions of rotation, but the directions of rotation are different and the centers of rotation are also formed differently (in the second embodiment, the upper end side is the center of rotation, and in the third embodiment, the center of rotation is different). In this case, the lower end side is the center of rotation), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform surprising effects.

Furthermore, in the first aspect, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form that combines rotation and parallel movement (linear motion), but the direction of such rotation is the third aspect. The direction of rotation is the same as the direction of rotation in . Therefore, in the initial stages of the first aspect and the third aspect (for example, see FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually see that the displacement members are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other, and the player can distinguish between the displacement members. It can be made difficult to hit. On the other hand, in the first aspect, the protruding member 485 is raised as the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction in which they approach each other, whereas in the third aspect, the protruding member 485 is stopped. can be maintained in the same condition. That is, in the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other, if the protrusion member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the extended position in the first mode. It is possible to make the player expect that.

In the displacement unit 400, a cart member 440, a lower left rack 488L, and a lower right rack 488R are disposed (held) on a base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the cart member 440 is provided with a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R. The upper ends (connection holes 422) are rotatably connected, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are connected to the lower ends (sliding grooves 423) of the left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R. Rotatably and slidably inserted.

As a result, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform linear motion (first aspect) or rotational motion (second and third aspects) including a rotational component is provided. can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove, but if the displacement member is to be slid along such a curved trajectory, a complicated structure is required ( That is, if the locus is curved, not only the mechanism for guiding the members corresponding to the truck member 440, the members corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also the respective members 440, It becomes necessary to provide a mechanism that can continuously apply driving force to 488L and 488R).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is sufficient to guide the cart member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R in the linear direction, and therefore the cart member 440 may be guided by the rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize a rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve durability and operational reliability.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in all of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect, and specifically, , one end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by the trolley member 440 rolling on a rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack. 488R is guided by sliding (linear movement) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, there is no need to provide different guide mechanisms depending on each aspect, and therefore there is no need to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, operational reliability and durability can be improved, and product costs can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape when viewed from the front, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610. A plurality of irradiation units 650 disposed surrounding the outer circumferential side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a drive force of the drive motor 661 for transmitting the driving force to the projection plate member 620. A gear train (gears 662 to 664) is mainly provided.

The base member 610 includes an annular back base 611 and an annular front base 612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the inner space.

Note that the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player in an area inside the inner periphery of the front base 612 (hereinafter referred to as the "display area") when viewed from the front, and in an area outside the inner periphery of the front base 612. (That is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter referred to as "outside the display area"), the projection plate member 620 is made invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material and allows the player to view the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side through the projection plate member 620, and also allows the player to see the display that is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or design, and is visible to the player. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620 on the back side and the front side, respectively. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

A plurality of teeth are carved along the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630, and a gear 664 at the end of the gear train meshes with the gear member 630. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a circumferentially continuous guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section between the projection plate member 620 and a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. C is guided by the guide groove 641, so that the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610. Note that detailed configurations of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit that includes a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for inputting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposed to the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (five in this embodiment) are arranged in different postures. Specifically, in this embodiment, the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 is set to pass approximately through the center of the projection plate member 620. Note that details of the structure for attaching the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is disposed on the back side of the back base 611, and a gear 662 at the head of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. Furthermore, a gear member 630 disposed on the projection plate member 620 meshes with a gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, a holding structure for the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a front view of the rear base 611. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back base 611 includes an inner upright portion 611a that stands up on the inner edge of the annular plate member, and an outer upright portion 611a that stands up on the outer edge of the annular plate member. The intermediate standing portion 611b is erected from between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611c, and the inner groove in the area surrounded by the inner erected portion 611b and the inner erected portion 611a. 611d, an outer concave portion 611e in a region surrounded by an inner upright portion 611b and an outer upright portion 611c, and a regulating protrusion 611f protruding from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner upright portion 611a stands upright from the inner edge of the annular plate member on the front side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 33), and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer standing portion 611c stands upright from the outer edge of the annular plate member on the front side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 33), and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate erected portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is formed into seven parts around the axis, and each divided end is connected to the outer standing part 611c.

The inner groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge of a projection plate member 620, which will be described later, inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner upright portion 611a, and the intermediate upright portion 611b in three directions. It is formed by

The outer groove 611e is a region for arranging an irradiation unit 650 (to be described later) inside, and is formed by being surrounded in three directions by an annular plate member, an outer standing portion 611c, and an intermediate standing portion 611b. Ru.

The regulating protrusion 611f is a protrusion that suppresses the collar C, which is pivotally supported on the front base 612, from wobbling toward the back side, and is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of a hole opened in the axis of the collar C. At the same time, it is formed to protrude from the front side. In addition, in this embodiment, the regulating protrusions 611f are formed at six locations at predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, there are inner upright portions corresponding to the inner upright portion 611a, the intermediate upright portion 611b, the outer upright portion 611c, and the regulating protrusion 611f of the back base 611. An erected portion 612a, an intermediate erected portion 612b, an outer erected portion 612c, and a shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the assembled state of the base member 610, the upright end faces of the upright parts 612a to 612c of the front base 612 overlap with the upright end faces of the upright parts 611a to 611c of the rear base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the regulating protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the back surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pins 612g are shafts with a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 is a unit that includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and allows the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. will be placed. That is, the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650 on its outer peripheral side.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the back base 611 is superimposed on the back surface of the front base 612. As a result, it is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36, the intermediate upright portion 612b of the front base 612 has a substantially semicircular notch 612b1 cut out at the end of the upright portion. Similarly, a substantially semicircular notch 611b1 is formed on the upright end side of the intermediate upright part 611b of the back base 611 at a position that is in the same phase as the notch 612b1 (Fig. 33 reference).

That is, when the upright end surfaces of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b are overlapped (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), the notch portions 611b1 and 612b2 form an opening that is substantially circular in front view. Ru. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular opening formed by the cutouts 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b, and enters the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. be done. Note that the diameter of the circular opening is set to be larger than the diameter of the light emitting part of the LED 651.

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 taken along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 38, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed into a circular plate-shaped body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a cutout portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light in a part of the outer edge.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion to facilitate placement of the collar C on the regulating protrusion 611f of the rear base 611, and is formed by cutting out a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line in a direction perpendicular to the radial direction. be done.

The reflecting portion 622 is a portion where the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and the entire area of the projection plate member 620 when viewed from the front is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a design. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is irradiated onto the reflecting section 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting section 622 and is emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the diffusely reflected light and the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, by allowing light to enter the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material with a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, is formed from a plate-shaped body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set large and arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is disposed on the back side of the projection plate member 620 (on the back side of the paper in FIG. 37), and its axis is coaxial with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 includes a tooth portion 631 carved along the outer circumferential surface, a rear surface portion 632 on the side surface on the rear side, and a rear surface portion 632 that is inclined toward the front side from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the rear surface portion 632. and an inclined surface portion 633.

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface with which the gear 664 meshes as described above, and is carved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuous from an end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined toward the front side. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is determined by the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the rear surface portion 632, and The intersection angle θ2 between the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 is set to be substantially the same (θ1=θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light-transmissive material with a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a bent approximately L-shaped cross section. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Furthermore, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface 641a on one side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, an abutment surface 641b on the other side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. It includes a front part 642 and an inclined surface part 643 that is inclined from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front part 642 to the back side.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the facing side surface of the projection plate member 620 on the front side (upper side in FIG. 38), and has a constant facing interval between the front side plane of the projection plate member 620 and the axis. formed separately.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that rotatably holds the projection plate member 620 by contacting the collar C disposed between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620, and has a cross section perpendicular to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed circularly around the axis.

Therefore, by being arranged on the projection plate member 620, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuous from an end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 and is inclined toward the back side. In addition, the angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the rear side is determined by the intersection angle θ3 between the front portion 642 and the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644. The intersection angle θ4 between the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 is set to be substantially the same (θ3=θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be explained with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39(a). 40(a) to 40(c) are partially enlarged sectional views of the projection unit 600. Note that FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c) illustrate the transition state when attaching the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. Further, FIGS. 39 and 40 illustrate a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b), when the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction is located on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 39(b) (lower side) and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (guide groove 641).

Furthermore, the distance L1 between the tip end surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface 641a of the groove forming member 640 is larger than the distance L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. is also set small (L1<L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap, the projection plate member 620 is rotated in the vertical and horizontal directions by the gap. Even if the groove forming member 640 is shifted, the contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held at the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be rotated smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c), attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 40(a), the collar C is placed on the shaft portion 612f with the projection plate member 620 placed on the front base 612.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is placed on the front base 612 by placing the groove forming member 640 inside the inner groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the distance dimension in the radial direction of the inner groove 612d is formed larger than the distance dimension in the radial direction of the groove forming member 640, and by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner groove 612d, the projection plate Member 620 can be positioned and placed.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the cutout portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f where the collar C is disposed. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the collar C can be placed on the front base 612 with the projection plate member 620 placed thereon.

Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is such that the axis of the collar C is aligned with the axis of the shaft portion 612f, and the back side (upper side in FIG. 40(a)) is placed on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 40(a)). It is performed with the person leaning towards the In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the inside of the notch 621 and the guide groove 641.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the opposite side is rotated toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(b)) about the tip of the projection C1 located inside the projection plate member 620. Thereby, the axis of the collar C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40(c), by displacing the collar C toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(c)), the tip surface of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact. It is placed in a position where the surfaces face each other. Thereafter, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be placed inside the guide groove 641.

Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of a circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are to be placed inside the groove, the rotating member must be lifted (operated) in order to place the collars. There was a problem in that the collars had to be placed and both hands were used to assemble them, resulting in poor assembly efficiency.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, so that it is not necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when placing the collar C, as described above. do not have. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the projection unit 600 assembled in this manner with the rear base 611 from the rear side.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

41(a) to 43(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. Note that in FIG. 41(b), FIG. 42(b), and FIG. 43(b), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted for ease of understanding.

In addition, in FIGS. 41(b), 42(b), and 43(b), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 is The light entering the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is illustrated in a perpendicular manner, assuming that this does not affect the invention. Furthermore, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the above-described display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is directed toward the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. The light is incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by being irradiated onto the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 620 toward the center. Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side in FIG. 41(b)).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is irradiated onto the front or back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, It is conceivable that the amount of light that enters the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side of the projection plate member 620 and travels inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed from a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, so that the projection plate member 620 has a lower refractive index. Even when the light traveling through the member 620 is irradiated onto the front or back side of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, It can be totally reflected on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of light incident from the edge of the projection plate member 620 from decreasing.

That is, when light passing through a medium with a high refractive index travels to a medium with a low refractive index, if the incident angle is increased, the light will not be incident on the medium with a low refractive index and will be totally reflected. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed into a plate-like member, and light is incident from the end face (edge) thereof, so that the incident angle of the light is made sufficiently large. Therefore, the light does not enter the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low curvature from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed from decreasing.

Similarly, regarding the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air, the refractive index of air is a value (refractive index 1) that is sufficiently smaller than the amount of transparent material. The light does not enter the air (atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed from decreasing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and can be allowed to travel toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other), the light that has been reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be made to enter the projection plate member 620 side. .

That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is in a state adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel, similar to the light at the irradiation angle α. Note that the reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the emitted light from the LED 651. can.

That is, the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651 not only enters from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated to the groove forming member 640 can enter from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting part 622 of the projection plate member 620, so that the light reflected by the reflecting part 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. By increasing the amount of , patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult to see from the player, and the appearance is accordingly reduced. Deterioration can be suppressed.

Here, the light that enters the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is smaller than the light that enters the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. Since the position of the groove forming member 640 is shifted from the position of the groove forming member 640, the incident angle of the light when the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is irradiated becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to completely reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on the inner side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected. The above-mentioned state (a state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle β and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed so that its intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the front portion 642 and the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 (FIG. 38 ), after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 644, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light at the irradiation angle β can be directed to the projection plate member. The area reflected to the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected at the outer edge of the groove forming member 640 and can be easily made to enter the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and is allowed to travel toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other), the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be made to enter the projection plate member 620.

That is, in a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, since the gear member 630 is formed from a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, irradiation is prevented. The projected light can be made incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light that is incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620, similar to the light at the irradiation angle α, and is caused to proceed toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. Note that the reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light from the light source A emitted at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

That is, the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651 not only enters the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated to the gear member 630 can enter from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting section 622 of the projection plate member 620, thereby reducing the amount of light reflected at the reflecting section and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. By increasing the number of images, patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the gear member 630 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance deteriorates accordingly. can be restrained from doing so.

Further, compared to the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is smaller than the light incident on the gear member 630 when the gear member 630 is connected to the light source A in the back direction (downward in FIG. 43(a)). The incident angle when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is made smaller as the position is shifted. This makes it difficult to completely reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on its side surfaces, but at least a portion of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, resulting in the above-mentioned state. (a state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed so that its intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38 ), after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 634, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted at the irradiation angle γ can be The area of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected at the outer edge of the gear member 630 and can be easily made to enter the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the efficiency of collecting light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the attachment structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

44(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44(b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). Further, FIG. 45(a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 as seen in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 45(b) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 as seen along the FIG. Note that FIGS. 44 and 45 illustrate a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (in this embodiment, two each) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are provided.

The substrate member 652 is formed from an elastically deformable material into a horizontally long belt shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LEDs 651 are light emitting means that emit light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along the left-right direction (FIG. 44(b)).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and the two first blocks 653 are arranged on the longitudinal center side of the substrate member 652. At the same time, second blocks 654 are arranged on both sides of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed from a resin material in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and have higher rigidity (characteristic of being less likely to be elastically deformed) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, when it is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be explained with reference to FIG. 46.

46(a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46(b) is a sectional view of the first block 653 taken along the line XLVIb-XLVIb in FIG. 46(a). Further, FIG. 46(c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46(d) is a sectional view of the second block 654 taken along the line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c).

The first block 653 is connected to the front side (FIG. 46(a), paper surface It is shaped like a box with an open front side.

A fastening hole h is recessed in the front end surface of the opposing side wall part 653b (standing upright from the short side of the bottom wall part 653a) among the four side wall parts 653b, and the screw S1 can be fastened thereto. It is said that Further, side wall portions 653b other than the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected by a connecting wall 653c, and a protrusion 653c1 is provided protruding from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

The second block 654 is formed from a bottom wall portion 654a that is rectangular in front view, and a side wall portion 654b that stands upright from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side (FIG. 46(c), this side of the page). It is shaped like a box with open sides). An opening 654a1, which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the bottom wall portion 654a, through which an electrical connection line can be inserted.

A fastening hole h is recessed in the front end surface of the side wall part 654b, which stands up from the short side of the bottom wall part 654a of the four side wall parts 654b, so that a screw S1 can be fastened thereto. Further, the side walls 653b standing from the long sides of the bottom wall 654a are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c has a fastening hole h recessed in its front end surface, and a screw S1 can be concluded.

In the first block 653 and the second block 654, insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are bored at two places in each of the side wall parts 653b and 654b that stand up from the long sides of the bottom wall parts 653a and 654a (Fig. 45 (a) and FIG. 46(b)). The holding pin 612g of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. This makes it possible to position the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and to hold them at these positions.

Note that the first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(a)) (i.e., a virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h). , and is formed in a shape that is symmetrical with respect to a second imaginary plane that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 46(a)) and is perpendicular to the first imaginary plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two first blocks 653 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the first block 653 can be shared, reducing the number of parts and reducing product cost. I can do it. Furthermore, when assembling the first block 653 to the board member 620, the first block 653 does not have vertical or longitudinal directionality with respect to the board member 620, which improves workability during assembly work. can be achieved.

Similarly, the second block 654 is connected to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(c)) (i.e., a virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h). It is formed into a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two second blocks 654 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the second block 654 can be shared, reducing the number of parts and reducing product cost. I can do it. Furthermore, when assembling the second block 654 to the board member 620, since the second block 654 does not have vertical directionality with respect to the board member 620, workability during assembly work can be improved. I can do it.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 44 and 45. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652, with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and with a predetermined interval between adjacent blocks. Ru.

Specifically, the first block 653 and the second block 654 have their front surfaces overlapped with the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole drilled in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 to the front side.

On the board member 652, only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front side, and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back side of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with an open front, and are arranged with the open side overlapping the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 653 and 654 are provided with a recess on the side that is superimposed (arranged) on the board member 652, electronic components and connectors mounted on the board member 652 are placed in the recess (inner space). can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and connectors can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to suppress damage to the electronic components and connectors caused by contact with surrounding displacing members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can.

Further, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, since such a circuit can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) due to contact with surrounding displacing members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can. In addition, since the portion of the substrate member 652 where both blocks 653 and 654 are not provided is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape convex toward the back side (see FIG. 34), the circuit can be projected accordingly. It can be spaced apart from the plate member 620. Thereby, damage to the circuit (disconnection) can be suppressed even in areas where both blocks 653 and 654 are not provided.

A method for installing (assembling) the irradiation unit 650 configured in this manner on the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 in an area between the intermediate upright portion 611b and the outer upright portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, each of the holding pins 612g erected from the back surface of the front base 612 is inserted into each of the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. .

As a result, both blocks 653 and 654 (i.e., the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the installation position of the irradiation unit 650 (i.e., the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34 reference). Thereafter, the front surface of the rear base 611 is superimposed on the rear surface of the front base 612, so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed (assembled) on the base member 610.

In this embodiment, when the irradiation unit 650 is disposed on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are disposed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer circumferential side of the projection plate member 620, as described above. In other words, not only the circumferential spacing between the LEDs 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential spacing between the LEDs 651 in that one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to that one irradiation unit 650 are the same as the others. be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 allows the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of LEDs 651, the arrangement (attachment) of each LED 651 is such that the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 is adjusted to face the center of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 is arranged respectively. It is necessary to do so, which increases the time and effort of the installation work.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on a board member 652 that is formed to be elastically deformable, so one board member 652 (irradiation unit 650) By arranging (attaching) the LEDs 651 to the front base 612 (base member 610), the installation work of a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the effort required to arrange the LED 651 can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, by inserting the holding pins 612g of the back base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the board member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, and the LED 651 can be held in a predetermined posture. The direction of the irradiation surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, there is no need to individually adjust the irradiation surfaces of a plurality of LEDs 651 and assemble them to the back base 612, and each LED 651 can be assembled by simply inserting the holding pin 612g into the insertion holes 653b1, 654b1 of both blocks 653, 654. Since the attitude (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), the effort required to arrange (install) the LED 651 can also be reduced from this point of view.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the rear base 612, vibrations etc. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture by suppressing the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 due to external force input, or by correcting the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 itself. As a result, the attitude of each LED 651 is suppressed from being affected by warpage or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in a region of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the region surrounded by the four side walls 653b and 654b in front view). will be established. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and deflection of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external forces such as vibrations, or it is possible to easily correct the warpage and deflection of the substrate member 652 itself, so that the posture of the substrate member 652 can be adjusted to a desired posture. It can be easily defined. As a result, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by warping or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and that orientation can be further maintained. It's easy to do.

Further, each LED 651 is mounted on the front side of the board member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the board member 652, so that the board member 652 is The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while achieving the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (left-right direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer circumferential side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, one of the two fastening holes h of the second block 654 is formed in the connecting wall 654c, so that the longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 is can be shortened. Further, the second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 with the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed facing the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are located at both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, ensuring uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620, while ensuring the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620. ) can be shortened to provide a space between adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be disposed using this space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily brought close to each other.

On the other hand, since the first block 653 has two fastening holes h formed in the connecting wall 654c, the distance between the fastening holes h and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position where the board member 652 is fastened and fixed to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LED 651 to be affected by the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration, and it is possible to easily correct the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652 itself especially in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the attitude of each LED 651 from being affected by warping or bending of the substrate member 652, so that the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. It's easy to do.

In this case, in the first block 653, since the distance between the two fastening holes h becomes large, there is a possibility that the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the two fastening holes h becomes weak. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall parts 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed, and a protrusion 653c1 protruding from the connecting wall 653c is inserted through a hole formed in the substrate member 652. Insert it into the hole. Therefore, due to the engagement between the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and deflection of the board member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warpage and bending of the board member 652 itself. The attitude of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined to a desired attitude. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1, and the number of parts can be reduced, so the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction. It can be made easier to maintain.

Note that both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction (outermost in the longitudinal direction, left end and right end in FIG. 45(b)) are free ends (that is, not restrained by the second block 654). There is a possibility that the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a first block 653 and a second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the arc center is located on the front side. ) (see FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the back surface of both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a back base 830 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front base 820 stacked on the front side of the back base 830, and a front base 820 stacked on the back side of the back base 830. A drive motor 880 arranged, a displacement member 850 that is rotated with respect to the back base 830 and front base 820 by the drive force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is disposed in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

The rear base 830 has an opening 831 formed in a size that allows the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 to be inserted therethrough, and an opening 831 that protrudes from the respective axes of the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes formed shaft portions 832 and 833, and a back side regulating portion 834 that projects toward the front side and extends in a curved shape.

A shaft portion of a drive motor 880 attached to the back side of the back base 830 is inserted through the opening 831 . Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 disposed on the front side of the rear base 830.

Furthermore, the opening 831 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. Thereby, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the back base 830. As a result, the number of work steps required to replace parts when the transmission gear 861 is damaged can be reduced.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts on which transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 to be described later are supported and rotatably held, respectively, and are formed to protrude from the rear base 830 toward the front side in a cylindrical shape.

The rear side regulating portion 834 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870, which will be described later, in the rear direction (towards the back of the paper in FIG. 47), and is provided protruding from the front side of the rear base 830, and is a projection that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870, which will be described later. It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed into a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and has a slightly larger outer shape than the rear base 830. The front base 820 includes a shaft support 821 that is recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side to the back side of the paper in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 that stands on the edge of the back side, and a side wall 822 that protrudes toward the back side. It mainly includes a protrusion 823 that protrudes from the back side, a front-side regulating part 824 that extends in a curved shape, and a bulge part 825 that protrudes from the back side.

The shaft support 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 described later is inserted, and is recessed in the lower right side of the front base 820 when viewed from the front.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap between the back base 830 and the front base 820 in which a transmission mechanism 860 and a connecting member 870, which will be described later, are arranged, and the thickness of the transmitting mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with larger dimensions than the above dimensions. Thereby, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened together, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be disposed between them in a movable state.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion that is engaged with one end side (upper side in FIG. 48) of a biasing spring SP, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes from the back side of the front base 820.

The front-side regulating portion 824 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (towards the front in the paper plane of FIG. 47), and is provided protruding from the rear side of the front base 820, and also extends along the displacement of the connecting member 870. It is extended in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall disposed laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP, which will be described later, with a predetermined distance therebetween, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the front base 820 toward the back side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, which mesh in series, so that the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is transmitted to the transmission gear 863 via the transmission gears 861 and 862. will be transmitted up to.

The transmission gear 863 has a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a projection portion 863c that projects in an arc shape centered on the shaft, and a rotational position of the tooth portion 863a. It mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting.

The tooth portion 863a is a toothing surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, and thereby allows driving force to be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863b is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870, and is protruded in a cylindrical shape toward the back side, and the shaft is arranged at a different position (eccentric position) from the rotation axis of the transmission gear 863.

The protruding portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, and is formed protrudingly on the outer edge portion of the back side of the transmission gear 863, and is formed around the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is curved into a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of a position detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and is formed by the teeth 863a of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to protrude radially outward on the side surface that is not covered.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the driving force of the rotation of the transmitting mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, and is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front, and has a shape extending in the front-rear direction at one end of the curved shape (upper end in FIG. 48). A gear-side connection hole 871 formed through the gear side, a displacement-side connection hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and an abutment formed to protrude upward from the outside of the curved portion. 873.

The gear-side connection hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connection member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connection member 870.

The displacement-side connection hole 872 is a through-hole into which a shaft portion 853 of a displacement member 850 (described later) is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for regulating the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and its tip is disposed between the opposing rear side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. be done.

In addition, the abutting portion 873 has a width dimension in the front-rear direction at the tip that is slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing rear side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, by displacing the abutment portion 873 in the gap between the rear side regulating portion 834 and the front side regulating portion 824, the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced is increased. You can prevent it from happening. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-back direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by coming into contact with the front base 820 or the back base 830.

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end of the displacement member 850 (the right end in FIG. 47), is formed into a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . Further, a shaft support 841 is formed in the cover member 840 and is recessed in a circular shape from the back side toward the front side.

The shaft support 841 is a groove that holds (spins) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting the front end of the pin member 890, and is located at a position facing the shaft support 821 of the front base 820. is formed. Thereby, the pin member 890 is disposed between the opposing shaft support 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support 841 of the cover member 840, so that falling off from the vertical displacement unit 800 can be suppressed.

The displacement member 850 is a member decorated on the front side, and one end (right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the other end (left side in FIG. 47) is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front. The displacement member 850 is formed with a shaft hole 851 into which the pin member 890 is inserted, a projection 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 which transmits the driving force of the connection member 870.

The shaft hole 851 is a through hole into which the pin member 890 is inserted, as described above, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at one end of the displacement member, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. is also formed large. Therefore, in the displacement member 850, the pin member 890 is inserted into the shaft hole 851, and the pin member 890 is disposed between the facing shaft support 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support 841 of the cover member 840. , the displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 in a rotatable state about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

The projection 852 is a projection to which the other end (lower end in FIG. 50) of the biasing spring SP is engaged, and is formed to protrude from the back side of the displacement member 850. Further, when the displacement member 850 is placed on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position that protrudes from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 toward the back side, and the protrusion distance is such that the protrusion distance is on the front side of the back base. is formed to a position that approximately coincides with the side surface of the Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the biasing spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the direction of gravity relative to the front base 820.

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870, and when the displacement member 850 is placed on the front base 820, it is located below the front base 820 (see FIG. 50). It is formed protrudingly at the lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connection member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connection member 870.

As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed from a rod-shaped metal body that is harder than the displacement member 850. This can suppress damage to the rotating shaft when force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

Furthermore, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates is determined by the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft supports 821 and 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistor can be divided into two parts, it is possible to prevent parts from being damaged due to an increase in the resistance at one location.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. FIG. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. It is.

FIG. 54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. It is. Note that in FIGS. 54 to 56, the rear base 830 is shown with the rear base 830 removed for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (left side in FIG. 52) is placed upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is placed upward, A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is placed in an upwardly suspended posture.

In addition, in the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b connects the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870. The straight line is placed on the same straight line.

Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can create a state (ie, dead center) in which no force component is generated in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is placed in the first position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member 850 and improve durability.

From the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880, the drive motor 880 is rotationally driven, and each transmission gear 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated. The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed down as the shaft portion 863b is rotated. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 (lower side in FIGS. 54 and 55) pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

In this case, as the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the connection member 870 are displaced. The straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 is in a state of tolerance. Therefore, the state in which the displacement member 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 (ie, the dead center) can be released. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 begins to rotate in the rotational direction that displaces the displacement member 850 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 54), the force that pulls the gear-side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780 due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 is reduced. , can be applied in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 rotates. As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 during displacement from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (i.e., the state located at the dead center), power is supplied to the drive motor 880. Explain what happens when you turn it off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the transmission gear 863 At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connection hole 871 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 are approximately perpendicular, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP occur. It is assumed that the forces are balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position described later, by turning off the power supply to the drive motor 880, the displacement member 850 is moved around the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be caused to perform reciprocating displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be made into an orthogonal projection of a uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connection member 870, the displacement described above (orthogonal projection motion of uniform circular motion) is different. In this manner, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, by simply turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, variations in displacement can be increased, and the structure and control can be improved. Since there is no need for complexity, product costs can be reduced and reliability can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotated about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force to the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is released, and the effect of gravity on the displacement member 850 is removed. When the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement due to the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP, the displacement of the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to linear movement in the vertical direction. The displacement can also be a combination of rotational motion about the shaft hole 851 as the rotation center. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be displaced in an interesting manner.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) as the displacement member 850 is displaced, and rotates the transmission gear 863. Since the attitude of 863 is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotary member among the push and pull directions. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocated, the amount of resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connection member 870 can be changed. As a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be varied, and the displacement member can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 are Since the straight line connecting the axes is approximately perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axes of the gear side connecting hole 871 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, the force in the pushing and pulling direction is The magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the balance position (intermediate position), and the force component can be decreased in either direction of push or pull from the balance position. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocated, the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed approximately symmetrically around the balanced position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 is This makes it easier to continue.

From the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is moved further downward. is displaced. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed down as the shaft portion 863b is rotated. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (left side in FIG. 53) is placed in the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is placed downward. , a connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed below. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is disposed downward, so that the displacement member 850 can be pushed downward.

In addition, in the second position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863, the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side connection of the connection member 870. The straight line connecting the axes of the hole 872 is arranged at the same straight line length.

Therefore, in the second position, the displacement member 850 can create a state (ie, a dead center) in which no force component is generated in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is placed at the second position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member 850 and improve durability.

Next, referring to FIG. 57, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described. 57(a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first position, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the transmitting gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the intermediate position. (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. Note that in FIGS. 57(a) to 57(c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the coupling member 870) is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), in the first position, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is disposed at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the back base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, so that the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the back base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, the displacement member 850 is preferably placed in a stopped state in order to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player by disposing the displacement member 850 upward. However, by increasing the resistance for driving the displacement member 850, it is possible to easily maintain the stopped state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 57(c), a state in which power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated beyond a certain level (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is In the state in which the driving range θ6 is being driven, the connecting member 870 and the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated beyond a certain level, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the transmitting gear 863 and the rear base 830 can be increased, so that the resistance when displacing the connecting member 870 can be increased. can be made smaller.

Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace the displacement member 850 in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time. , the displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(c), in the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

Here, when displacing a vertically displacing displaceable member downward and stopping it, the gravity of the displacing member is added to the inertia force at the time of stopping, so the problem is that the displacing member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863. The force when stopping the transmission gear 863 is divided into two forces: the force that is stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863, and the force that is stopped when the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (drive of the drive motor 880) is stopped. can be dispersed into As a result, the displacement member 850 that has been displaced from the first position to the second position can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described. 58(a) to 58(c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. Note that FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c) illustrate transition states from the first position. Further, in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the coupling member 870) is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced through the first drive range θ5, the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced from the first position to the second position. The portion where the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced as the position changes.

Therefore, when rotating the transmission gear 863 from the first position, the resistance to displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced as the displacement member 850 is displaced, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Furthermore, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacing member 850 can be increased while displacing the displacing member 850 to the first position, which is the retracted position. When the displacement member 850 is moved to a certain position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be quickly brought to a stopped state.

That is, when displacing and stopping the displacement member 850, it is difficult to quickly establish a stopped state due to the inertia force that stops the operation, but since the resistance of the displacement member 850 when stopping can be increased, the stopped state can be quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced through the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not disposed at opposing positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance to displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the extending operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

In addition, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement about the intermediate position (balanced position), the protrusion The generation of resistance due to the portion 863c can be avoided, and the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed smoothly.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c). 59(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is located between the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830. will be placed in

That is, the front side regulating part 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating part 834 of the back base 830 are formed into a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the abutting part 873 of the connecting member 870. This restricts displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction.

Here, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state where the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872, so that the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are tilted in the front-back direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 due to the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there was a problem in that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 was deformed.

On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from tilting in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59(c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830 is at a position facing the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be set to a state where it is not located.

Thereby, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 and the front base 820 and the rear base 830 at the second position can be increased. As a result, the resistance when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position can be reduced, making it easier to displace the displacement member 850 from the second position.

Further, in the vertical displacement unit 800, the contact portion 873 is located approximately on a straight line connecting the axis of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axis of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870, and It is disposed on the opposite side to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 across the axis of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 shakes with respect to the front base 820 and the rear base 830, the abutting portion 873 of the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the front base 820 and the rear base 830, thereby preventing the shaft of the transmission gear 863. The inclination of the portion 863b and the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620 was set smaller than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620 was set smaller than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. The outer diameter dimensions are set to be the same as those of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640.

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

60(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, gear member 630, and groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60(b) is a projection taken along the line LXb-LXb in FIG. 60(a). FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 2640.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 2620 on the back side and the front side, respectively. The projection plate member 2620 is formed into a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and its outer diameter is the same as the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. Further, the projection plate member 2620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light in a part of the outer edge.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material with a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. A guide groove 2641 is provided. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 60(b)) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Furthermore, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and is formed to have a concave width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide groove 2641.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. Note that in FIG. 61(b), FIG. 62(b), and FIG. 63(b), cross-sectional lines are omitted for ease of understanding.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 61(b), 62(b), and 63(b), light from light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The angle of refraction at this time is assumed to have no effect on the present invention, and the light entering the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is illustrated in a state in which the light is orthogonal. Furthermore, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, similar to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is directed toward the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. The light is incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by being irradiated onto the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 2620 toward the center (axis). Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

Note that in this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger external dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge of the projection plate member 2620 can be placed near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

As shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, irradiation irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side in FIG. 62(a)) from the guide groove 641. The light at the angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light irradiated within the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axis of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, similarly to the first embodiment, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other), the light irradiated onto the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is transferred to the projection plate member 2620. It can be made to enter.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the groove forming member 2640 on the back side of the guide groove 641 (lower side in FIG. 62(a)) is irradiated with light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651. The light having the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the edge of the groove forming member 2640 on the back side.

The light irradiated within the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated onto the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and is reflected. The reflected light can be made to enter the projection plate member 2620 by being irradiated onto the side surface at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing each other).

That is, by recessing the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light that enters the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 can be directed to the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and made incident on the projection plate member 2620.

Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 in a recessed manner on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, it can serve both the role of holding the color C and the role of concentrating light on the projection plate member 2620. .

Furthermore, compared to the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) that enters the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the addition of the irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the LED 651. .

Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult to see from the player, and the appearance is accordingly reduced. Deterioration can be suppressed.

Note that among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, the light irradiating the gear member 630 is the same as that in the first embodiment, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. In the first embodiment, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are in contact with the ground over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620, but the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are , a surface floating relative to the projection plate member 3620 is formed.

First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, gear member 3630, and groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) is a projection on the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630, and a groove forming member 640.

65(a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, gear member 3630, and groove forming member 640 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and FIG. 65(c) is a sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 taken along the line LXVb-LXVb, and FIG. and a sectional view of a groove forming member 640.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed into a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 3620 on the back side and the front side. placed on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 that protrudes toward the front side and the back side is formed on the outer edge thereof.

The protrusion 3623 has a substantially triangular cross section that protrudes toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64(b)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) toward the outer edge. Further, the tip of the protrusion 3623 protruding toward the front side is set on the line of an imaginary line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of a groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640, which will be described later. be done. On the other hand, the tip of the protrusion 3623 protruding toward the back side is set on an imaginary line G connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of a groove 3635 formed in a gear member 3630, which will be described later. Ru.

The gear member 3630 is formed into a plate-shaped body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 3630 also has grooves 3635 recessed in the front side (upper side of FIG. 64(b)) at predetermined intervals, and screws formed through the gear member 3635 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A stopper hole 636 is provided.

The groove 3635 is a groove extending in the radial direction, and is formed on both sides of the circumference of each stopper hole 636. Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is placed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64(b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed into a plate-shaped body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 has grooves 3645 recessed at a predetermined interval on the side surface of the back side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) and penetratingly formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. An opening 646 for screwing is provided.

The groove 3645 is a groove extending in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thereby, when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

In this case, the surface where the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are in contact with the ground has an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is inserted, as shown in FIG. The surfaces overlap in the radial direction. Thereby, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress the holding force from decreasing. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to ground the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described.

66(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. Note that in FIG. 66(b), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted for ease of understanding.

In addition, in FIG. 66(b), similarly to the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 has no effect on the present invention. The light entering the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown to be orthogonal. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is emitted from the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by being irradiated onto the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center (axis side). Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is diffusely reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, so that the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is transmitted to the reflecting portion 622. can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can easily reach the reflection part 622, so the light reflected by the reflection part 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened, and the pattern It is possible to make the design stand out clearly.

On the other hand, light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640, the gear member 3630, and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is The light is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the above configuration.

Therefore, by making the light from the light source other than light source A of the LED 651 projected onto the projection plate member 3620 side enter the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light from the light source other than light source A is projected onto the projection plate member 3620. can be suppressed from being incident. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the display made on the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from appearing (displayed) by light other than the LED 651.

Furthermore, as described above, the ground plane of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A part where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, the light that is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 can be reliably suppressed from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

Furthermore, in this case, the ground plane of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction, so the ground plane can be secured and the Displacement of the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 with respect to the plate member 3620 can be suppressed.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light from the LED 651 is passed through the gap toward the axis of the projection plate member 3620. There was a risk that light would leak from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed on the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 is transmitted between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not illuminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress light from leaking from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

Furthermore, since the protrusion 3623 can increase the length of the side surface of the edge of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66(a)), the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the LED 651. .

Next, the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67(b) is a sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. 68(a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 near the first block 653, and FIG. 68(b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 near the second block 654. Note that FIG. 67(b) corresponds to FIG. 44(b). Further, FIG. 68 schematically shows a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is disposed on the base member 610.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 with screws S2. In this case, the height of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height of the LED 651. That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front of the board member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is attached to the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to that one screw S2. When the outer circumferential surface contacts (circumscribes) the projection plate member 620, the dimensions are set such that the outer circumferential surface of the projection plate member 620 cannot come into contact with the LED 651 disposed between the two screws S2.

Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, if it is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial wobbling due to dimensional tolerances or assembly tolerances, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 may be screwed. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is made of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is made of a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 shakes in the radial direction. It is possible to enhance the effect of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn out, and the projection plate member 620 may wobble in the radial direction. Also, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651.

In this way, by using the screw S2 to protect the LED 651, it is possible to omit the formation of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b. Therefore, in this case, since a complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

Further, since the LED 651 can be protected using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial wobbling due to component dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances can be made gentler, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer together, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be made to efficiently enter the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

Next, the projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the projection plate member 620 is formed into a disk shape when viewed from the front and is rotated around the center of the circle, but in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is formed into a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front. A case will be explained in which the case is formed as follows and is slid in one direction.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of a projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of projection unit 5600. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state with the back base 5611 removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 has a base member 5610 that is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front and has an open center portion, and is slidably disposed in the open portion of the base member 5610. a projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 that allows light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidingly displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 that is connected to the projection plate member. 5620 and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668).

The base member 5610 has a back base 5611 which is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and has a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center thereof, and is disposed in front of the back base 5611 and has approximately the same external shape as the back base 5611. A projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650, and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) is stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer standing portion 612c standing upright at the outer edge on the back side and an opening shaped like a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front in the center. a central opening 5612h, an inner upright portion 612a erected from the rear side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from both upper ends of the central opening 5612h; It is formed mainly of two shaft parts 5612k that protrude from between the pair of holding parts 5612i to the back side, and a sliding protrusion 5612m that protrudes from below the central opening 5612h to the back side. Ru.

The central opening 5612h has a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center of the front base 5612 when viewed from the front. The player can visually recognize the patterns and symbols on the third symbol display device 81 provided on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed to protrude from the rear side of the front base 5612 (the front side in the paper of FIG. 71) at both upper ends of the central opening 5612h. In addition, the holding portion 5612i has a concave groove 5612i1 formed on its protruding surface in a manner concave toward the front side (backward side of the paper in FIG. 71).

The groove 5612i1 is recessed from the central part of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 71) to the end side, and has an arc-shaped cross section, and the inner diameter of the groove 5612i1 is equal to the outer diameter of the rod member 5625, which will be described later. formed larger than. The pair of grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the direction dimension. Therefore, after the rod member 5625 is disposed on the inner circumferential surface of the groove 5612i1, a groove with a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is placed at a position facing the groove 5612i1 from the back side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 71). The rod member 5625 can be placed on the front base 5612 by arranging the holding part covers 5628 with the above on both ends (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion that serves as a rotation axis of a rotating member 5670, which will be described later, and is arranged above the central opening 5612h in a symmetrical position with respect to a perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of a rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape to protrude from the lower side of the central opening 5612h to the rear side. Furthermore, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to a perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is reflected into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at the lower end, and a reflecting portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is disposed below the central opening of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612h of the front base 5612), and is disposed at a position where it cannot be seen from the front side of the assembled projection unit 5600. Further, the rack 5627 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set to be longer than the dimension of the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72). Thereby, the movable range of sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

The rack 5627 has a rack gear 5627a engraved on its lower surface that meshes with the gear 5668, and a sliding groove 5627b that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). It is formed over the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627.

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the tilting of the rack 5627 when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661, and has a long opening in the left-right direction. A pair of sliding projections 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced relative to the rear base 5611, the direction of displacement is restricted, and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the back side of the projection plate member 5620, there is a cylindrical rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72), and a horizontally elongated rectangle in front view at a position facing the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 in between. A shaped front cover 5626 is provided.

The rod member 5625 is formed longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620, and is also formed shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611, so that the rod member 5625 The projection plate member 5620 is arranged to be sandwiched therebetween.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and its length in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be approximately the same as the length in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620, It is disposed on the projection plate member 5620 with a rod member 5625 sandwiched between it and the member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is provided with a groove 5626a on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620, which is recessed toward the front side (back side in the plane of the paper in FIG. 72) and recessed in the left-right direction. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is disposed, and is recessed to have a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recess dimensions in the vertical direction and the front side are set larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. be done.

Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be disposed inside the groove portion 5626a. This allows the projection plate member 5620 to be slidably disposed relative to the rod member 5625 in the axial direction of the rod member 5625.

Moreover, the rod member 5625 is arranged on the back side of the front cover 5626 rather than the front side surface. That is, since the rod member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be disposed on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion in the projection plate member 5620.

Here, if the bar member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove on the back side of the projection plate member 5620 into which the bar member 5625 is inserted. However, since the projection plate member 5620 is a member that allows the light incident therein to be emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or design, grooves are formed in the projection plate member 5620. When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel due to the reduced thickness dimension, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620, the front cover 5626 with the bar member 5625 disposed therein can be placed on the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light incident into the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to suppress the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

Furthermore, as described above, both ends of the rod member 5625 are disposed on the front base 5612 so that they cannot fall off, so the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid in the left and right direction. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be moved in the sliding direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 disposed in front of the first block is aligned with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. placed in opposing positions. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be made to enter from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the pattern or design of the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be highlighted.

Further, on the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed, a bulging portion 5612n that bulges out in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the back is formed on the back side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 toward the back side, and its raised dimension is set to be larger than the plate thickness of a rotating member 5670, which will be described later. Thereby, a rotating member 5670, which will be described later, can be disposed in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

Furthermore, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed in the irradiation unit 5600 by having the protrusion 612g inserted into the insertion hole 653b1 and being held between the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 disposed at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent into an L-shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front base 5612 with the bent portion located at the center in the left-right direction, and has an irradiation unit on one longitudinal side. A second block 654 of 650 is attached. Furthermore, a through hole 5671 is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670 in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612, it can rotate with respect to the front base 5612 around the shaft portion 5612k.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612, the irradiating unit 650 can be displaced. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653.

The rotating member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction to displace the tip portion on one side downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k. 5612. Further, a displacement regulating protrusion 5612j that protrudes toward the rear side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is disposed.

The displacement regulating protrusion 5612j is a member that regulates the downward displacement of one end side of the rotating member 5670, and its protruding tip is located rearward (on the back base 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 disposed on the front base 5612. The LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 is located on the front side (on the front base 5612 side). As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j, and the light irradiated from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 toward the projection plate member 5620 is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j. 5612j can be suppressed.

Next, the operation of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. 73(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

FIG. 75(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. Note that FIGS. 74 and 76 illustrate a state in which the back base 5611 is removed. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is simply a left-right reversal of the displacement operation from the first state to the second state, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed approximately in the left-right center of the central opening 5612h, the rotation The member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) so that one end thereof is displaced downward. Thereby, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 disposed on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be incident from the left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 74(a)) of the projection plate member 5620, and the projection plate member 5620 The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is slid to the right in the front view (right direction in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid to the right (see FIGS. 73(b) and 74(b)). ). Thereby, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the right side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h.

In this case, the front cover 5626 disposed on the front side of the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 comes into contact with the side surface of the other end of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 disposed in the sliding direction. Thereby, a rotational moment can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k serving as the rotation axis in a direction that pushes one end side upward. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 disposed on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and is moved in the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (see FIG. 74). (b) left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are substantially on the same straight line.

As a result, as the projection plate member 5620 slides, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

Furthermore, as the projection plate member 5620 slides, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed, so the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be reduced. It can be changed. That is, the mode of the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily keep players interested.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the amount of light on the projection plate member is kept constant by lighting an LED arranged at a different position in accordance with the displacement. Accordingly, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off, and as the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LED becomes more complicated, resulting in a problem that the reliability of the product decreases. Furthermore, there is a problem in that the product cost increases because the LED is disposed at a different position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the direction in which the LED 651 irradiates can be displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is displaced, so the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and the projection plate member 5620 is arranged at a different position. Since control such as turning on or off the LED 651 is not necessary, control of the LED 651 can be simplified, product reliability can be improved, and increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to irradiate light onto a displacing irradiation object (projection plate member), if a plurality of fixed irradiation objects (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiation object, the irradiation range of each irradiation object There is a problem in that a region where the amount of light is weak is created in between, and when the object to be irradiated is displaced, brightness and darkness are created, which reduces the player's interest. Here, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the problem is that the product cost increases because the number of irradiators to be arranged increases. There was a point.

However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always project stably regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the brightness and darkness of the light caused by the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby suppressing the player's interest from being lost. Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the number of LEDs 651 provided, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Furthermore, as described above, the illumination direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed by sliding the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 can be applied to the projection plate member 5620. It can be used both as a drive for sliding displacement and a drive for rotating the second block 654, making it unnecessary to newly provide a drive means for displacing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the product.

Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 and the blocks 653 and 654, which are made of an elastically deformable material, there is no need to form the second block 654 to be displaced as a separate member. Therefore, the irradiation unit 650 can be installed on the front base by connecting the wiring after arranging the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit on the front base 5612, so that the assembly process can be simplified.

On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h. Accordingly, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid and displaced to form the first state.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 on the side (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) whose one end is pushed up due to the displacement to the second state is rotated by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotation member 5670 and the front base 5612, so that the projection plate As the member 5620 slides to the center position in the left-right direction, one end of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed down and rotated about the shaft portion 5612k. Furthermore, as described above, the rotation range of the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is regulated by coming into contact with the displacement regulating protrusion 5612j.

As mentioned above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is simply a left-right reversal of the displacement operation and displacement direction from the first state to the second state. Explanation will be omitted. Note that the third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the left side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b)).

Next, a projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. possible.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of a projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 with the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member disposed so as to be partially visible from an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620, an irradiation unit 650 that makes light enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 that is transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. It is formed mainly of a gear train (gears 662 to 664) for

The base member 6610 includes an annular back base 611 and an annular front base 6612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has a shielding member 6612r that is annular in front view formed on the inner edge of the annular front base 612 of the first embodiment, and a part of the shielding member 6612r has an opening that opens in a fan shape in the front-rear direction. A portion 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 disposed on the back side visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612, which is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. The shielding member 6612r has a length of about ⅙ of the entire circumference, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 6612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c at the outer edge of the opening 6612p. The front surfaces of the bases 611 and 612 are placed on top of each other, so that the bases 611 and 612 are accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space).

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and its inner diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612. Further, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visible to the player.

Furthermore, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 disposed on the projection plate member 6620 are disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r). Therefore, it is difficult for players to see the player, and deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side to be transmitted therethrough and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. At the same time, when the light irradiated from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or design, and the front base 6612 The player is allowed to visually recognize it through the opening 6612p. That is, a pattern or a design can be made to stand out (display) in the interior space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

Furthermore, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting section 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside thereof. The reflective portion 6622 is a portion whose interior has been roughened by laser processing or the like, and a pattern, design, etc. is formed by dividing the projection plate member 6620 into a plurality of pieces in the circumferential direction over the entire area when viewed from the front of the projection plate member 6620. Ru. In this embodiment, the shape of the pattern, design, etc. of the reflective portion 6622 is formed by dividing into six in the circumferential direction, and six types of reflective areas 6622a to 6622f, such as patterns and designs, are formed (see FIG. 80). .

Furthermore, the projection plate member 6620 has a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 disposed on the outer peripheral edge thereof on the back side and the front side, respectively. Thereby, similarly to the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), thereby making it possible to rotate the projection plate member 6620.

Next, the operation of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. 80(a) to 80(c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. Note that FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c) illustrate transition states of the projection plate member 6620. Further, FIG. 80 shows a state in which the back base 611 is removed. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflecting portion 6622 (reflecting regions 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when the projection plate member 6620 is placed at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is placed inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front (viewed from the back to the front of the page). A reflective area 6622a is arranged. Therefore, when the light from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or design of the reflective area 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and designs appearing inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light from the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflective areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflective area 6622a, but since the front base 6612 is disposed in front of the reflective areas 6622b and 6622f, the player can Displays in areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player will not be able to see the display other than the display surface, and the player's interest will be lost due to the fact that other areas can be seen. can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(b) and 80(c), when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and designs of the reflective areas 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and designs can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or design is printed on the front surface of the irradiated object (projection plate member 6620) and the display surface is switched by displacing the irradiated object, the visible area (opening) of the irradiated object is changed. 6612p), the switching of the pattern or symbol of the irradiated object is visible, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before finishing switching the pattern or symbol. There was a problem in that it was not possible to enjoy the displacement to the end.

In addition, even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates the irradiated object is turned off and the display surface of the irradiated object is darkened, the irradiated object may be affected by the light from other devices or fluorescent lights in the store. By being irradiated, the patterns and designs of the irradiated object became visible to the player.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed from a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 6620 are made difficult to see and are brought into a transparent state. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the illumination of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching of patterns and symbols on the projection plate member 6620. You can enjoy the displacement of 6620 to the end.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated about its center as the rotation axis. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the projection plate member 6612.

In other words, in the case where the projection plate member 6620 is slidable, the installation space in the horizontal or vertical direction is limited, so it is difficult to secure the pattern of the projection plate member 6620 and the number of figures on the side. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and designs.

Next, the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the seventh embodiment, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a are formed in a winning hole unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the following, similarly to the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is taken as the gravitational direction, and the left and right rear of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 10 will be described as the front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 as the back side (or rear side).

First, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 disposed on the base plate of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 82, illustration of units (for example, center frame 86 (refer FIG. 81) etc.) other than the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arrange|positioned on the base board 60 is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a extending in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 at the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 82) of the central opening where the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and a drive unit 960 and a specific winning a prize unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning opening unit 930 is arranged from the gaming area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side from the gaming area, and each is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw or the like. In addition, the detailed structure of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning a prize opening unit 930 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83(b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 disposed on the back side of the front unit 940 (front of the page in FIG. 83(b)), and Mainly includes a drive unit 960 disposed on the back side (front side of the paper in FIG. 83(b)) of the specific winning a prize unit 950, and a displacement member 966 disposed between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940. Formed in preparation for.

As described above, the front unit 940 has an outer shape larger than the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. Therefore, by arranging the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can pass through a path other than the game ball passing path (the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a) formed in the front unit 940, which will be described later. Passing through the through hole 60a from the space can be suppressed.

Part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown inside the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. be done. In addition, detailed explanation about the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 will be mentioned later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, and a part of it (insertion part 965e of the transmission member 965) is connected to the wing member 945 arranged in the front unit via the displacement member 966. Concatenated. Thereby, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. Note that a detailed explanation of the operation of the wing member 945 will be given later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87(b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. Note that in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 includes a back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60, and a front base 943 disposed on the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. and two (a pair) wing members 945 rotatably disposed between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The rear base 941 has an approximately T-shape with an upside-down outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. In addition, the back base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and when the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is disposed on the base plate 60, the base plate 60 is penetrated through the back base 941. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

The back base 941 has a first out port 71 cut out on the downstream side of the game ball (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(b)), and an upper side of the first out port 71 (see FIG. 87(b)). b) A specific winning opening 65a which is located in the upper part and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a second winning opening 140 which is formed through and passing above the specific winning opening 65a, which is opposite to the first out opening 71. It mainly includes a first prize opening 64 formed with a notch on the side edge.

Further, the back base 941 includes a plurality of through holes 941a that penetrate in the thickness direction at the outer edge. The through-hole 941a has a first through-hole 941a1 whose diameter decreases from the front side (the front side in FIG. 87(a) on the paper) toward the back side (the front side on the paper in FIG. 87(b)), and a first through-hole 941a1 that decreases in diameter from the back side toward the front side. The second through hole 941a2 is formed by a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter is reduced.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning port unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded part of the tapping screw. be done. Further, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the front side toward the back side, so that the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back surface of the back base 941 is formed near the first through hole 941a1.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. Ru. Thereby, the back base 941 (winning a prize opening unit 930) can be positioned and disposed with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened to the rear base 941 from the rear side with screws. In this case, when removing the front base 943 from the back base 941, it is necessary to remove the winning opening unit 930 from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (playing area side) of the game board 13.

Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the back side toward the front side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heads of the screws from protruding toward the back side of the back base 941. As a result, when the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, it is possible to suppress the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific winning a prize opening unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87(b)) of the back base 941 is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 of the game board 13 (see FIG. A01). The first out port 71 is formed in such a size that the edge of the bottom of the notch (the upper edge in the direction of gravity) is spaced apart from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by at least the diameter of the game ball. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base board 60), the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the specific winning hole 65a, and the general winning hole 63() are Game balls that have not flown into either can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) through the first out port 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end of the upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first prize opening 64 is formed to have an inner edge larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving part 941g, which will be described later, can be sent to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) via the first prize opening 64.

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, there is a first receiving part 941g formed in a cup shape and protruding toward the gaming area side (the front side of the page in FIG. 87(a)), and a first receiving part 941g on the side opposite to the gaming area (see FIG. b) A first ball throwing portion 942g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side in the drawing.

The first receiving portion 941g is formed in a size that can receive one game ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side of the first receiving part 941g (first winning opening 64) in the direction of gravity can be made to flow into the inside of the first receiving part 941g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941g is formed such that the bottom surface thereof is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the gaming area (the front side in FIG. 87(b))). Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving part 941g can be thrown to the back side (first ball throwing part 942g side) through the first prize opening 64.

Furthermore, the first receiving portion 941g extends from the upper end of both ends of the base plate 60 in the transverse direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87) toward the second winning opening side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(a))). The base plate 60 is provided with a guide portion 941g1 that is inclined and erected outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite to the gaming area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. Thereby, the rigidity of the first receiving part 941g can be increased, and it is possible to suppress damage to the first receiving part 941g due to the game ball flowing down the downstream area colliding with the first receiving part 941g.

In addition, if the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, there will be insufficient placement of game nails that change the game balls flowing down the game area. It becomes difficult to change the direction of flow. Therefore, where there is a risk that the player's interest may be lost, by causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to change the flowing direction of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost. .

Furthermore, since the guide part 941g1 is formed to be inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87(a)) toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide part 941g1 The ball can be guided to the outside of the rear base 941 in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the game ball can collide again with a game nail (not shown) arranged on the base plate 60, and it is possible to easily change the direction in which the game ball flows down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

The first ball throwing portion 942g is formed in a U-shape with an open upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance between opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first ball throwing section 942g is formed such that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the gaming area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)), and the protruding tip side is formed by a ball throwing unit, which will be described later. It abuts against the edge of the inlet 982d of 970. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving part 941g to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first prize opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed cutout portion 942g1 in which the upper end of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side. The first recessed cutout 942g1 is a notch on which a second protrusion 982d1 of a ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. Note that a detailed explanation of the arrangement of the first ball throwing section 942g and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second winning hole 140 is formed through the hole in a substantially D-shape with an upward curve when viewed from the front, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball thrown between the opposing wing members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) via the second prize opening 140.

The second winning opening 140 has a front side wall part 941b that protrudes toward the front side (game area side (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(a))) and a back side (opposite side to the game area (FIG. 87(a))). (b) A second ball throwing portion 942c that protrudes toward the front side)) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that its protruding tip surface comes into contact with a ball throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second ball throwing portion 942c is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the back, and is formed at each of both ends of the lower edge of the second winning opening 140. The second ball throwing portion 942c has a dimension in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 87(b)) set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, can be prevented from falling from the upper surface of the rolling part 943a.

The pair of second ball throwing parts 942c are arranged such that the distance between the opposing sides in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 87(b)) is the width direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. The length is set to be approximately the same as the length in the left-right direction (FIG. 87(b)), and a rolling portion 943a is disposed inside. Further, in the second ball throwing portion 942c, a second recessed cutout portion 942c1 is cut out on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) of the protruding tip portion. The second recessed notch 942c1 is a portion on which a projection 981b1 of a passage unit, which will be described later, is placed, and its detailed description will be described later.

The back base 941 extends from the gaming area side of the back base 941 toward the other side in the gravity direction near the second winning opening 140 (first winning opening 64 side (upper side in FIG. 87(b))), and from the gaming area side of the back base 941 to the side opposite to the gaming area. a first shaft hole 941d recessed in two places in a circular shape, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and penetrating through the back base 941; A first guide wall 942b located on the outside in the opposing direction of the two first openings 941e and protruding from the back side, and a protruding part 941c protruding between the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. It is formed with the following.

The first shaft hole 941d is capable of supporting a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e has an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as its axis. Further, the first opening 941e allows the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 to be inserted therethrough, and is set larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. This can prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The protruding portion 941c has an isosceles triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the corner of the isosceles connecting portion is located on substantially the same plane as the center position between opposing wing members 945, which will be described later. Further, the scalene side of the protruding portion 941c is formed to extend parallel to the facing direction of the wing member 945, and its length is set to be slightly larger than the dimension between the opposing wings of the wing member 945 in the closed state. Ru. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest distance from the feather member 945 in the closed state is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being thrown into the second winning a prize opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945 facing each other). Note that a detailed explanation of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be given later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966, which will be described later, is displaced. 966 is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short direction.

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extend in a direction in which bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 can be brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed into a long rectangular opening in the direction in which the pair of feather members 945 face each other (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)), and a plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is placed inside the opening. can be inserted. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area can be sent into the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 via the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

In addition, the back base 941 includes an upright portion 942f that surrounds the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (on the opposite side to the gaming area), and a recessed part from the back side at both longitudinal ends of the specific winning opening 65a. A recessed portion 941h is provided.

The shape of the inner edge of the upright portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, which will be described later. Thereby, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 can be easily positioned and arranged inside the upright portion 942f.

The concave portion 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952 that becomes the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning a prize port unit 950 is inserted when the specific winning a prize port unit 950 is disposed on the back base 941. It is formed. Thereby, when the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the rod member 952 can be brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, and the rod member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the facing portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the facing portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and a side of the first guide wall 942b from the outer circumferential surface of the standing portion 942f (Fig. 87(b) ) a second guide wall 942d protruding upward).

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back side of the back base 941 and is connected to the upright portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c. As a result, when a displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90), which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back base 941 (on the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)), there is a gap between the displacement member 966 and the back of the back base 941 A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance in the width direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be restricted.

The back base 941 has a half-shaped structure attached to the edge of the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) at both longitudinal ends (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)) of the specific winning opening 65a toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). A second outlet 941f formed by cutting out a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for throwing the game ball that has entered the third receiving part 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side of the base plate 60 (the side opposite to the game area), formed into a shape larger than the diameter of the

Further, a third ball throwing portion 942e that is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear and protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the second out port 941f. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the back side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing section 942e.

The third ball throwing part 942e is formed so that the curved part (lower part) of a U-shape in rear view is inclined downward in the direction of gravity as it protrudes to the back side, and the third ball throwing part 942e is formed to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved part (lower part) of the U-shape in rear view protrudes to the back side. can be rolled to the back side. A detailed explanation of the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the third ball throwing section 942e will be given later.

The front base 943 is formed into an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed from a colorless and transparent plate-shaped body. This allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing front base 943 and back base 941.

The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving part 943c and a third receiving part 944a protrudingly provided at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the above-mentioned back base 941. It is formed.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from the back, and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 is arranged inside when viewed from the front. Furthermore, a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, are provided on the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (the open side of the U-shape). Furthermore, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 side is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to throw a game ball between the opposing sides of the back base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball is suppressed from flowing into the second prize opening 140 from the outside between the opposing sides of a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later. can.

The second receiving portion 943c also includes a ball throwing guide portion 943d protruding inward from its inner edge, and a first recessed portion recessed in a circular shape from the rear base 941 side (the front side in FIG. 87(b)). 943ca, and a rolling portion 943a that protrudes from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base.

A pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945 (lower side in FIG. 87(b)). Further, the pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end surfaces come into contact with each other. . As a result, the game ball that has flowed between the pair of opposing wing members 945 can be thrown between the opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) between the pair of opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d, and an end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the gravity direction is inclined downward toward the rear base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is disposed inside the recess 941j in a state where the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip thereof is located on the back surface of the back base 941. side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)).

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of opposing ball throwing guide parts 943d can be thrown to the end face 943a1 of the rolling part, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the end face 943a1 to the back side of the back base 941. He can throw the ball to.

Further, the front base 943 includes an annular protrusion 943b that protrudes in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular projection 943b has a second shaft hole 943b1 at its inner edge, into which the other end of a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, can be inserted. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be held and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943, which face each other.

The third receiving portion 944a has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is disposed inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be made to flow into the inside of the third receiving part 944a, and the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving part 944a can be passed through the second outlet 941f to the rear surface. You can throw the ball to the side (opposite the playing area).

Further, in the second receiving part 943c and the third receiving part 944a, a first recessed part 943ca and a second recessed part 944a1 are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the near side in the paper surface of FIG. 87(b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened parts into which the screw inserted into the second through hole 941a2 described above is screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. be done. Thereby, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened together.

A pair of feather members 945 are arranged with the second prize opening 140 formed in the back base 941 sandwiched therebetween when viewed from the front. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player through the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than that between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface (back surface) on the back base 941 side.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when fastening (assembling) the back base 941 and the front base 943, by inserting the shaft member 945a into the insertion hole 945c, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be connected to each other while the wing member 945 is rotatable. Can be placed between opposite sides. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be displaced between a closed state in which the opposing side surfaces are parallel to the direction of gravity, and an open state in which one side of the side surfaces is displaced outward in the opposing direction.

The protrusion 945b is connected to a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and is a transmission part that transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945, and the distal end thereof is connected to the displacement member 966 through the first opening 941e of the back base 941. The dimensions are set such that it protrudes toward the back side of the back base 941 (the side opposite to the gaming area). Note that a detailed explanation of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90. 90(a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90(b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90(c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90(b)) at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c when viewed from the front is larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area via the second winning opening 140 can be suppressed from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90(a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90(a)) in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90(a)), and It has a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90(b)) to the back side (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the transverse direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Equipped with

The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the width of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both widthwise opposing inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 and restricting the operation of the wing member 945.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed to bulge out on the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side). Thereby, the area in which the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the front base 943 and the drive unit 960, which will be described later, can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back side base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion when viewed from the back. The connection hole 966b1 is an opening into which a tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of a drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. Note that a detailed explanation of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the transverse direction of the displacement member 966, and is connected to one side abutted portion 966b2 of the inner circumferential surface on the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90(a))). , and a contact portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner circumferential surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The one-side abutted portion 966b2 is a surface that is abutted by a bulging portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The displacement member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to the open state (see FIG. 92) by slidingly displacing the bulging portion 965e1 in contact with the one side abutted portion 966b2.

The other side abutted portion 966b3 is a surface that is abutted by a side surface opposite to a bulged portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The displacement member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to the closed state (see FIG. 91) by being slid and displaced by the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 being brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3. I can do it.

Next, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). In addition, in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 91 shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 92 shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in rear view, and the first protrusion 945b is formed parallel to the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. Mainly includes a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 that is connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the gravity direction (specific winning opening 65a side), and a second surface 945b2 that is connected to the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

The sliding groove 966a2 has a lower inner surface 966a4 located on one side in the direction of gravity (the side of the connecting hole 966b1) and abuts against the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the open state, and a lower inner surface 966a4 that faces the lower inner surface 966a4 and has a protrusion. 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the closed state, and an inner surface in the transverse direction of the displacement member 966 from the outer side in the transverse direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) toward the lower inner surface 966a4 side of the displacement member 966. and an inclined surface 966a5 that is inclined to.

Note that the displacement member 966 is disposed so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back base 941 by a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The feather member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the specific winning opening 65a side (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the second winning opening 140 side (upper side in FIG. 91). It is assumed to be in an open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be explained. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is arranged inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (on the outside in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with the protrusion 945b. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that includes a drive unit that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive unit to a pair of wing members. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a protrusion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, opposing portions are formed on one end of the rotating member and are vertically opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and the protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the opposing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to set a large gap between the opposing part and the protruding part, so there is a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member is unstable. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for opening and closing operations of the wing member, the attitude of the facing part is inclined with respect to the protruding part, and the facing interval of the facing part is equal to the outer shape of the protruding part. If so, the protruding portion interferes between the opposing portions, making it impossible for the rotating member to rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the spacing between the opposing parts to a size that does not interfere with the protruding parts, and the gap between the opposing parts and the protruding parts increases accordingly. As a result, the wing members tend to wobble, making the opening and closing operations of the wing members unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960), and a displacement member 966 that is slid and displaced as the transmission member 965 rotates. A projection 945b is provided protruding from the pair of wing members 945, and a sliding groove 966a2 through which the projection 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the sliding groove 966a2 is The groove width can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 966 is a sliding displacement, and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 is not inclined with respect to the protrusion 945b, so there is no need to avoid interference with the protrusion when rotating unlike the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the projection 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966 is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be disposed substantially parallel to the wing members 945. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, since the displacement member 966 is not displaced in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the space required for disposing the displacement member in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. can. As a result, space for arranging other members can be secured.

Here, unlike the conventional product in which a rotating member is directly connected to a pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is moved in the direction of gravity. When operating in the direction of sliding upward (to the other side in the direction of gravity), the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, so the inertial force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means (the solenoid 610 described later) increases. . Therefore, it is difficult to smoothly perform an initial operation when starting the drive of the wing member 945 in the stopped state and displacing it to the open state or the closed state.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is located below the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945 in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction). be located. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (the other side in the gravity direction) is set below the rotation axis of the wing member 945 along the gravity direction. Thereby, the displacement component of the protrusion 945b that pushes up the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention where the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) to open or close it can be performed smoothly.

Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b with the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) interposed therebetween. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state using its own weight. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the direction of gravity (one side in the direction of gravity), the wing member 945 is rotated in the direction in which it is released, so that the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (its own weight). can be done. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) and opening it can be performed smoothly.

Further, the above-described inclined surface 966a5 is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even if the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5, and the displacement member The sliding displacement of 966 toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) can be started smoothly.

Furthermore, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only can the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b be reduced, but also the projection 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be made smaller. Due to this contact, not only the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the direction of gravity but also the displacement in the horizontal direction can be restricted. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 when the wing member 945 is in the closed state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibrations caused by the falling of game balls, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open or closed position.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the feather member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 moves from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (bottom side in FIG. 92). side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Moreover, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning a prize opening 140 side to the specific winning a prize opening 65a side is set to the direction of gravity (downward in FIG. 92). Thereby, when closing the wing member 945, the wing member 945 can be displaced using the weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93(a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93(b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 includes a first accommodating part 962 and a second accommodating part 963, which are formed in a box shape and are arranged facing each other. 963 , a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610 , and a connecting member 964 that is pivotally supported by the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 and connected to the connecting member 964 . The transmission member 965 is mainly formed.

The first accommodating part 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The covered portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape with the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)) and the guide portion 962b side open. Further, the covering portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the opposing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in a direction facing the outside of the opposing wall surface.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch that engages an engaging portion 963c of a second accommodating portion 963, which will be described later, and is formed into a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c when viewed from the side. As a result, the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened together. The workability of fastening can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 when the drive unit 960 is assembled, and is located on the second accommodating portion 963 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). A through hole 962da is provided that penetrates toward the front.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) that is screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing part 963 is inserted, and is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1 and has an inner diameter larger than the fastening hole 963b1. is formed. Thereby, the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e that are connected to the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a and formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side, and is connected to the pair of arm portions 962e, and has a gate shape when viewed from the front. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f, and a protrusion portion 962g that protrudes from the wall portion 962f to the side opposite to the covered portion 962a (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

In side view, the arm portion 962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85), and its protruding tip side is bent toward the other side in the gravity direction (opposite to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed into an approximately L shape. Further, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the distance between the opposing sides is approximately the same as the distance between both horizontal ends of the side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109(a)) of the distribution unit 980, which will be described later. 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the distal side (bent side) side surfaces of the arm portion 962e described above, and its shape in front view is larger than the shape of the displacement member 966 in front view. Further, the wall portion 962f has an outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93(b)) in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) in the opposing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the back base 941. (L3=L4) is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91). Furthermore, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93(a)) in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(a)) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the back base 941 to the upright portion 942f. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 91) to the outer surface (L5=L6). Thereby, the displacement member 966 can be disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the opposed first guide walls 942b. Furthermore, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966, which is disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941, can be arranged between the opposing surfaces.

The protruding portion 962g is formed to protrude from the outer side of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. It is set to be approximately the same as the protrusion dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Furthermore, the inner dimension L7 of the protruding portion 962g in the opposing direction (FIG. 93(b) vertical direction) is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the rear base 941 in the opposing direction (see FIG. 91). It is set large. Furthermore, the dimension of the protruding portion 962g in the direction of gravity is set to be approximately the same as the dimension between the opposing first guide wall 942b and the standing portion 942f.

Accordingly, when disposing the drive unit 960 in the assembled state on the back base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the opposing protrusions 962g, and the first guide wall 942b and The drive unit 960 can be positioned and disposed with respect to the back base 941 by inserting the protruding portion 962g between the opposing upright portions 942f.

The second accommodating portion 963 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed into a box-shaped body that covers the other side of the solenoid 610 (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction of the solenoid 610 (left-right direction in FIG. 93(b)), which will be described later, when viewed from above. Further, the second accommodating portion 963 is provided with recessed portions 963e recessed in a plurality of locations on both walls extending in the longitudinal direction, and from between the recessed portions 963e at the plurality of locations toward the first accommodating portion 962. an engaging portion 963c that protrudes from the side, a protrusion portion 963b that protrudes from both walls extending in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and one side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) extending in the lateral direction). ) is provided with a bearing part 963d recessed in the wall part.

The protruding portion 963b is formed to protrude outward in the transverse direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular arc shape, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962. Thereby, the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 can be fastened and fixed by screwing a screw inserted from the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating part 962 into the fastening hole 963b1.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening that circulates air in a space formed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c protrudes toward the first accommodating portion 962 from between the plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged in parallel, and has a hook-shaped tip that is bent inward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963. Ru. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, The engaging portion 963c is disposed inside the engaged portion 962c, and a bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one end surface of the first accommodating portion 962.

Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the distal end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is disposed in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess that accommodates a rotating shaft 965c of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered with the side surface of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, so that the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined. In this state, the rotating shaft 965c accommodated in the bearing portion 963d can be prevented from coming off outside the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 includes a main body 961a formed into a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b that is inserted into the inside of the main body 961a and is movable with respect to the main body 961a, and a side of the shaft 961b opposite to the main body 961a. It includes an annular portion 961c disposed at the end of the annular portion 961c, and a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a.

The main body part 961a is a coil part that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft part 961b to be inserted into the main body part 961a can be drawn inward and inserted by the magnetism.

The shaft portion 961b is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 961b is arranged with its axial direction facing the back base 941 side, and is arranged with a part of the back base 941 side protruding from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. Thereby, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP1 is disposed around the shaft portion 961b, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a facing each other. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be biased in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body part 961a, the annular part 961c can be maintained separated from the main body part 961a. Further, after power is applied (supplied) to the main body part 961a, when the application (supply) of power is cut off, the annular part 961c can be quickly separated from the main body part 961a.

The connecting member 964 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 has a base portion 964a formed in a plate-shaped body parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and a base portion 964a that extends from the other side of the base portion 964a in the gravity direction to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85 (see) an upright portion 964b bent toward the side.

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end surface on one side in the gravity direction (the back side of the paper in FIG. 93(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity when viewed in cross section. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 964c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. It is formed in a substantially U-shape with its lower side open when viewed from the rear, and is formed to open from the first recessed portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b includes an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the direction of gravity, into which a protruding portion 965d of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, is inserted. Accordingly, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protrusion 965d comes into contact with the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e, and the transmission member 965 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The transmission member 965 is bent when viewed from the side, and includes a distal end portion 965a that extends in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a rotational distal end portion 965a that is continuous with the distal end portion 965a and extends toward the connecting member 964 side. 965b.

The rotating part 965b is formed so that the width dimension in the lateral direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) of the second accommodating part 963 is smaller than the dimension between opposing bearing parts 963d formed in a pair in the second accommodating part 963. be done. The rotating part 965b also has a rotating shaft 965c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on both sides of the second housing part 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) at the end on the 964 side, and and a protrusion 965d that protrudes toward one end in the gravity direction.

As described above, the rotating shaft 965c is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Furthermore, the distance between the protruding tips of the pair of rotating shafts 965c is set to be larger than the distance between the opposing bearing parts 963d formed in the second accommodating part 963. Thereby, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and disposed inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a rotatable state about the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e when viewed from above. Furthermore, in the state before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a), the protruding portion 965d has a width dimension in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610. The width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be sufficiently larger than the width of the insertion hole 964e (in this embodiment, the width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width of the protrusion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced around the rotating shaft 965c, the projections 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b come into contact with the insertion hole 964e, and the rotation of the transmission member 965 is restricted. This can be suppressed.

The width of the tip portion 965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c is formed to become smaller as the tip portion 965a becomes farther away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 965a has an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above, and an upright portion 965f protruding from the connection side with the rotating portion 965b in one side in the gravity direction. It is formed with

The insertion portion 965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. 96(a) and 96(b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93(b). Note that FIG. 96(a) shows the state of the solenoid 610 before operation, and FIG. 96(b) shows the state of the solenoid 610 after the operation. Further, in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c is The force causes the annular portion 961c to be separated from the main body portion 961a. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (to the left in FIG. 96(a)).

When the connecting member 964 is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmitting member 965 on the solenoid 610 side (the right side in FIG. 96(a)) and the surface of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 on the solenoid 610 side is in contact with the inner surface of the As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 96(a)) about the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the gravity direction is regulated by the contact portion 965g contacting the second housing portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft 961b is drawn into the main body 961a by the magnetic force generated in the main body 961a, and the The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in a direction approaching the main body portion 961a (to the right in FIG. 96(a)).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in the direction approaching the main body portion 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmitting member 965 on the opposite side to the solenoid 610 (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 The solenoid 610 side and the inner surface of the opposite side (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) are in contact with each other. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 96(b)) about the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the gravity direction is regulated by the connection portion between the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 and the rotating portion 965b coming into contact with the first accommodating portion 962.

Therefore, by displacing the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to either the other side in the gravity direction or to the one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 can be moved to either the first accommodating part 962 or the second accommodating part 963. It can be brought into contact. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts by players.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first accommodating part 962 or the second accommodating part 963 from the player side (gaming area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire etc. Accordingly, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since an abnormality occurs in the displacement operation of the wing member 945 that is displaced by the transmission member 965, it is easy for the store operator to discover the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 includes a tip portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b that extend from the rotating shaft 965c and are connected to the displacement member 966, and a distal end portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b that extend from the rotating shaft 965c and are connected to the solenoid 610. Since the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent into a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, the amount of displacement of the displacement member 966 can be ensured. , the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed in a straight line when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is the same as that of the distal end portion 965a of this embodiment. If the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is set to be approximately equal to the total distance, the amount of sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 can be made equal to that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is increased. The whole thing becomes larger.

On the other hand, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed in a straight line when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set by rotation from the insertion portion 965e of this embodiment. When the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is set to be approximately the same as the distance to the shaft 965c (the distance between the tip end 965a and the rotating section 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made the same as in this embodiment. However, the amount of displacement of the displacement member 966 becomes smaller.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while ensuring the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the rear side (right side in FIG. 96(a)) of the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, which are opposite to the displacement member 966. Thereby, the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b can be effectively utilized, and the transmission member 965 can be downsized. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently arranged in the space between the rolling part 943a of the front unit 940 (ball throwing unit 970 described later) and the passage member 955 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, thereby reducing the overall size. can be achieved.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 930 taken along the line XCVII-XCVII in FIG. 83. 98(a) and 98(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 taken along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 97. Note that FIG. 98(a) shows the state of the solenoid 610 before operation, and FIG. 98(b) shows the state of the solenoid 610 after the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the distal end 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip end 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upward in FIG. 98(a)), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 98(b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the abutted portion 966b2 on one side of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 come into contact, and the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the direction of gravity. be done.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the gravity direction (toward the second winning port 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is brought into an open state. That is, by applying electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is brought into an open state.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is aligned in the gravity direction due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 disposed in the solenoid 610 as described above. side (lower side in FIG. 98(a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98(a), the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 contacts the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and the displacement member 966 moves to one side in the gravity direction. The slide is displaced.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to one side in the gravity direction (towards the specific winning port 65a), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is brought into the closed state. That is, by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is brought into the closed state.

In this case, the wing member 945 can be closed while power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 961a, so if the wiring of the main body 961a is disconnected or due to a player's misconduct, the main body 961a is closed. When the wiring is cut, the wing member 945 becomes open, and it is possible to prevent game balls from easily flowing into the second prize opening 140.

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 through a connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Thereby, it is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the displacement member between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, as the transmission member rotates, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, during the operation of slidingly displacing the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 as the transmission member 965 rotates, the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. When actuated, the attitude of the displacement member 966 is changed, and the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places, and is also connected to the transmission member 965 at two places. If this is the case, it is difficult to allow a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, and the resistance when sliding the displacement member 966 (that is, rotating the transmission member 965) is high. This occurs and prevents the wing member from opening or closing. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places, and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one place, so that the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at one place. Even if the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the blade members 945, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Furthermore, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the contact surface between the one side abutted part 966b2 and the other side abutted part 966b3 of the insertion part 965e is the maximum external dimension D2 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the protrusion 945b. (see (a)) is set to be smaller than three times. Thereby, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the connection between the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 By setting the width D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b, the posture of the displacement member 966 is controlled. Change can be prevented from being regulated. As a result, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Note that the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily prevent the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1 from coming into contact with each other. As a result, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Next, the specific winning a prize unit 950 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. 99(a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99(b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99(c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950. It is a diagram. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 includes a ball entering member 953 formed in a box-like body that is opened by the player side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 99), and an opening of the ball entering member 953. A plate member 951 disposed to cover the ball, a passage member 955 disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 in between, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is formed from a colored and translucent resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body part 951a formed in a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a shaft hole 951b recessed in a cylindrical shape on both longitudinally outer sides of the main body part 951a, and a shaft hole 951b recessed in a longitudinal direction of the main body part 951a. The main body portion 951a has a protrusion 951c that projects toward the ball-entering member 953 from one end thereof, and an engaging portion 951d that projects toward the ball-entering member 953 from the other longitudinal end of the main body portion 951a.

The main body portion 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and has a shape that is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. .

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the main body portion 951a, and both ends of the shaft hole 951b in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Moreover, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of a rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted into the shaft hole 951b. Therefore, by supporting the ball entry member 953 while the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953.

The protrusion 951c is formed to protrude toward one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced around the shaft hole 951b by the drive of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is inclined toward the game area, the main body portion 951a It is possible to suppress the game balls that have flown down from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 partially recessed at the protruding tip. A distal end portion 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is connected to the inside of the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted thereto. In addition, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, a part of the engaging portion 951d protrudes toward the downstream area, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the main body portion 951a can be prevented from falling from the other side in the longitudinal direction.

The ball entry member 953 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body 953a formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular box when viewed from the front, an erected wall 953b erected on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and an open side wall 953b of the main body 953a. An engaging portion 953f protrudes from the surface opposite to the opening side, an annular projection 953c protrudes in an annular shape from the surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an annular protrusion 953c protrudes from the open side of the main body portion 953a. A wall portion 953d protrudes toward the plate member 951 side from both longitudinally outer sides of the edge, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other longitudinal side of the main body portion 953a, and the main body. A protruding part 953g protrudes from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the part 953a, a protrusion 953h protrudes from the open side edge of the main body part 953a toward the plate member 951, and two parts formed through the bottom surface of the main part 953a. and an inlet 953j.

The main body part 953a is formed in a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the box-shaped inner part, and has an opening 953a1 that opens on the plate member 951 side, and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball that flows in from the opening 953a1. 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a when viewed from the front is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the upright portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. Thereby, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted into the upright portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. Note that a detailed description of the inner shape of the main body portion 953a will be given later.

Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the distance between the above-mentioned pair of wing members 945 on the outside in the opposing direction. Thereby, even if the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer circumferential surface of the pair of feather members 945, the game ball can be made to flow into the main body part 953a via the specific winning opening 65a.

The opening 953a1 has an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball, and when the plate member 951 is in an open state, the game ball can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1. can.

The rolling surface 953a2 is a lower inner edge of the main body portion 953a in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. Further, the dimension in the direction (short side direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown into the inside of the main body portion 953a from the opening 953a1 can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The standing wall 953b is a wall that holds the detection device SE1 disposed on the opposite side to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the outer circumferential surface in three directions of the detection device SE1, which is formed into a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 in directions other than the three directions surrounded by the standing wall 953b. Thereby, the detection device SE1 can be disposed inside the portion surrounded by the standing wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. Further, the distal end portion of the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the upright wall 953b, which is separated from the proximal end by a distance equal to the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, the detection device SE1 and the engagement portion 953f are engaged with each other, and it is possible to suppress the detection device SE1 disposed on the main body portion 953a from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device that detects passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE1 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular state when viewed from the rear, and the detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions where the detection hole SE1a is not formed. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is disposed on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is arranged at a position corresponding to an inflow port 953j to be described later, and can allow game balls flowing into the inflow port 953j to pass through.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed to protrude from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 is screwed into the inner edge portion of the annular protrusion 953c.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both longitudinally outer sides of the main body portion 953a, and the distance between the opposing walls is shorter than the lengthwise dimension of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be disposed between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

Further, a shaft hole 953d1 is formed in the wall portion 953d and extends in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99(a)) of the main body portion 953a. The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of opposing walls 953d, the rod members 952 are inserted into the shaft holes 953d1 and 951b from both longitudinally outer sides of the plate member 951. It can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protrusion dimension smaller than the recess distance of the recess portion 941h formed in the back base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recessed portion 941h. Thereby, the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b can be prevented from coming out.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of a transmission member 965 disposed in a passage member 955 (described later) is inserted into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 disposed in the passage member 955. be done.

The protruding portion 953g is formed to protrude on the axis of the connecting protrusion 942j of the front unit 940. In addition, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the protrusion 953g are arranged coaxially, and the protrusion The installation portion 953g and the connecting protrusion 942j are in contact with each other. Thereby, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed to protrude toward the plate member 951 side. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957, which will be described later, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge of the main body portion 953a.

Further, the protrusion 953h is formed at substantially the same position as the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the engagement portion 951d in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (left-right direction in FIG. 99(a)). This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll toward the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed to open from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side with an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole through which the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body part 953a is sent to the passage member 955, and a pair of inflow ports 953j are formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 953a.

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance. machine is known. The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. One ball at a time. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the ball entrance is made larger, the rolling distance of the game ball (the length of the rolling surface) from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member increases accordingly. Therefore, it takes time for the ball to arrive at the passage member, and by the time the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, another game ball may enter the ball from the entrance, making it easy for over-winning to occur. Ta.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a pair of inflow ports 953j (at two locations) are formed at a predetermined interval, so even if the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a is enlarged, the flow up to the inflow port 953j is The rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inflow port 953j is shortened by that amount, and the water can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, a detection device SE1 that detects the inflow of game balls into the ball entry member 953 is arranged at a connecting portion between the inflow port 953j and a recessed portion 955a of a passage member 955, which will be described later. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being entered until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In addition, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap in the direction of gravity with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize port unit 950 are fastened. That is, a pair of closed wing members 945 are arranged between a pair of inflow ports 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is arranged below the second winning a prize opening 140 (a pair of wing members 945) in the direction of gravity. Further, since the pair of wing members 945 is arranged in the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area is difficult to flow down below the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the inflow position of the game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is biased. In this embodiment, as described above, since the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where many game balls flow into the ball entry member 953. The inlet 953j can be brought closer. Thereby, the game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953 can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive winning of game balls to the ball entering member 953.

The passage member 955 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape when viewed from the front is approximately the same as the outer shape of the above-mentioned ball entry member 953 when viewed from the front. Further, the passage member 955 has a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at a position facing the detection hole SE1a of each detection device SE1, and a pair of recessed portions 955a located on the other side in the longitudinal direction from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. A pair of third openings 955c are formed through the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a recess is formed on the other side in the gravity direction of the third openings 955c. The second recessed portion 955f is located between the pair of recessed portions 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage that guides the game ball inserted through the detection hole SE1a, and the recess dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recess dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. be done.

The second opening 955b is a space in which a connecting member 957c and a transmission member 958 of a drive unit 957, which will be described later, are arranged. Further, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed on the inner circumferential surface of the second opening 955b. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space in which the detection device SE2, in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged parallel to the direction of gravity, is arranged, and is set to be approximately the same as the external shape of the detection device SE2 when viewed from the front. . Thereby, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c. Further, in the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 projects toward the ball entry member 953 side in a state arranged inside the third opening 955c.

Furthermore, an engaging portion 955e protrudes toward the drive unit 957 at the edge of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inside the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is disposed in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. Thereby, the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c can be prevented from slipping out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling portion 955d is curved into an arc shape. Further, the end of the rolling portion 955d on the plate member 951 side is connected to the third ball throwing portion 942e of the front unit 940 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be sent to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning a prize port unit 950.

Further, the other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 disposed in the third opening 955c. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. Thereby, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as a passage for the game ball as described above. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the above-mentioned drive unit 960 is disposed, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 99(c) left-right direction) of the passage member 955 is the second recess of the above-mentioned drive unit 960. It is set larger than the distance dimension of the accommodating portion 963 in the transverse direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)).

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h that is formed through the passage member 955 at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and a projection 955g that projects toward the drive unit 957 side. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw that fastens the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The projection 955g is formed in a cylindrical shape, and has a circular fastening hole 955g1 recessed in the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole into which a screw that fastens the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) is screwed together, and is opposite to the elongated hole 963f formed in the second accommodating part 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed in the position where Thereby, the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 includes a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b that covers the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c disposed at a displaced portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a includes a main body 957a1 formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 957a2 that is inserted into the inside of the main body 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body 957a1, and a side of the shaft 957a2 opposite to the main body 957a1. It includes an annular portion 957a3 disposed at the end of the annular portion 957a3, and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

The main body part 957a1 is a coil part that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and due to the magnetism, the shaft part 957a2 to be inserted into the main body part 957a1 is drawn to the inside of the main body part 957a1, so that it can be inserted. be done.

The shaft portion 957a2 is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged with its axial direction facing the passage member 955, and is arranged with a portion on the back base 941 side protruding from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced relative to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 957a2, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be biased in a direction away from the main body portion 957a1. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained separated from the main body portion 957a1. Moreover, when the application (supply) of power is cut off after power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed into a box-like body that covers the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one side of the case member 957b into which the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is open. Further, the case member 957b is formed with an insertion hole 957b1 that penetrates in the axial direction of the shaft portion 957a2, and an opening 957b2 that penetrates on the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw that fastens the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip of the screw. Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. Thereby, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body portion 957a1 via the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed into a plate-shaped body parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c has a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 99(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion. It is provided with a second recessed part 957c2 located on the solenoid 957a side of 957c1 and recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft part 957a2, and an engaging part 957c3 protruding toward the ball entry member 953 side.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the gravity direction when viewed in cross section. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity when viewed from the rear, and is opened from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. In the engaging portion 957c3, a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is provided inside the bent portion. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be given later.

The transmission member 958 is formed into a plate-shaped body that is approximately triangular in side view. The transmission member 958 has a shaft hole 958b that penetrates circularly in the plate thickness direction, a coupling portion 958a that protrudes cylindrical in the plate thickness direction from an end on the coupling member 957c side, and a tip portion that protrudes toward the plate member 951 side. 958c.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) is inserted. Further, the shaft hole 958b is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. Thereby, the transmission member 958 is rotatably supported by the passage member 955.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmitting member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the engagement portion 951d can be pushed up by displacing the tip portion 958c. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, displacement of the plate member 951 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102(a) and 102(b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 along the CII-CII line of FIG. 99(c). FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are perspective front views of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950.

Note that FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a) show the plate member 951 in a closed state, and FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) show the plate member 951 in an open state. The closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body 951a covers the opening of the main body 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body 951a covers the main body 953a of the ball entry member 953. It is in a state separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

As shown in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), when the application (supply) of power to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is cut off, the urging force of the coil spring SP2 causes the shaft portion 957a2 to become a member of the plate member. 951 side (left side in FIG. 102(a)). Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly disposed on the plate member 951 side that is spaced apart from the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmitting member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so the connecting portion 958a is pushed toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, force is transmitted to the distal end portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in the direction of rotation about the shaft hole 958b to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 102(a)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. is rotated to Thereby, the plate member 951 can be maintained in a closed state.

Further, when the plate member 951 is in the closed state, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, if a player makes an unauthorized operation and forcibly opens the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side can be pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the force of unauthorized operation from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 103(b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft portion 957a2 is drawn (adsorbed) inside the main body portion 957a1. It is said to be in a state of Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly disposed on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmitting member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so as the connecting member 957c is displaced, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) (to the right in FIG. 102(b)). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in the direction of rotating the distal end portion 958c around the shaft hole 958b in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102(b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up to the other side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. rotated in the direction of This allows the plate member 951 to be in an open state.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction using its own weight, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 It is possible to suppress the force applied to the As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104(a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104(b) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 along the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104(a). Note that FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached. Moreover, in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), the plate member 951 is shown in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body part 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a that is inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity toward the outside from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 104(a)) of the main body part 953a. A recess 954b recessed at the end of the slope 954a, a protrusion 954c protruding from the connecting portion of the slope 954a and the recess 954b, and a projection 954c provided at each end of the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side. It is formed with an upright wall 954d that stands in series.

The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface for game balls that rolls the game balls flowing between the pair of opposing inflow ports 953j toward the inflow port 953j, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. . Thereby, the game ball flowing between the opposing inflow ports 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inlet 953j (lower side in FIG. 104(b)) and is recessed toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In addition, the concave portion 954b is formed such that the concave distal end surface is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j, and receives the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a. can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that enters from the opening 953a1 of the main body part 953a can be made to flow into the recessed part 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, the game ball can be made to flow into the recessed part 955a of the passage member 955. It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the number of game balls being entered into the ball.

Further, the recess 954b extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (vertical direction in FIG. 104(b)). This allows the rolling surface 953a2 to easily receive game balls rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (left-right direction in FIG. It is possible to guide (inflow) by time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104(b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the recessed portion 954b is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when a plurality of game balls are received in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the width of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). Thereby, when a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow toward the passage member 955 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-mentioned inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 across the recess 954b, and is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j (passage member 955). It is formed by As a result, the game balls that have entered the second inclined surface 954e are rolled in front of the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward slope of the second inclined surface 954e, and quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The standing wall 954d is formed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the second inclined surface 954e, and also directs the rolling direction of the game balls flowing into the second inclined surface 954e toward the inlet 953j (path member 955) side. 2 guide surface 954d1.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inlet 953j side toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955, and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2, and also forms a contact with the longitudinal end of the rolling surface 953a2. It is arranged between the passage member 955 and the passage member 955. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the main body part 953a from the longitudinal end of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protruding portions 954c are formed at both longitudinal ends of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and protrude toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Thereby, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling outward on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 104(b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the concave portion 954b (path member 955). . That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the slope 954a through the recess 954b. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protrusion 954c is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, and one surface is connected to the surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one of the remaining two surfaces is connected to the side edge 954c3 on the side of the recess 954b. is connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the remaining guide surface 954c1 is an opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the game ball (the longitudinally outward direction of the rolling surface 953a2) of the inclined surface 954a of the game ball. Formed with a slant to the side. Thereby, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the recess 954b (path member 955).

That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the slope 954a to the second slope 954e through the recess 954b. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, as described above, the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends in the width direction of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a, so when the plate member 951 is in an open state, The end of the plate member 951 can be located on one end (upper side in the gravity direction) in the gravity direction than the rolling surface 953a2. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is in the open state, it is possible to suppress the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the main body part 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body part 951a.

Furthermore, since the game ball guided toward the opening 953a1 by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be decelerated before the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the slope 954a through the recess 954b. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inlet 953j to the side portion 954c2 at the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. This allows the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time while suppressing the game balls from jumping out from the opening 953a1. I can do it.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a facing the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is used for game balls whose rolling speed is relatively low (slow). Since there is a low risk of it flying out from the surface, by making it contact the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1, it is possible to prevent it from rolling from the slope 954a through the recess 954b to the second slope 954e. Therefore, it is possible to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided over the guide surface 954c1 to the standing wall 954d formed on the second slope 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by climbing over the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erected wall 954d, and it is possible to reliably decelerate the game ball. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be prevented from jumping out from the opening 953a1, and can be made to quickly flow into the inlet 953j (path member 955). As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In addition, a side edge 954c3 of the end face of the protruding portion 954c opposite to the standing wall 954d extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. A second side edge 954d2 of the end surface of the standing wall 954d opposite to the protrusion 954c extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The side edge portion 954c3 has a length L30 (see FIG. 104(b)) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction of Thereby, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge 954d2 of the standing wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated, and can be easily positioned near the passage member 955. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the distance L32 (see FIG. 104(a)) between the intermediate position of the standing wall 954d in its thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge 954d2 of the upright wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protruding portion 954c is located on the extension line of the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d in the inclination direction, and the game ball guided toward the recess 954b (path member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1 is rolled. Even if the dynamic speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the protrusion 954c and decelerated. Therefore, game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The distance L33 (see FIG. 104(a)) from the concave surface of the concave portion 954b to the protruding tip of the protruding portion 954c is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. In addition, as described above, the protruding portion 954c is formed in a continuous manner with the side surface of the recessed portion 954b, so that the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact with the protruding portion 954c. Therefore, such game balls can be decelerated and can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the assembled state of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described. FIG. 105(a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105(b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960. FIG. 106(a) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 105(a), and FIG. 106(b) is a sectional view on the CVIb-CVIb line in FIG. 106(a). It is a sectional view of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in .

In addition, in FIGS. 105(a) and 105(b), the wiring HS1 is connected to the solenoid 957a that operates the plate member 951, and the wiring HS1 is connected to the solenoid 610 that operates the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83(a)). A part of the wiring HS2 is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 106(b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 that detects the number of game balls that have flowed into the specific winning hole 65a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83(a)) of the winning opening unit 930 is located at a position where a part thereof overlaps with the specific winning opening unit 950 when viewed from the front. is formed. Thereby, a space can be formed on the side opposite to the gaming area (back side) of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of wing members 945).

Here, conventionally, the second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 that open or close the second winning opening 140, a first driving means that drives the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning opening 65a. A gaming machine is known that includes a board member 951 that opens or closes the specific winning opening 65a, and a second drive means that drives the board member 951. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means are respectively disposed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, so that the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member There is a problem in that it is difficult to arrange other members or devices on the back side of the member 951, and it is difficult to utilize the space effectively.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, it is possible to form a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. Yes (see Figure 97). That is, by consolidating the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), other members and devices can be arranged. A space for this can be secured on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 (second prize opening 140), and the space can be used effectively accordingly.

Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed near the central opening formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) (where the center frame 86 is disposed) is moved far from the central opening. By disposing it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) disposed on the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit that is visible to the player through the inside of the center opening (center frame 86) is attached to the base plate. 60 (opposite side to the gaming area) to make it difficult for players to see.

That is, the movable body of the operating unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 when normally (retracted), making it difficult for players to see, and when movable (extended) the movable body of the operating unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 (center frame 86). ), which makes it easier for players to see, the operation means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed near the central opening can be moved to the specific winning opening located far from the central opening. By disposing the movable body at a position horizontally overlapping with the unit 950, the movable body can be easily disposed at a position away from the central opening when retreating. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operating unit during normal (retreat) mode. As a result, when the movable body is operated to be in an extended state, it is possible to easily provide interest to the player.

Further, the projected area of the plate member 951 when viewed from the front is set to be larger than the projected area of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 that includes two displacement members (a plate member 951 and a pair of wing members 945), respective driving means (a driving unit 957 and a Since the drive unit 960) is disposed, it is possible to easily dispose each drive means on the back side of one displacement member (plate member 951), and also on the back side of the other displacement member (pair of wing members 945). You can create a space.

Furthermore, since the plate member 951 is formed to have a larger projected area when viewed from the front than the projected area when viewed from the front of the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951, The dead space on the back side of the prize opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105(a), a drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and a drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are operated in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (in the left-right direction in FIG. 105(a)). are arranged in parallel along the Therefore, the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) is disposed at a position farther from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see Figure A01) than the pair of wing members 945, and The longitudinal direction is arranged perpendicular to the separation direction. This makes it easier to secure a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. As a result, the space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling part 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling part 943a is disposed through the second prize opening 140 of the back base 941, and the drive unit 960 is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940. 941, the drive unit 960 can be held (disposed) on the front base 943 at the same time as the rear base 941 is fastened and fixed to the front base 943. This can prevent forgetting to attach the drive unit 960 when attaching the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (gaming board 13).

The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are set at substantially the same position on the opposite side (back side) to the plate member 951 side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the drive unit Wiring HS1 and wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 on the side opposite to the plate member 951 (back side). Thereby, the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610 can be easily arranged together. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wiring from coming apart on the side opposite to the gaming area (back side) of the game board 13, and it is possible to suppress the wiring HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged with the axial directions of the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957a2 facing in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the sides of the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 957a2 opposite to the shaft portions 961b and 957a2. This makes it easier to combine the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the drive unit 957.

The drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other. This makes it possible to simplify the shape of a partitioning member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and limits the flow of an electromagnetic field to the area where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are disposed.

That is, the side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed to have different sizes, or the side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed on both sides in the direction of gravity. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the direction of gravity, both side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the direction of gravity form a step, so the sections are divided according to the step. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of such a partition member becomes complicated.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed at positions where both side surfaces of the main body part 961a and the main body part 957a1 in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

Note that the partition member is a conductive barrier that partitions the area where the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are installed from other areas and restricts the flow of electromagnetic waves between these two areas. It is formed from a metal plate.

Moreover, the transmission member 965 is arranged between the passage member 955 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the rolling part 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is provided at the tip (insertion part 965e). Since a displacement member 966 is disposed that slides to open and close the pair of wing members 945 as the pair of wing members 945 rotates, compared to a conventional product in which the pair of wing members 945 is opened and closed only by a rotating member, the second prize is achieved. Space can be secured on the back side of the opening 140 and on both sides (lateral sides) of the rolling portion 943a. In addition, unlike conventional products, there is no need to bend the throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning port 140 toward the specific winning port unit 950 in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, so the second The winning hole 140 can be brought close to the specific winning hole 65a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping with the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair on the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 in front view. will be established. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, if, for example, the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1, so that such illicit act cannot be carried out. It can be made difficult.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) that drives the wing member 945 is disposed on the back side of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted through the gap in the pachinko machine 10. If a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the gaming area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like for the purpose of fraudulently operating the gaming machine, it will be difficult for store staff to discover the fraudulent activity. There was a risk of being exposed.

That is, since the plate member 951 is disposed on the gaming area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden by the plate member 951, and the store staff cannot prevent fraud caused by the ball entry member 953. is said to be difficult to discover.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in order to secure the path from the specific prize opening 65a to the first driving means, if a tool such as a drill is used to perform hole-drilling, the detection Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, fraudulent activity can be discovered by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and tampering is done to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be moved to the plate member 951 by closing the plate member 951. Since the location where the fraud has been committed cannot be seen, it is particularly effective to detect fraud by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1.

In addition, since the detection device SE1 is a reused item (ready-made product) that is the same as the detection devices that detect other game balls (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3), a degree of freedom is ensured in its external size. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the opposing detection devices SE1. Therefore, if the player drills a hole in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like, aiming at the gap, there is a risk that the player's fraudulent activity may not be reported to the clerk.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to opposite sides of the pair of detection devices SE1. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when a player penetrates the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 with a drill or the like, the wire HS3 can be broken by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 notifies the error, making it easier for the clerk to discover fraud.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure the path from the specific prize opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 may be damaged (disconnected) due to the fraudulent act. ) can be easily done. Alternatively, it is possible to make the user recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

Moreover, an annular protrusion 953c into which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is screwed is formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side (E10(a) lower side) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit 960 can be hidden, making it more difficult to commit such fraudulent acts. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. By setting the fastening position to , the unshielded area in the front of the drive unit 960 can be compensated for by the screw, making it more difficult for fraudulent acts to occur.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the wiring HS3 is arranged so as to be wound around the annular projection 953c of the ball entry member 953. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side of the ball entry member 953, such tampering can be made more difficult. Alternatively, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

Therefore, when the player aims a drill or the like to penetrate the gap between the opposing detection devices SE1, the wire HS3 can be easily broken by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 notifies the error, making it easier for the clerk to discover fraud.

Further, the wiring HS3 is arranged so as to be wound around the annular projection 953c. This makes it difficult for force in the shearing direction to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharge direction, and the detection is performed. A force in the shearing direction acts on the connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c, when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the ejection direction of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, the connecting portion with the detection device SE1 The direction of the force acting on the wiring HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connection portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position that is biased towards the end of the wiring HS3 of the detection device SE1 on the opposite side to the discharge side. Therefore, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screw engagement position (annular protrusion 953c), so the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened to tamper with the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, such tampering can be made more difficult.

Next, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. 107(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. 108(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the ball throwing unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 that is disposed on the player side (game area side) and has a space inside which a game ball can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980. and a passage unit 990 disposed on the opposite side.

The sorting unit 980 includes an opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that is continuous with the first winning port 64 and second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above, and the opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b). ) can be received inside the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the gaming area via the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 980 will be given later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction. The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first through hole 991a to second through hole 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 through the openings. A detailed explanation of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. 109(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109(b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 112(a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). It is.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the sorting unit 980 has a rear base 985, a front base 981 disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and a rotating unit between the front base 981 and the rear base. It is formed mainly of a distribution section 983 disposed in a possible state, and a cover member 987 disposed on the back side of the rear base 985 at a position corresponding to the distribution section 983.

The back base 985 is made of a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material, and includes a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recessed portion 985h recessed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b and a protruding portion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recessed portion 985h. be prepared and formed.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of circular fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating the outer edge of the base portion 985a, and an inclined surface that slopes toward one side in the direction of gravity on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw passing through a passage unit 990 described later is screwed. Thereby, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a portion of openings 985b to 985f, which will be described later, on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Thereby, the downward direction of the game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, game balls can easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side in FIG. 109(b)), and is formed approximately at the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 109(b)). be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed to a size that can accommodate a portion of a distribution section 983, which will be described later, inside, and is provided with a bearing section 985j that protrudes in an annular shape from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The opening 985b and the opening 985c are respectively formed at both ends in the lateral direction of the base portion 985a, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surfaces on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) are inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (FIG. 109(b) left-right direction), and its position in the gravity direction (FIG. 109(b) vertical direction) is approximately the same as the openings 985b and 985c. set to the position. Further, like the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward as it goes toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d. In addition, the openings 985e and 985f extend in the direction of gravity into inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, which are spaces that open on the front base 981 side, and discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, which have spaces that open on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. It is formed mainly by intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 that communicate the passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. . Thereby, the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be made to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

Furthermore, a recessed portion 985f4 is formed in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, which is recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the throwing direction (direction of gravity) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a cutout for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and disposed from the back side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. can. Thereby, game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, in the detection device SE3, since the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is formed parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily utilized when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 and the connecting portion with the detection hole SE1a. Note that the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed in a continuous manner with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the direction of gravity from increasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. In addition, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can flow into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, and the balls can be passed through the spaces and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opening 985d. Further, like the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Furthermore, since the housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semicircular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

The protruding portion 986e is provided in a cylindrical shape from a position opposite to the above-described bearing portion 985j with the base portion 985a interposed therebetween. The protruding portion 986e also includes a circular fastening hole formed in the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw inserted through a cover member 987 (described later) is screwed. By screwing the screw while the cover member 987 is in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel a magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution section 983, which will be described later, to facilitate the displacement of the distribution section 983.

The front base 981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material. The front base 981 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is larger than the back base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protruding part 982.

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g extending through the plate thickness direction at its outer peripheral edge, and a first guide wall protruding toward the rear base 985 side. 981f and a second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating near the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulge 982. It is formed mainly with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .

The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulge 982, which will be described later, sandwiched therebetween. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed below a bulge 982, which will be described later, in the direction of gravity, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two locations.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d have an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the periphery of the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and at the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. By doing so, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened together.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b that stands up along the edge thereof on the side opposite to the rear base 985 side (on the near side in the paper of FIG. 109(a)). In addition, the through hole 981c is a part that communicates with the second winning hole 140 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 140 It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the ball.

The side wall portion 981b is formed in such a size that the upright end surface contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c of the winning hole unit 930 in a state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located closer to the other end side in the gravity direction than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the back base 985 It is formed with a downward slope towards the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a projection 981b1 projecting from the erected tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside thereof, and a game ball flowing into the inside from the inflow port 982d passes through the bulging portion 982. The ball-throwing path TR0 includes a first path TR1 and a second path TR2 that branch from the ball-throwing path TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is bent toward the rear base 985 side and stands approximately halfway between the inlet 982d, which is formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity. It is formed mainly of an upright wall 982a and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inlet 982d is cut out and has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that corresponds to the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. Formed in overlapping positions.

The inlet 982d also includes a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes toward the side opposite to the rear base 985 at the edge on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the second protrusion 982d1 The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed notch 942g1.

Further, the distance L34 (see FIG. 109(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is from the inner edge of the first concave notch 942g1 to the first thrown ball. The distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)) to the inner edge of the portion 942g on one side in the gravity direction is set larger than the distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging part 982) and the first ball throwing part 942g are connected to each other. You can avoid getting caught in between.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulged portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. Further, the standing wall 982a is formed below the inflow port 982d in the gravity direction, and includes an abutment portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the standing direction above the gravity direction.

The standing wall 982a has a horizontal separation distance L36 (see FIG. 112(b)) from the inner edge of the outer circumferential portion of the bulging portion 982 that is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can be placed between the opposing sides. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed as spaces through which the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can pass.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, which will be described later, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are thrown to either direction. The distribution section 983 is configured to be able to alternately send game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the throwing of the game balls flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

On the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the standing wall 982a, a bearing portion 982c is formed which protrudes in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulge portion 982 toward the rear base 985 side. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports a distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set to be approximately the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Furthermore, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, so when combining the front base 981 and the back base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by contacting the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. Note that a detailed explanation of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be given later.

The recessed portion 982e and the recessed portion 982f are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend on one side in the direction of gravity by the distance of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982g is formed between the recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j, and the recessed direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Furthermore, a third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, it is possible to downsize the distribution unit 980. .

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and extends obliquely toward the back base 985 side toward the one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing from the opening 985b to the opening 985f when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f to make it easier to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recessed portions 982h and 982j, and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected end surfaces thereof descend toward the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 109(b)). tilted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the upright end surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1, and are guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, It is possible to easily flow into the opening 985e and the opening 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided toward the rear base 985 side, and collided with the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, thereby causing the game balls to flow through the opening 985e. and can easily flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the distance between the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the slope of the slope portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased and durability can be improved.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 become difficult to visually recognize from the player side. Furthermore, when the guide parts 982h1 and 982j1 are set up on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, so that the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily recognized even through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner, visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the facing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a substantially T-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the distribution part 983 penetrates through the T-shaped acting part 983a on one side, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting part 983a, and a connecting part between the acting part 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a through hole 983c, a contact portion 983d that bulges out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e that is connected to the working portion 983a and the back base 985 side of the intermediate plate 983b. It is formed mainly by

The through-hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution part 983, the front base 981 and the rear base can be assembled while the distribution part 983 is rotatable. 985 facing each other.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed to extend toward the outside in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from its tip. The distance L37 (see FIG. 112(b)) to the inside is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. In addition, the intermediate plate 983b allows the distribution portion 983 to be rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball from one side of the first passage TR1 is regulated to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a state where it is regulated.

The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. Moreover, the connection position of the action part 983a with the contact part 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the distribution part 983 via the inlet 982d is placed in a state where a load is applied to the action part 983a side. As a result, the distribution section 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed into a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than the recess dimension of the recess portion 985h of the back base 985. is set small. Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recessed part 985h. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d can be prevented from being caught inside the recess 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 that is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b side from the through hole 983c at the radially outer end portion on the back side of the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed into a circular shape having an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated therein from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and is disposed in a state where it repels the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985. As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distributing part 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis by the magnetic force acting on the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985, so that the magnetic body 988c rotates in one direction or the other direction in which the acting part 983a extends. It can be placed in a tilted position.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled, and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is You can prevent yourself from slipping out. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing section 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution section 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution section 983 can be simplified.

In addition, the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 can be prevented from being magnetically attracted to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is disposed on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the rear base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed with two first recesses 987a and a second recess 987b, which are circular in shape when viewed from the front and are recessed in parallel in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the above-mentioned accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating part 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b as described above, the magnetic substance 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b is accommodated. It can be suppressed from slipping out of the portion 986b.

The second recess 987b includes a through hole 987b1 on the bottom surface thereof for fastening and fixing to the back base 985. Further, the second recessed portion 987b has an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate and position the second recess 987b in the protruding part 986e of the rear base 985, and in the positioned state, screws can be inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding part 986e through the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution section 983 when game balls flow into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d will be described. 113(a) and 113(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). In addition, below, the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 is displaced from the state which regulates the throwing of a game ball to one side of 1st path|passage TR1 to the state which restricts the throwing of a game ball to the other side of 2nd path|passage TR2. Only the case will be explained, and a description of the case where the throwing of the game ball from the state of regulating the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second passage TR2 to the one side of the first passage TR1 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 (before the game ball contacts the action section 983a), as described above, the game ball is distributed to the distribution section 983. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), so that the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the second passage TR2 side. Note that the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113(a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, the connecting position of the acting part 983a with the abutting part 983d is set on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connecting position with the abutting part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. , the load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, the distribution part 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1 side, as shown in FIG. 113(b). It is said that Note that the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsion direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side of the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to a state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution section 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Furthermore, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution section 983 can be maintained. Therefore, each time a game ball is thrown, the distribution section 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b and throw the game ball one ball to the first path TR1 and the second path TR2.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings that are opened on the sorting unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 disposed in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball; a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and that throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992; The detection device SE4 is disposed between three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 also has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 side, and a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first insertion hole 991a. a second insertion hole 991b formed through the second insertion hole 991b, a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d formed on both sides of the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in front view. It is formed mainly by having a plurality of circular through holes 991f formed therethrough.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Furthermore, when combining the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980 can be received inside the recessed part 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a portion of the detection device SE3 from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the protruding portion 991c2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the left in FIG. 114(a)).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is oriented horizontally. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 114(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and the fifth insertion hole The fifth insertion hole 922 mainly includes a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating on one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the fifth insertion hole 922 in the gravity direction, and an upright wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the inner space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is continuous when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled toward the third passage member 993 side (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d that projects horizontally, and a projecting wall 992e that projects horizontally from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L-shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and has a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. Wiring for a detection device SE4 and a detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, which will be described later, are inserted between the engagement portion 992d and the vertical wall 992a. Thereby, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out from the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The protruding wall 992e is formed to protrude from both horizontal sides of the upright wall 992a in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a through hole 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the protruding wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting a screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where its internal space is continuous with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Ru. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received into the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, a guide wall 992c1 that stands upright toward the third passage member 993 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 that stands upright on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the sixth insertion hole 992c, and an end in the extending direction of the first wall portion 992c2, and and a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e formed in the third passage member 993 and the engaging portion 993d. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions on the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the inner space of the detection hole SE1a is continuous with the inner space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a and is detected by the detection device SE4, and is also thrown toward the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 includes an annular projection 992f that projects toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114(a)). The annular projection 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, and thereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed in a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the gravity direction. It mainly includes an erected wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Moreover, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position continuous with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (inclined downward toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). be done. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 114(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the gravity direction of the upright wall 992a of the second passage member 992 (lower side in FIG. 114(b)). As described above, since the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 114(b)), the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 described above can be brought close to each other, and the external shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced in size.

The standing wall 993e is such that when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance between the second passage member 992 and the first wall 992c2 is equal to the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the shorter side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. This allows positioning of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity.

Further, a first wall portion 992c2 is formed on the upstream side (on the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown, for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in order to prevent fraud by the player, so a slight positional deviation in the height of the rolling surface of the game ball may cause damage to the inside of the hole SE1a. In this embodiment, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is provided on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being misaligned. As a result, the game ball inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 bent toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip. When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 that is equal to the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. The distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of Thereby, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f. It is formed with a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c includes a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f on the bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted from the third passage member 993 side through the through hole 993c1 and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 Since the ball throwing unit 970 (distributing unit 980) can be replaced with another unit and a different unit can be installed, the game that flows down the game area can be A different game format can be played without affecting the flow of the ball.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. 117(a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117(b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. 118(a) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line in FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 118(b) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line in FIG. It is a diagram. Note that the same parts as those of the above-mentioned distribution unit 980 are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 disposed on the gaming area side and a back base 1985 disposed on the opposite side of the front base 1981 to the gaming area side. Formed in preparation for.

The front base 1981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 when viewed from the front. The front base 1981 mainly includes a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a toward the player side (the side opposite to the back base 1985).

Further, the front base 1981 is formed from a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 (in this embodiment, yellow). This makes it easy for the player to recognize whether the game board 13 is provided with the distribution unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980.

In other words, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the sorting unit 980 is installed and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the exchange unit 1980 is installed are introduced into the same store. As will be described later, both specifications have the same shape of the gaming area (the front of the game board 13), making it difficult for the player to determine which specification it is. This makes it easier for players to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) it has.

The outer shape of the base plate 1981a when viewed from the front is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the sorting unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (the specifications are changed), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) can be placed on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set. Therefore, there is no need to change the shape of the base plate 60 when specifications are changed by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside of the bulging portion 1982. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an inlet 982d formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension in the horizontal direction of the bulging portion 1982 is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside thereof and flow down. . Furthermore, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is set at substantially the same position in the gravity direction as the inner surface of the opening 985d formed in the rear base 1985 on one side in the gravity direction. Thereby, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be thrown to the opening 985d in the order in which they flow into the inflow port 982d.

The outer shape of the back base 1985 when viewed from the front is set to be approximately the same as the outer shape of the back base 985 of the sorting unit 980, and the opening 985d that communicates with the inner space of the bulging portion 1982 and the inner space of the through hole 981c communicate with each other. It is formed with an opening 985g.

According to the exchange unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the outer shape of the base plate 1981a when viewed from the front is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980. can be easily replaced (change of specifications).

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball entrance unit is arranged. machine is known. According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one with a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while reusing the game board. can. However, in the game machine described above, since the ball entry unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space in advance in front of the game board, for example, according to the maximum number of passages. Therefore, when using a ball entry unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem in that space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (ball entry unit) has an inlet 982d, a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 connected to the inlet 982d, and A winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the front side, and a winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 through the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and is connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Since the passage unit 990 is provided with a passage unit 990, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning slot unit 930 on the front of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front of the game board. There's no need. Therefore, by replacing the sorting unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, the game board 13 (base board 60 and front unit 940) can be used (commonly used) and the front side of the game board 13 can be changed when changing the specifications of the game board 13. space can be used effectively.

In addition, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed to have a smaller external shape than the winning opening unit. In addition, since it is disposed at a position overlapping the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, the player can see the distribution unit 980 through the front unit 940, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, in order to make the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential that the base plate 60 be made of a light-transmitting material; for example, the base plate 60 may be made of a plywood board. , a sticker is attached to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since it is also permissible to paint the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is made of a colored semi-transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the flow passes through the front unit 940 and flows down the inside (passage) of the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest in the game can be increased.

Further, since the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the front Through the unit 940, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball changes its position in the front-back direction and flows down, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, the game ball passage of the distribution unit 980 is formed to include a ball throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the ball throwing passage TR0. Further, the sorting unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 that detects game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when manufacturing a game machine with a different specification by changing from the distribution unit 980 with many passing paths for game balls to the replacement unit 1980 with fewer passages, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

That is, in a structure in which the detection device SE3 is disposed in the passage unit 990 disposed downstream of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be disposed for the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the downstream passage When changing from the distribution unit 980 with two flow passages to the replacement unit 1980 with one flow passage, it is sufficient to install one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980 is There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 will be provided accordingly. On the other hand, if the detection device SE3 is arranged in a path branching from the ball throwing path TR0, when changing the distribution unit 980 to the replacement unit 1980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is installed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in determining the number of locations.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 that detects the inflow of game balls into the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990, as described above. Therefore, the detection devices disposed in the sorting unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be distributed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

Further, the exchange unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b that throws the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 at the same position as the distribution unit 980. Therefore, similarly to the sorting unit 980, when disposing the exchange unit 1980 in the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930), the side wall portion 981b can be used to position the exchange unit 1980. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling part 943a and the side wall part 981b are connected is the same, so by positioning the side wall part 981b with respect to the rolling part 943a, the replacement unit 1980 However, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

Furthermore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, the purpose of positioning the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is to suppress positional deviation (step) from occurring at the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of positional deviations (steps) can be more effectively suppressed compared to the case where other portions are positioned. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the arrangement of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described. FIG. 119 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CXIX-CXIX in FIG. A01.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in a state where they are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portion formed on the ball throwing unit 970 is It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

To explain in detail, in the first ball throwing section 942g and the inflow port 982d, the second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d is arranged inside the first recessed notch 942g1 formed at the first ball throwing section 942g. Further, in the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, a protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside a second recessed notch 942c1 formed on the second ball throwing portion 942c.

Further, the second ball throwing section 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall section 981b of the distribution unit 980 are arranged in an internal space surrounded by an arm section 962e formed in the drive unit 960 and a wall section 962f.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a first member communicating with the first passage of the first member. A game machine is known that has two passages and a second member disposed on the back side of the game board. The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and flows into the second passage on the back side of the game board. Pass through 2 passages. Thereby, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front and back direction, which can provide interest to the player.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball will be inhibited, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member will be ensured. You are requested to do so. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the first member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, it is necessary to invert the game board. This requires a separate step of forming a positioning hole just for the second member, which is not practical.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 are placed between the opposing projections 962g of the drive unit 960. Wall 942d is inserted. When the ball throwing unit 970 is disposed in the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 970 is inserted between the opposing arm portions 962e from which the protruding portion 962g is protruded.

That is, the drive unit 960 includes a protruding portion 962g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. Equipped with. Thereby, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located on the outer side of the pair of second ball throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940 in the opposing direction. As a result, the protruding portion 962g of the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970, so that the front unit The positioning of the ball throwing unit 970 relative to the ball throwing unit 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the purpose of positioning the ball throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is to suppress positional deviation (level difference) from occurring at the connecting portion between the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. (The connecting part between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b) can be directly positioned by the guide part 962b (arm part 962e), compared to the case where other parts are positioned by the guide part 962b. The occurrence of positional deviations (level differences) can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed in the inner space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 while being disposed in the front unit 940. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide an opening for arranging the drive unit 960. In other words, the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second ball sending part 942c and the side wall part 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as an arrangement space, so that the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly. , it is possible to reduce product costs.

As described above, since the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed (formed so as to be able to be held) in the front unit 940 including the second ball throwing portion 942c, the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are provided on the front and back surfaces of the game board 13. When attaching each ball throwing unit 970, there is no need to separately attach the drive unit 960, and by attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of attachment can be improved accordingly.

Furthermore, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the protruding portion 962g and arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball throwing portion 942c, respectively. Ru. Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, it is necessary to engage the projecting part 962g and the arm part 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball throwing part 942c, respectively. There is no need to do this separately. Therefore, the installation workability can be improved accordingly.

Further, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed to be able to engage with the ball throwing unit 970 from the opposite side of the front unit 940, so that By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back of the base plate 60 after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. can. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other, and when the front unit 940 and drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f are connected to the front unit 940. The above-mentioned displacement member 966 is disposed between facing the back base 941. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the projections 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are inserted, in the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 can be blocked from the outside by the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960, and it is possible to suppress dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, the sliding movement of the protruding portion 966a is prevented from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and the pair of wing members can be stably opened or closed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state between the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b will be described as a representative example. 120(a) and 121(a) are partially enlarged sectional views of the game board 13 in range CXXa in FIG. 119, and FIG. 120(b) and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 along the line -CXXb. In addition, in FIGS. 121(a) and 121(b), a state in which the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120(a) and 120(b) is illustrated. Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, a distance L38 between the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 and the rolling surface 981c1 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which the game ball flowed down from the first passage member passes. machine is known. However, in this structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected, misalignment between them is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There was a problem in that a step was formed at the connecting part, which could impede the smooth flow of the game ball.

Moreover, the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60, respectively, as described above. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (thickness is increased), there is a risk that the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may become separated in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 120(a)). There is. In that case, there was a problem in that a gap was formed between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b, which could hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball can It is possible to make the timing of passing through the step and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, the gap K1 of the space formed between the game ball rolling part 943a of the second ball sending part 942c and the game ball rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall part 981b, and the second ball sending part The gap K2 of the space formed between the second recessed part 942c1 of 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall part 981b is formed at a different position in the rolling direction of the game ball (left and right direction in FIG. 121(a)). . Thereby, the game ball rolled from the second ball throwing part 942c to the side wall part 981b can be suppressed from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance that the game ball receives can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from stopping in the gap between the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, a displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the sliding groove 966a2 is formed linearly, but the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment is formed on both outer sides in the lateral direction of the displacement member 8966. It is provided with a recessed portion 8966a6 recessed toward the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the thickness direction at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in front view is formed larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and when the displacement member 8966 is disposed in the front unit 940, a Two winning openings 140 are arranged.

The displacement member 8966 also has a protrusion 966a that protrudes from one end (top in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) in the transverse direction (horizontal direction in FIG. ) and a bulging portion 966b that bulges out from the back side (toward the front side in FIG. 122).

The protruding portion 966a has a sliding groove 8966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the thickness direction, and contact portions 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the transverse direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Be prepared.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted, and extends in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and has a recess 8966a6 on the outside in the lateral direction on the other side in the gravity direction (gravitational direction). It is recessed toward the upper side (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension of the concave portion 8966a6 in the short direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusion 945b. Further, the moving side side surface of the protrusion 945b extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (left-right direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction is the same as that of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, at least a part of the protrusion 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 is connected to the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be restricted by contacting the protrusion 945b.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slid to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), so that the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is moved to the recess 8966a6. It can be extracted from inside. Thereby, the protrusion 945b can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2, and the protrusion 945b can be displaced.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, it is possible to restrict the drive from being transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 By releasing the engagement with the protrusion 945b, the protrusion 945b can be displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the displacement member 8966 is slid to one side in the gravity direction (downward in the gravity direction). Furthermore, since the recessed portion 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (the direction of gravity), it can receive the protrusion 945b as the displacement member 8966 slides. Therefore, the state in which the protrusion 945b is received in the recess 8966a6 can be easily maintained by using the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 8966.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the distal end of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is disposed inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, but in the ninth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is The tip of the connecting hole 966b1 protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit 8960 and a displacement member 966 in the ninth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) correspond to FIG. 96(a). Further, in FIG. 123(a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 123(b), the wing member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forcibly opened) by the player and changed from the closed state to the open state. An engaged state in the middle of displacement is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment is bent when viewed from the side, and has a distal end portion 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a distal end portion 9965a. The rotary portion 965b is connected to the rotary portion 965b and extends toward the connecting member 964.

As in the seventh embodiment, the width of the tip portion 9965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as it moves away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 9965a has an insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 at the distal end, and an upstanding portion protruding from the connecting side with the rotating shaft 965c toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). 965f.

The insertion portion 9965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1, and the tip end thereof is formed in the connecting hole 966b1. Projected from 966b1. In addition, the insertion portion 9966e includes an engaging portion 9965e3 that protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and an engaging portion 9965e3 that bulges out from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. A bulging portion 965e1 is formed.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed to protrude in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and is formed at a position where the abutting surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotating shaft 965c side is separated from the front surface of the displacement member 966 by a slight gap. be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123(b), when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y (the other side in the gravity direction), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact and the transmission is transmitted. Displacement of member 9965 can be regulated.

To explain in detail, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y, the abutted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 abuts the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. . In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y due to rotational displacement and is also displaced toward the rotation axis 965c. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by displacing the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotating shaft 965c. This restricts the displacement of the transmission member 9965, and therefore the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of arrow Y is similarly restricted.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the coupling member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 rotates before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are connected to each other. Contact can be suppressed. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the transmission member 965, the displacement member 966 can be displaced.

As described above, the projections 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are connected to the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other, so that rotation of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member 945 from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 9965e and an engagement portion 9965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 9965e, and allows the displacement member 966 to be displaced with the wing member 945 closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged with each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

Next, referring to FIG. 124, a transmission member 10965 and a displacement member 10966 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is only disposed inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, but in the tenth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 10965 The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connecting hole 10966b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

124(a) and 124(b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit 10960 and a displacement member 10966 in the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 124(a) corresponds to FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 124(b) corresponds to FIG. 96(b). Further, FIG. 124(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 124(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment is bent when viewed from the side, and has a distal end 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a distal end 10965a. It is formed from a rotating part that is connected to the connecting member 964 and extends toward the connecting member 964 side.

As in the seventh embodiment, the width of the tip portion 10965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as it moves away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 10965a has an insertion portion 10965e inserted into a connecting hole 10966b of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, and a rotating shaft 965c that protrudes toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with an upright portion 965f.

The insertion portion 10965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connection hole 10966b. In addition, the insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 that protrudes from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and a bulging portion that bulges toward the inner surface of the connecting hole 966b1 from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed into a plate shape that is curved around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is disposed inside a recessed portion 10966d of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, when the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 includes an abutment surface 10965e4 on the side surface (inner surface) on the rotating shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed to face a contact surface 10966dc of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, with a predetermined gap in between when the wing member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124(a)) at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c when viewed from the front is larger than the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 and the second ball throwing section 942c (see FIG. 88), and the second opening 966c is in a state where the second ball throwing section 942c is inserted inside. It will be placed in Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area via the second winning opening 140 can be suppressed from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 10966 also has a protrusion 966a that protrudes from one end in the longitudinal direction in the transverse direction, a protrusion 966b that protrudes from the other end in the longitudinal direction toward the back side, and a protrusion 966b on the opposite surface of the protrusion 966b. It mainly includes a recessed portion 10966d.

The recessed portion 10966d is recessed so as to be continuous with the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and includes an abutted surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The contact surface 10966d1 is formed by being curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above when the wing member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap with the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are placed facing each other and separated from each other. Further, the abutted surface 10966d1 includes an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed to be inclined toward the back side toward the one side abutted portion 966b2 side. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed radially inward from the abutted surface 10966d1 centered on the rotating shaft 965c.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the distance dimension between the opposing portions from the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 to the one side abutted portion 966b2 is the insertion portion in a front view with the wing member 945 closed. It is set larger than the width dimension L39 in the gravity direction of 10965e (see FIG. 124(a)). As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the abutment surface 10965e4 is displaced toward the back side, and the abutment surface 10965e4 and the abutted surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other, thereby restricting the rotation of the transmission member 10965. This can be suppressed.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven to displace the wing member 945 to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. be done. As a result, the transmission member 10965 is rotated about the rotating shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, so that the transmission member 10965 rotates around the rotation shaft 965c. When the contact surface 10965e4 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a slight gap from the contact surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, since the distance between the opposite contact portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 and the one side contact portion 966b2 is formed to be larger than the width L36 of the transmission member 10965, the transmission member By rotating 10965, insertion portion 10965e disposed inside recess 10966d of displacement member 10966 can be brought out to the outside of recess 10966d. Thereby, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slid and displaced. Therefore, the pair of wing members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

Further, when displacing the pair of wing members 945 from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 slides along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the abutted surface 10966d1. By doing so, it is possible to displace the engaging portion 10965e3 inside the recessed portion 10966d while displacing the displacement member 10966 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is displaced to the open state, when the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slid and displaced with the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 disposed inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced along with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 10966, the engagement portion 10965e3 is displaced toward the back side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 contacts the contact surface 10966d1 of the recessed portion 10966d, and rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is regulated. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, one side abutted portion One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction is brought into contact with the insertion portion 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction (bulging portion When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the gravity direction to the position where the transmission member 965e1) comes into contact, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released, so that the transmission member 10965 can be displaced without rotating. Slide displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly protected from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated to a position where the engagement portion 10965e3 comes out from the inside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 can be slid to the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

Next, the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been explained, but the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment is arranged from the second winning opening 140. The ball is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment. 126(a) and 126(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that FIG. 126(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 126(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the front unit 940 in the eleventh embodiment has a pair of second guide walls 11942b extending in the direction of gravity on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the opposing second ball throwing portions 942c is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second ball throwing portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b have first tooth surfaces 11942b1, which are gear tooth surfaces, formed on opposing sides thereof. Further, the pair of second guide walls 11942b are set so that the distance between them facing each other is larger than the width dimension in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126(a)) of the displacement member 11966, which will be described later. will be placed.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is meshed with a first gear GY1 that is pivotally supported by a displacement member 11966, which will be described later. Thereby, by slidingly displacing the displacement member 11966, the first gear GY1 that meshes with the first tooth surface 11942b1 can be rotated.

The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed as a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a second member 11968 disposed in a displaceable state on the first member 11967, and an axis attached to the first member 11967. The first gear GY1 is supported and meshed with the second member 11968.

The first member 11967 has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the thickness direction at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The first member 11967 also has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and a second opening 966c on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c. It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e that protrude in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction.

The support portion 11966d is provided to protrude toward the first member 11967, and its tip is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. Thereby, the first gear GY1 can be rotatably supported by the first member 11967.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is provided to protrude toward the first member 11967, and its tip is inserted into the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. Thereby, the second member 11968 can be disposed on the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material into a plate-like body that is substantially gate-shaped when viewed from the front, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126(a)), and a A sliding groove 11968b formed through the plate thickness direction in the form of a long hole along the extension direction of the two tooth surfaces 11968a1 (vertical direction in FIG. 126(a)) and a horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in a gate shape. The blade portion 11968c is formed to include a blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction on the end face extending from the side.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are meshed with the first gear GY1, respectively. Thereby, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both horizontal sides of the second member 11968 where the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in the shape of a long hole along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding protrusion 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted into the sliding groove 11968b. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slid relative to the first member 11967 by the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 is rotationally displaced by the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and The second member 11968 is displaced in the direction in which the second tooth surface 11968a1 extends.

The blade portion 11968c is formed to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and its lower end portion is lower than the inner surface of the second ball throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the gravity direction when the wing member 945 is closed. , is placed on the other end side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the tip of the blade part 11968c can be placed on the other end side in the direction of gravity than the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140.

Further, the protruding distance of the second ball throwing portion 942c is set to a length such that the second ball throwing portion 942c comes into contact with the back side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the opposing second ball throwing portions 942c is set to approximately the same position as the tip position of the second ball throwing portion 942c. Thereby, the end of the rolling surface flowing from the second winning opening 140, the blade part, and 11968c can cut the foreign matter inserted into the inside of the second winning opening 140.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126(a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is moved to the rolling portion 943a. Since the tip of the second ball sending part 942c can be disposed lower than the tip of the second ball throwing part 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 may be cut off by unauthorized operation while no drive is being transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When 945b is forcibly opened, the displacement member 11966 can restrict the flow of game balls entering from the second prize opening 140.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, thereby displacing the second member 11968. Note that the amount of displacement of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 is displaced twice as much as the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140 The ball can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the ball, by a distance greater than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, it is possible to allow the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140 to flow down.

That is, the second member 11968 crosses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second prize opening 140 when the displacement member 11966 is slid from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where it is closed, and also crosses the edge of the path. (the ends of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c), so it is possible to cut the illegal object that is illegally inserted into the rolling path of the game ball from the second prize opening 140. I can do it.

For example, a detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) that glues the tip of a thread to a game ball, causes the game ball to enter from the second winning opening 140, and passes through the rolling part 943a, detecting the passage of the game ball. ), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the player multiple times by manipulating the other end of the string (feeding out, pulling) and causing the game ball to reciprocate. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the eleventh embodiment, even if the game ball described above is entered with the wing member 945 open, the displacement member moves from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where it is closed. 11966 (second member 11968) is slid and the blade part 11968c crosses the path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c, the blade part 11968c cuts the middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball. At the same time, when the blade part 11968c is brought into frictional contact with the edges of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, the blade part 11968c and The thread can be cut between the rolling part 943a or the edge of the second ball throwing part 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Next, the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. In the seventh embodiment, the displacement member 966 is not placed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140, but the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment is moved from the second winning opening 140. The ball is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment. 128(a) and 128(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that FIG. 128(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 128(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the front unit 940 in the twelfth embodiment has a pair of second guide walls 12942b extending in the direction of gravity on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the protruding distance of the second ball throwing part 942c and the rolling part 943a is set short, and the protruding tip surface is set to a position where it comes into contact with the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966, which will be described later. Ru.

Further, on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940, there are provided a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 that protrude toward the displacement member 12966 side. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are inserted into shafts of a first gear GY1 and a second gear GY2, which will be described later, respectively, and can pivotally support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has contact portions 12942b2 protruding in opposite directions on one end side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) of opposing side surfaces thereof. The distance between the pair of opposing contact portions 12942b2 is set to be slightly larger than the width in the lateral direction of the first member 12967, which will be described later. Thereby, the first member 12967 can be disposed between the pair of abutting portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a plate-shaped body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a second member 12968 disposed in a displaceable manner on the first member 12967, and a pivot support on the rear base 941. It is formed mainly of a first gear GY1 that is rotated and meshed with the first member 12967, and a second gear GY2 that is pivotally supported by the rear base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on its outer peripheral surface, and as described above, is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the back base 941, and the tooth surface is connected to the first member 12967 and the second gear. It meshes with GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two stages of gears each having a different size, and is formed with a small-diameter gear GY2a on the small-diameter side and a large-diameter gear GY2b on the large-diameter side. Further, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the rear base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1, and the teeth of the large diameter gear GY2b are engaged with the first gear GY1. The surface is mated to second member 12968.

The first member 12967 is formed from a metal material, and has a second opening 12966c formed therethrough in the thickness direction at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The first member 12967 also has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the short direction of the first member 12967 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 12966c, and a second opening. It is formed with sliding protrusions 12966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides of 12966c in the lateral direction, and third gear tooth surfaces 12966f on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.

The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 12966c when viewed from the front is set larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. Further, the second opening 12966c is provided with a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed to be inclined downward from the rear base 941 side toward the second member 12968 side, which will be described later. The second opening 12966c is such that when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140, and the pair of wing members 945 is closed. In the open state, the second blade part 12966c2 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is provided to protrude toward the second member 12968, and its tip is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 12968b of the second member 12968. Thereby, the second member 12968 can be disposed on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are meshed with the first gear GY1, respectively. Thereby, the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slidably displaced in accordance with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, so that the first gear GY1 can be rotated. Moreover, as described above, the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2 is meshed with the first gear GY1, thereby allowing the second gear GY2 to rotate.

The second member 12968 is formed from a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is disposed with a pair of extended portions oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). Further, the second member 12968 has a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface on the outside in the opposing direction of the pair of extending portions, and a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface along the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). A sliding groove 12968b formed in the form of a long hole penetrating the plate in the thickness direction, and a blade part 6683 on the end surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the connecting part that connects the pair of extended parts. be done.

As described above, the sliding groove 12968b is formed in the shape of a long hole along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a, and the sliding protrusion 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted into the sliding groove 12968b. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slid in the direction of gravity relative to the first member 12967 by the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 12968a are meshed with the large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2, respectively. Therefore, by rotating the second gear GY2, the second member 12968 is slid. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated by the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 by the transmission member 965. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be displaced as the first member 12967 is displaced.

Note that the directions of sliding displacement of the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 are set to be opposite to each other, and the amount of displacement of the second member 12968 is set to be large due to the displacement of the second member 12968 via the second gear GY2 having a small diameter.

The blade portion 6683 is formed to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and its upper end portion is located on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second ball throwing portion 942c when the wing member 945 is closed. ) on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). That is, the second member 12968 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps the first member 12967 when viewed from the front with the wing member 945 closed.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, they cross the rolling path of the game ball in the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, and also rub their edges against each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 (displaceable member 12966) are provided with the second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683, it is possible to cut the illegal object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the second prize opening 140. can.

For example, the tip of a thread is glued to a game ball, and the game ball enters from the second prize opening 140 and passes through the rolling path of the game ball of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, and the detection device SE4 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 is detected multiple times by manipulating the other end of the string (feeding out, pulling) to make the game ball reciprocate in a state where the game ball has reached the detection position. In order to deal with such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the pair of wing members 945 open, the pair of wing members 945 will be displaced from the open position to the closed position. When the second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683 cross the path of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is inserted between the pair of second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683. Can be pinched and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the second member 12968 has the blade part 6683 on the other side in the gravity direction than the rolling surface (rolling part 943a) of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 when the wing member 945 is open. Placed. As described above, when the feather member 945 is open, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140. Therefore, in the state where the pair of wing members 945 are opened, the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140 can be passed between the blade part 6683 and the second blade part 966c2.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 can block the rolling path of the game balls flowing into the second winning opening 140, so the displacement distance of the second member 12968 is The number can be smaller than the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in can flow into the rolling path at the timing when the pair of wing members 945 are closed. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a drive unit 13960 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 through three members, the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965, and the displacement member 966. However, in the thirteenth embodiment, the solenoid 610 Transmission of drive from the blade member 945 to the wing member 945 is performed by one member. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 129(a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 129(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXIXb-CXXIXb in FIG. 129(a). In addition, in FIG. 129(b), only the external shape of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is illustrated with a chain line for easy understanding. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of wing members 945 is closed, and the shaft portion 961b is extended from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are opened.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 in the thirteenth embodiment is disposed on the back side of the specific winning a prize unit 950 (right side in FIG. 129(b)), and the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is (vertical direction in FIG. 129(b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 includes a base portion 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and an end portion of the base portion 7658 on the front unit 940 side that is erected toward the protrusion 945b side of the wing member 945. and an engaging portion 13965j.

An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base 7658 at an end opposite to the engaging portion 13965j. Thereby, by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in its axial direction, the transmission member 13965 can be slid.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position that overlaps the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129(a)) in a rear view (or front view). Furthermore, the length of the engagement portion 13965j is set to exceed the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, so that the engagement portion 13965j overlaps the protrusion 945b when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, a supporting portion 13965j1 having a substantially C-shape in side view projects from the upright end of the engaging portion 13965j. In the support portion 13965j1, the dimension between opposing sides inside the opening is set to be larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the opposing direction of the pair of engaging portions 13965j (left-right direction in FIG. 129(a)) is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be disposed inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

Therefore, as described above, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid in the direction of gravity, the engaging portion 9965j is slid in the direction of gravity, and the projection 945b is displaced in accordance with the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are disposed on the back side of the plate member 951. A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, by consolidating the installation space for the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, space for arranging other members and devices can be created on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 (second prize winner). It can be secured on the back side of the opening 140), and the space can be used more effectively.

Next, a displacement member 14966 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. In the seventh embodiment, the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape in front view of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965. However, in the fourteenth embodiment, the displacement A case will be described in which the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 130(a) and 131(a) are rear views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 130(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXb-CXXXb in FIG. FIG.

In addition, in FIG. 130(a) and FIG. 131(a), the outer shape of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the closed state of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut. The open state of the pair of wing members 945 in the case where the blade member 945 is opened is illustrated. Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is formed at a position farther away from the second winning a prize opening 140 than in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the displacement member 14966 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. It is formed to penetrate in the plate thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 130(b)).

The displacement member 14966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 130(a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130(a)) in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130(a)), and It includes a bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 130(b)) to the back side (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The bulging portion 14966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back side base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed in the inner portion when viewed from the back. The connecting hole 14966b1 is an opening into which a tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of a drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

The connecting hole 14966b1 has an inner edge having a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is connected to a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130(a))). , and a contact portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner circumferential surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the separation distance L40 between opposing sides in the gravity direction (from the other side abutted part 966b3 to the one side abutted part 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion part 965e in the gravitational direction. When the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3.

In addition, the connection hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction from the separation distance L40 between the opposing sides in the gravity direction (from the other side abutted part 966b3 to the one side abutted part 14966b2). It is set larger than the distance L42 from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 minus the diameter of the game ball (L40-L41)>(L42-Game ball) diameter). Thereby, when the displacement member 14966 falls to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the rolling path of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 can be blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

Next, a case where the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b). As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e, and when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the other side cover is Since the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), when the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut, one side is abutted. The displacement member 14966 is allowed to fall freely to one side in the gravity direction by the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connection hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is set larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)>(L42 - the diameter of the game ball), by allowing the displacement member 14966 to fall freely, the rolling path of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 can be blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

That is, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are not in communication with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b)), the displacement member 14966 Since a part of the game ball is placed in the path of the game balls flowing in from the second prize opening 140, for example, even if the projection 945b of the feather member 945 is cut and the feather member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second The flow of the game ball entered from the prize opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 14966.

Next, a drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is arranged and positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is positioned on the side wall portion 981b. It is arranged and positioned inside the portion 981b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

132(a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment, FIG. 132(b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. It is a diagram. FIG. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133(a). Note that FIG. 133(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a).

First, a drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment is formed into a box shape, and includes a first accommodating part 15962 and a second accommodating part 963, which are arranged facing each other. A solenoid 610 disposed in the space between the second housing part 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 964 that is pivotally supported by the first housing part 15962 and the second housing part 963. The transmission member 965 is connected to the transmission member 965.

The first accommodating part 15962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The drive unit 15960 is arranged in a space between a first accommodating part 962 and a second accommodating part 963 that are formed in a box shape and are arranged facing each other, and between the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963. Mainly includes a solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 pivotally supported by a first housing part 962 and a second housing part 963 and connected to the connecting member 964. be done.

The first accommodating part 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The guide portion 15962b includes a pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape in side view, a wall portion 962f connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e, and a wall portion 962f formed in a gate shape in front view. A protruding part 962g protrudes from the covering part 962a on the opposite side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 125)), and a protruding part 962g protrudes from the wall part 962f on the other side in the gravity direction of the pair of arm parts 15962e. The third arm portion 15962h is formed to protrude from the opposite side of the second arm portion 15962j with the wall portion 962f in between.

The arm portion 15962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side is bent toward the other side in the gravity direction (opposite to the solenoid 610 side) when viewed from the side. It is formed into an approximately L shape. Further, the protruding position of the arm portion 15962e in the direction of gravity is set below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm 15962j is connected to the inner edge of the wall 962f, and the distance L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set smaller than the width between the opposing arms 962e. In addition, the diameter is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the distance dimension of the second arm portion 15962j in the direction of gravity is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing sides in the direction of gravity of the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980, and when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are combined, It is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b.

Further, the distance dimension of the pair of second arm portions 15962j on the outside in the opposing direction is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the opposing sides in the horizontal direction of the side wall portions 981b. Thereby, when arranging the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) in the winning a prize opening unit 930, it can be positioned by arranging the second arm part 15962j inside the side wall part 981b.

The distance dimension between the third arm portions 15962h facing each other is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the opposing arm portions 15962e. Further, a protrusion 15962h1 is formed on the third arm 15962h to be connected to the end of the second arm 15962j on the back base 941 side.

The protruding distance of the protruding portion 15962h1 from the end of the second arm portion 15962j toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85) is set to be approximately the same as the concave dimension of the second concave notch 942c1. Further, the protruding portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed notch 942c1 when the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is arranged inside the second recessed notch 942c1.

Therefore, since the protruding portion 15962h1 and the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing when the game ball passes the step on the bottom side and the side surface The timing of passing the step on the side can be made different. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and the influence of both is dispersed, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can serve both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and is also a part of the passage path of the game balls flowing in from the second prize opening 140. becomes. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily tolerate dimensional effects or mounting overlaps.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second ball throwing portion 16942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second concave notch 942c1 of the second ball throwing portion 942c, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the second ball throwing portion 16942c The protrusion 16942c2 is arranged inside the recessed part 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(a), in the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the sixteenth embodiment, when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate, the upright end surface is the winning opening unit. It is formed in a size that makes contact with the tip of the second ball throwing section 16942c of the ball 930.

Further, the side wall portion 16981b includes a recessed notch 16981b2 recessed on the proximal end side of the protruding distal end surface. The concave notch 16981b2 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity, and its concave shape when viewed from the side corresponds to the side view shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball throwing section 16942c, which will be described later. is set almost the same as .

Thereby, when a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

Further, the recessed notch 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side, and the inner surface of the proximal end of the side wall 16981b is formed to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c can be suppressed from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the 16th embodiment, since the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, the game ball that collides with the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 can be pressed toward the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from jumping up and bouncing on the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed to protrude from the protruding distal end surface of the second ball throwing part 16942c, and its outer shape in side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed notch 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b. As a result, when a game ball rolling on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is thrown to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980, the game ball is transferred to the concave notch 16981b2 of the distribution unit 980. This can prevent it from getting caught inside. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game balls to smoothly pass (flow down) from the rolling portion 943a of the prize opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, the recessed part 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b and the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is placed on the bottom side. The timing at which the vehicle passes through the step on the side can be made different from the timing at which the vehicle passes through the step on the side surface. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Furthermore, according to the 16th embodiment, the recessed part 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side, so that the downstream end of the side surface of the second ball feeding part 942c and the rolling The downstream end of the bottom surface of the moving part 943a can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream bottom surface of the side wall section 16981b. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second ball throwing section 942c is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling section 943a, the upstream end of the side surface of the side wall section 16981b Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball throwing section 942c. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has relatively low rigidity and may break, but according to the 16th embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the direction in which the game ball passes, so if the protrusion 16942c2 breaks. Even in the case of The timing of passing through a step can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse the influence of both, allowing the game ball to flow down (pass) smoothly. be able to.

In addition, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the recessed notch 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, so that the rolling portion 943a It is possible to prevent the distribution unit 980 from shifting upward in the direction of gravity. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is at a higher position than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to be bounced up when riding on it. Compared to the opposite step, it tends to impede the smooth flow down (passage) of game balls. Therefore, being able to prevent the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b from shifting upward in the direction of gravity relative to the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second ball throwing portion 17942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, when the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall part 981b and the end of the second recessed part 942c1 of the second ball throwing part 942c are formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the rolling direction of the game ball when viewed from the side. However, in the seventeenth embodiment, the end portions of the second ball throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed to be inclined in side view. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the seventeenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134(b) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distributing unit 980 in the seventeenth embodiment has a distal end surface 17981b3 at its upright distal end inclined downwardly from the proximal end toward the distal end. . In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second ball sending part 17942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 is formed such that a tip end surface 17942c3 of its protruding tip surface is inclined upwardly along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling part 943a. In addition, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second ball throwing section 17942c is in a state substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall section 17981b mentioned above when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate. will be placed.

Therefore, since the side upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game ball. Compared to the case of (seventh embodiment), the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be made to slide along the slope and be less likely to be bounced back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

Furthermore, since the entire side upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, compared to the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having a concave cutout portion 16981b2 as in the sixteenth embodiment, for example. , stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. In addition, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape of the injection mold cavity (hollow portion) can be gently changed, suppressing air bubbles and filling defects, and improving moldability. You can improve your performance.

Next, a displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not placed on the rolling path of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball that enters from the prize opening 140. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

135(a), FIG. 136(a), and FIG. 137(a) are schematic diagrams of the winning opening unit 930 in the 18th embodiment when viewed from the back, and FIG. 135(b) is the same as that of FIG. 135(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning a prize opening unit 930 along the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). FIG. 137(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a).

Note that FIG. 135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 in the open state. The condition is illustrated. Moreover, in FIGS. 135(a), 136(a), and 137(a), only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966, and the second winning hole 140 are illustrated. In FIGS. 135(b), 136(b), and 137(b), only the pair of wing members 945, the back base 941, the front base 943, the displacement member 18966, the transmission member 19958, and the solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment has a larger outer shape in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135(a)) than the displacement member 966 in the seventh embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 has a non-transmission portion 18966a6 that is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extends in the gravity direction, and a sliding groove 18966a that extends from the lower end of the non-transmission portion 18966a6 in the gravity direction. A transmission portion 18966a7 is provided, which is bent and extended toward the center in the left-right direction.

In addition, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the through hole 966c1 is arranged lower than the second prize opening 140 in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, it is possible to restrict the game ball passing through the second prize opening 140 from flowing into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970 from the rolling part 943a.

Furthermore, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896g that is inclined toward the front side as it goes downward, on the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the direction of gravity of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is brought into contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second ball throwing portion 942c. That is, in a rear view, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 1896g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball throwing portion 942c are arranged at a position where they overlap.

Further, the transmission member 18958 in the eighteenth embodiment has a larger rotation range on the tip end 965a side when the solenoid 961 is driven than in the first embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension of the tip portion 965a side in the gravity direction is set large, and the displacement dimension is set larger than the opening dimension of the second winning a prize opening 140 in the gravity direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade part 1896g can be placed above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning opening can be placed inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in rear view. A mouth 140 opening may be located.

Further, as the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. When the projection 945b slides inside the sliding groove 18966a, the projection 945b first slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6, and then slides inside the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, since the extending direction of the non-transmission part 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the protrusion 945b with respect to the back base 942 changes when sliding on the non-transmission part 18966a6. It slides inside the non-transmission part 18966a6 without being transmitted. On the other hand, when the projection 945b slides on the transmission section 18966a7, it is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission section 18966a7. Thereby, the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members are in the open state, the game ball passing through the second prize opening 140 can be allowed to flow into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970 from the rolling part 943a.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, thereby rotating the wing member 945. In this case, as described above, the blade part 18966g of the displacement member 18966 is disposed below the inner peripheral edge of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity, and the front side surface is the protruding tip of the rolling part 943a and Since it comes into contact with the protruding tip of the second ball throwing part 942c, as the blade part 18966g moves downward in the direction of gravity, the second winning ball is generated between the blade part 18966g, the rolling part 943a, and the second ball throwing part 942c. The biasing object inserted onto the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140 can be cut off.

That is, when the displacement member 18966 is slid from the position where the pair of wing members 945 is opened to the position where it is closed, the displacement member 18966 crosses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second prize opening 140, and Since it is equipped with a blade part 18966g that rubs against the edge of the passageway (ends of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c), it is possible to avoid any damage caused by unauthorized insertion of the game ball from the second prize opening 140 into the passageway where the game ball is placed. You can cut off power.

For example, a detection device SE4 (Fig. 114 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 is detected multiple times by manipulating the other end of the thread (feeding out, pulling) and causing the game ball to reciprocate when the game ball reaches the point (see). In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the 18th embodiment, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing member 945 open, the displacement member moves from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed. 18966 is slid and displaced, and when the blade part 18966g crosses the path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the blade part 18966g and rolled. 18966g and the rolling part 943a or the second ball sending part 942c are pressed against the edge of the part 943a or the second ball sending part 942c, and when the 18966g is rubbed against the edge of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c. The thread can be cut between the edges. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, if the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut (broken) due to a fraudulent act by the player, the through hole of the displacement member 18966 966c1 is placed on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the player forcibly opens the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966 can restrict the flow of the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is biased by the solenoid 961 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) in a direction in which the distal end portion 18965a side is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is biased in the direction of closing the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are forcibly opened due to a fraudulent act by the player, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly opened in the same way. As a result, fraudulent acts by players can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments described above, a case has been described in which a total of four first blocks 653 and four second blocks 654 are disposed on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600, but this is not necessarily the case. The total number of first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and it may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the LED 651 is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side is explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in the front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is made incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 of the projection unit 600 are made of a light-transmitting material has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 may be formed from two layers of a light-transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

For example, the back side 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front side 642 side of the groove forming members 640, 2640 are formed of a layer of non-transparent material, and the projection plate member 620, 2620 side of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 is formed of a layer of non-transparent material. It may also be formed of a layer of transparent material. In this case, the layer of non-transparent material can prevent light emitted from other devices in the gaming area from entering the projection plate members 620, 2620. That is, light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transparent material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the projection plate members 620, 2620, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620), the light from other devices It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620, 2620 and patterns or designs are displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620.

Additionally, in this case, the layer formed from the non-transparent material is formed from a metal material or flexible material with high reflectance, or the layer formed from the non-transparent material is formed between the layer of the non-transparent material and the layer of the transparent material. It is preferable to use a metallic material or flexible material with high reflectance. This makes it easier to reflect the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 from the LED 651 onto the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflection section 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620, 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be made to stand out clearly.

In the first and second embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640, 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere), but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rear view 632 and the front part 642 are attached with a sticker of a material (such as silver foil or aluminum) that has a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, or a color with a higher reflectance is attached. (For example, white printing) may be applied.

In this case, the sticker or printing can prevent light emitted from other devices in the gaming area from entering the projection plate members 620, 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the projection plate members 620, 2620, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620), the light from other devices It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620, 2620 and patterns or designs are displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620, 2620.

Furthermore, by using a sticker or printing, it is possible to more easily reflect the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 from the LED 651 onto the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflection section 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620, 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be made to stand out clearly.

In addition, when a seal is attached, the seal may be attached in such a manner that it protrudes from the back surface 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface 642 of the groove forming members 640, 2640 toward the outer edge side. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. You may intervene.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is reliably totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance, and can be allowed to travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (amount of light) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3, and to strengthen the light reflected by the reflection section 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620. It can make patterns and designs stand out clearly.

Furthermore, the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance can prevent light emitted from other devices in the gaming area from entering the projection plate member 3620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is allowed to enter the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), light from other devices is reflected on the projection plate. It is possible to prevent patterns and designs from being incident on the member 3620 and being displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the means for biasing the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It may be a leaf spring. Note that the attachment method is exemplified by connecting the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823, or by attaching it between the rotating shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support 821 of the base member 820.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotated around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. 850 may slide in a guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravitational direction), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction can be controlled as in the first embodiment. Since the motion can be an orthogonal projection of a uniform circular motion and the displacement speed can be varied, the displacement member 850 can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surface of the gear member 630, 3630 or the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case as well, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident on the side end surface of the gear member 630, 3630 or the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate is Patterns and designs can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620.

Also, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is placed in a position where it does not face the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (i.e., the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is The light emitted by the LED 651 is arranged at a position different from the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 in the front-rear direction. The projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear member 630, 3630, and the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 may be arranged so that the portion is incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, the light is irradiated obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651 while irradiating other non-irradiation members different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 with light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651. Part of the light can be made incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used both as light for displaying patterns and designs on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and as light for irradiating other objects to be illuminated.

In the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments described above, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are arranged in parallel has been described. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Specifically, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed toward the back side, and the light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be irradiated. In this case, when a pattern or design is displayed on the surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light from the LED 651 leaks from the inner edge of the front base 612, 6612, which is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. can be suppressed.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed facing the front side, and the light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed to the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It may also be a position where the side end face is irradiated.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted toward the back side or the front side with respect to the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the installation position of the LED 651 is The position may be such that the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 are irradiated with light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted toward the back side or the front side with respect to the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the placement position of the LED 651 is adjusted. The position may be such that the front part 632 of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 or the back part 632 of the gear member 630, 3630 is irradiated with light irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651.

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620. Although a case has been described in which the amount of emitted light is increased, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by light incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased by increasing the amount of emitted light. The pattern or design may be different from the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620.

That is, by forming the projection plate member 5620 with an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside, and dividing the area of the reflecting portion 622 (for example, dividing it into three areas), the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 The light incident from the front side is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the first area, and the light incident from the left side is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the second area, and the light is emitted from the front side by the reflection unit 622 in the second area. The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the third region. Thereby, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns of patterns and symbols to be displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third areas are provided around the object to be irradiated (projection plate member 5620), and the first to third areas are irradiated (for example, The arranged light sources enter light from the top end and illuminate the first region, the light sources arranged on the left enter light from the left end surface and illuminate the second region, and the light sources arranged on the right enter the light from the right end. It is also possible to irradiate the third area by entering the light from the surface, but this requires the provision of a plurality of light sources, which poses a problem in that the product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that Since the irradiation direction of the light from the LED 651 arranged in the front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas: when irradiating the second or third area and when irradiating the first area. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be provided can be reduced accordingly, and an increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the direction of light irradiation of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is changed in accordance with the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be rotated by being connected to the shaft of a newly installed drive motor.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the sliding position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the direction of light irradiation from the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654. The amount of light emitted from the front can be partially increased or decreased. That is, by changing the direction of light incident on the projection plate member 5620, it is possible to change the shade of the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

In the first embodiment, a projection plate member 620, a plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and a gear that transmits the driving force of a drive motor 661 are arranged between the opposing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. Although a case has been described in which the columns (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit, the case is not limited to this. Two or more of the plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying patterns and designs on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize the combination of the patterns and designs displayed on each projection plate member 620. As a result, by changing the rotational position of each projection plate member 620, display patterns of a plurality of patterns and symbols can be formed, and the player's interest can be prevented from being lost.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the light from the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is disposed, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the bolt T may be made of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel), and the light projected onto the side surface of the bolt T may be reflected toward the center of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

In addition, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals to partially form areas on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 where the pattern or design is not displayed (light from the LED 651 is not incident). The display may be separated.

Furthermore, as described above, the ground plane of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A part where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, the light that is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 can be reliably suppressed from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light from the LED 651 disposed on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually perceive the projection plate member 620 as being displaced (rotated). .

Note that the displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation direction of each LED 651 disposed in the first block 653 and the second block 654 is displaced in different directions. It may be something.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments in any way, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. can be easily inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 945b is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed into a circular shape when viewed from the rear. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in an irregular shape in rear view or the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a curved manner, the protrusion 945b slides on the sliding groove 966a2, so that the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b changes. Therefore, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b is increased, the protrusion 945b becomes easier to move by the gap, and the wing member 945 becomes more likely to wobble.

On the other hand, by forming the protrusion 945b in a circular shape in rear view and by extending the sliding groove 966a2 linearly in the displacement member 966, the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 during the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 is formed. The gap between the projection 945b and the projection 945b can always be kept constant. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, since the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly along the direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening caused by recessing the sliding groove 966a2 can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the displacement member 966 can be improved.

In the seventh embodiment, the screw threaded into the annular protrusion 953c formed between the opposing detection devices SE1 is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a screw may be used to fasten and fix the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

In the fifth and twelfth embodiments, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is projected from the main body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. Although we have explained the case where For example, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, power may be applied to the main body portion 961a, and the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 may be in a state drawn inside the main body portion.

In this case, the displacement members 11966, 12966 have blade parts 11968c, 6683 and second blade part 12966c2 inserted into the rolling path of the rolling game ball of rolling part 943a and second ball sending part 942c. The illegal object (thread) can be cut using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) using electromagnetic force, the driving force thereof can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object using the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the fifth and twelfth embodiments, the coil spring SP1 is disposed in a compressed state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a. Although a case has been described in which the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is drawn into the interior of the main body portion 961a), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in an expanded state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. It may also be displaced in the direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the displacement of the blade parts 11968c, 6683 and the second blade part 12966c2 in the cutting direction (pinching direction) is performed using electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object using the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

In the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed from two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed as the second member 11968 having a larger displacement amount than the first member 11967. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member, and the amount of displacement of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965 may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of the one member.

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the annular projection 953c formed between the opposing pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is formed to protrude in an annular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1 may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as it moves away from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific prize opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when drilling is performed using a tool such as a drill, the direction of advance of the drill is set at the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (disconnected) by causing the wiring HS3 to shift (sideways) in the lateral direction (the direction away from the axis of the annular protrusion 953c in the radial direction) on the surface (the outer circumferential surface of the enlarged diameter portion).

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is visible to the player, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is visible to the player. A sticker on which information consisting of text or figures is displayed may be attached to the side.

In this case, since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the gaming area (front) side of the ball throwing path TR0, first path TR1, and second path TR2 of the sorting unit 980, the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930 ), even when viewing the distribution unit 980, the player can easily recognize the position of the distribution unit 980 by using the display as a landmark (reference position). Note that the form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, but may also be ink printing, two-color printing, or the like.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In the game machine, the transmission mechanism includes a drive unit that generates a drive force for rotating the drive unit, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive unit to the pair of wing members, wherein the transmission mechanism generates a drive force of the drive unit. a rotating member that is rotated by a rotating member; and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates; a protruding portion is provided protruding from one of the sliding member or the pair of wing members; A gaming machine A1 characterized in that a sliding groove into which the installation part is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. A game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive means to a pair of wing members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20111- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a protrusion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, opposing portions are formed on one end of the rotating member and are vertically opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and the protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the opposing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there was a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member was unstable because it was necessary to set a large gap between the opposing part and the protruding part. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for the opening/closing operation of the wing member, the attitude of the facing part is inclined with respect to the protruding part, and the distance between the facing parts is determined by the outer shape (thickness) of the protruding part. If it is the same as (a), the protrusion will interfere between the opposing parts, and the rotating member will not be able to rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the spacing between the opposing parts to a size that does not interfere with the protruding parts, and the gap between the opposing parts and the protruding parts increases accordingly. As a result, the wing members tend to wobble, making the opening and closing operations of the wing members unstable.

On the other hand, according to game machine A1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and includes a sliding member or a pair of sliding members. A protrusion is provided protruding from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, so that the sliding The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the sliding member is a sliding displacement and the attitude of the sliding groove is not inclined with respect to the protruding part, there is no need to avoid interference with the protruding part when rotating unlike the conventional product. Therefore, for example, by setting the width of the sliding groove to be equal to the size (thickness) of the protruding part, the groove width can be suppressed, so the gap between the sliding groove and the protruding part can be reduced. . As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

Note that the sliding groove may be a concave groove (indentation) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed such that the inserted protrusion can slide along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction perpendicular to the groove width direction).

A game machine A2 in the game machine A1, wherein the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the slide member is substantially displaced relative to the wing members. Can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member and extends in a straight line along a direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member. A gaming machine A3 is characterized in that it is extended in a shape.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1 or A2, the protrusion is provided protruding from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the protrusion can always be kept constant during the opening and closing operations of the wing member. Therefore, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Moreover, since the sliding groove extends linearly along the direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, the length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening caused by recessing the sliding groove can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the sliding member can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A3, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member, and the sliding member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the position of the protrusion at the time of starting is set below along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member.

Here, unlike the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, the sliding member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, so that the sliding member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation, the weight of the slide member is added, and the inertial force becomes large, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform an initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in a stopped state to open or close the wing member.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines A1 to A3, the protruding portion is provided protruding from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member, so that the sliding The position of the protruding part when the member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotating shaft of the wing member, so the protruding part is pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. It is possible to increase the horizontal direction component and reduce (minimize) the gravitational direction component of the displacement component of the part. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in a stopped state and opening or closing it can be performed smoothly.

A game machine A5 in the game machine A4, wherein when the slide member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which it is released.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the direction in which it is released. It can be rotated by its own weight. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) and opening it can be performed smoothly.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the inner wall of the sliding groove, which the protrusion comes into contact with when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity, includes the rotation axis of the wing member and A gaming machine A6 characterized in that an inclined surface is formed that is inclined with respect to a plane perpendicular to the direction.

According to the gaming machine A6, in either the gaming machine A4 or A5, the inner wall of the sliding groove that the protrusion comes into contact with when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity has a wing member. Since an inclined surface is formed that includes the rotation axis and is inclined with respect to a plane that is orthogonal to the direction of gravity, even if the position of the protrusion is set below the rotation axis of the wing member in the direction of gravity. By guiding the protrusion along the direction of the slope of the slope, it is possible to smoothly start the slide displacement of the slide member upward in the direction of gravity.

In addition, by forming an inclined surface on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only can the gap between the inner wall and the protrusion be made smaller, but also the protrusion can be brought into contact with the inclined surface. In addition to the displacement of the installation part in the direction of gravity, it is also possible to restrict displacement in the horizontal direction. Therefore, rattling of the wing member in the open or closed stopped state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibrations caused by the falling of game balls, the wing member can be easily maintained in the open or closed position.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove is recessed with a receiving part that receives the protruding part when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed; A game machine A7 characterized in that rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state in which the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives a protrusion when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed. When the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion, rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member is prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

A gaming machine A8 in the gaming machine A7, wherein the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion by sliding the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A7, since the sliding member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, the protruding part is received in the receiving part, so that the weight of the sliding member (self-weight) is reduced. ), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protruding part is received in the receiving part.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to close the wing member. a one-side abutted part with which one side of the abutting part comes into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, and a predetermined interval apart from the one-side abutted part in the direction of the sliding displacement. the other side abutted part that is arranged oppositely to the other side and is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member, the wing member In the closed state, one side of the abutting part is brought into contact with the one side abutted part, the projecting part is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other side abutted part is brought into contact with the other side abutted part. A game machine A9 characterized in that when the rotary member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting portion abuts, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and an overhanging portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member has the following effects: One side abutted part that comes into contact with one side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted part and the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval and is abutted by the other side of the abutment part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the sliding member is slid toward the one side, causing the wings to While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member slides towards the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is opened.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the abutting part is in contact with the one-side abutted part and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, so the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting part abuts at least the other side abutted part, the engagement of the overhanging part with the sliding member is released, so the rotation By further rotating the member toward the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side, and the wing member can be opened.

In gaming machines A1 to A8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes the sliding member or the pair of rotating members. A protrusion is provided protruding from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, and the rotation The member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. a one-side abutted part against which one side of the abutting part is abutted, and a one-side abutted part and the one-side abutted part arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement for opening the wing member. and an abutted part on the other side with which the other side of the abutting part abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the protruding part The slide member is disengaged from the slide member and is slid from a state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the projecting portion is engaged with the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes an abutting part and an overhanging part extending from the tip of the abutting part, and the sliding member has the following effects: One side abutted part that comes into contact with one side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted part and the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval and is abutted by the other side of the abutment part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the sliding member is slid toward the one side, causing the wings to While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member slides towards the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is opened.

In this case, when the slide member is slid from the state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one-side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion, the overhang portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhang portion is not engaged with the slide member, so by further rotating the rotary member toward the other side, the slide member is slid toward the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang part is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang part and one side contact part can be changed to allow rotation of the rotating member to the other side. It is necessary to form it into a specific shape, which makes the shape complicated. Therefore, not only the strength may decrease, but also the engagement may become more likely to be released. On the other hand, in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shape of the overhanging portion and one side contact portion can be rotated. There is no need to shape the member to allow rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified to ensure strength, but also a shape that is easy to maintain engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

Any of the gaming machines A1 to A10 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and when the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the A gaming machine A11 characterized in that a part of the slide member is disposed within the passage of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the gaming machine A11 includes a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the protruding portion is not disposed in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is placed in the passage of the passage member, so even if the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside by cutting the protruding part, the ball will not enter from the ball entrance. The sliding member can restrict the flow of the game ball.

Any of the game machines A1 to A11 includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the slide member slides the wing member from a position where it is opened to a position where it is closed. A game machine A12 characterized by comprising a friction contact portion that crosses the path of the passage member and rubs against the edge of the passage member when the member is slid and displaced.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, when the sliding member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, the sliding member crosses the passage of the passage member and the passage member Since the slide member is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge of the ball, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

For example, the end of a thread is glued to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the path of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects multiple times by manipulating (feeding out, pulling in) and moving the game ball back and forth. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, the slide member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed. When the rubbing part crosses the path of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing part crosses the passage member. When rubbed against the edge, the thread can be cut between the rubbed part and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that the frictional contact portion of the slide member is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (friction portion) may be formed from a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion with which the friction contact portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Further, it is preferable that the frictional contact portion and the portion (edge of the passage member) with which the frictional contact portion comes into contact with each other are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

Any of the gaming machines A1 to A11 includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the transmission mechanism is configured to displace the wing member from an open position to a closed position. A gaming machine A13 characterized in that it includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and bring their edges into rubbing contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the wing member crosses the passage of the passage member and touches each other's edges. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that come into frictional contact with each other, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

For example, the end of a thread is glued to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the path of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects multiple times by manipulating (feeding out, pulling in) and moving the game ball back and forth. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the pair of cutting members When the thread crosses the path of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip end is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that it is preferable that the pair of cutting members be formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that rub against each other) may be formed from a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that rub against each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the gaming machine A12 or A13, the drive means is configured to displace the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force and to displace the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The actuator is formed as a solenoid actuator that is actuated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A gaming machine A14 characterized by.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A12 or A13, the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A14, the rotating member includes an abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to engage the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. one side abutted part with which one side of the contact part abuts, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member arranged opposite to the one side abutted part. A game characterized in that the other side abutted part is abutted by the other side of the abutting part, and the one side abutted part and the other side abutted part are formed approximately at the center in the width direction. Machine A15.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines A1 to A14, the rotating member includes a contact portion, and the sliding member has an effect when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged opposite to the one side of the abutted part. The other side of the abutting part is provided with an abutted part on the other side, and the abutted part on the one side and the abutted part on the other side are formed approximately at the center in the width direction, so that rotation with the pair of wing members is provided. Changes in the posture of the slide member relative to the other members can be easily tolerated. Therefore, as the rotating member rotates, the sliding member can be smoothly slid and displaced, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of slidingly displacing the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member to open or close the pair of wing members, When the attitude of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and is also connected to the rotating member at two places, the slide member rotates with the pair of wing members. Changes in the attitude of the slide member with respect to the member are difficult to tolerate, and resistance occurs when sliding the slide member (i.e., rotating the rotating member), which prevents the wing member from opening or closing. . On the other hand, according to the present invention, the sliding member is connected to the pair of wing members at two locations and is connected to the rotating member at one location, so that one of the pair of wing members is connected to the sliding member at two locations. Even if the load from the game ball is applied to only one side, the change in attitude of the slide member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member can be easily tolerated.

Note that the approximate center in the width direction where the one-side abutted part and the other-side abutted part are formed is defined as passing through the approximate center between the pair of protruding parts when the pair of wing members are open or closed. , and means a position on an imaginary line along the direction of sliding displacement.

A gaming machine A16 in the gaming machine A15, wherein the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the abutting part are set to be at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A15, the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the abutting part are set to at least three times the maximum external dimension of the protruding part. Changes in the posture of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member can be easily tolerated. In addition, it is preferable that the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the contact part are set to twice or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding part. This is because the above-mentioned attitude change tolerance can be more easily achieved.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
a first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and a second ball entrance. In a gaming machine comprising a second opening/closing member that opens or closes a mouth, and a second driving means for driving the second opening/closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are configured to drive the second opening/closing member. A gaming machine B1 is characterized in that it is arranged on the back side.

Here, a first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance; A game machine is known that includes a second opening/closing member that opens or closes a second ball entrance and a second driving means that drives the second opening/closing member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member, so the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member There was a problem in that it was difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the device, and it was difficult to use the space effectively.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening/closing member, so that space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the installation space for the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening/closing member, the space for installing other members and devices is freed up from the first opening/closing member (first entrance). It can be secured at the back of the ball opening), allowing for effective use of space.

A gaming machine B2 in the gaming machine B1, wherein a front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than a front projected area of the first opening/closing member.

A gaming machine B3 in the gaming machine B1 or B2, characterized in that the front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than the total front projected area of the first driving means and the second driving means.

According to the gaming machine B2 or B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the front projected area of the second opening/closing member is made larger than the front projected area of the first opening/closing member, or the first driving means Since the total front projected area of the second driving means is larger than that of the second driving means, the dead space on the back surface of the second ball entrance (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine B3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one direction being the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are connected to the second opening and closing member on the back side of the second ball entrance. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that opening/closing members are arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are connected to the second ball entering ball. Since they are arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction of the second opening/closing member on the back side of the mouth, the dead space on the back side of the second ball entry opening (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4, the first driving means and the second driving means include a main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft that drives the drive shaft and drives the main body. a drive unit housed in the main unit, and wiring that supplies power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit, and the first drive unit and the second drive unit move the drive shaft to the second drive unit. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture facing an opening/closing member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the first driving means and the second driving means include a main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft thereof. The first driving means and the second driving means move the drive shaft to the second drive shaft. Since it is disposed in a posture facing the second opening/closing member, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily integrated.

In the gaming machine B5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving shaft and wiring are arranged on the outer surface of the main body. A game machine B6 characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where one outer surface, excluding the outer surface, is substantially flush with each other.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving portion of the outer surface of the main body Since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the one excluding the outer surfaces on which the shaft and the wiring are arranged are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means Even if the two drive means have different outputs and the sizes of their main bodies are different, the shape of the shield plate for separating the first drive means and the second drive means from other regions can be simplified.

That is, when the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body portion and the other main body portion form a step. It becomes necessary to form a shield plate by bending it along the step, and the shape of such a shield plate becomes complicated. In contrast, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the main body are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step, so that the shield plate can be made into a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

Note that the shield plate is a shield plate that separates the area where the first drive means and the second drive means are disposed from other areas (for example, the area where the detection sensor and control board are disposed), and between the two areas. A barrier made of a conductor for restricting (suppressing) the flow of electromagnetic fields, and is formed, for example, as a metal plate.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, a first passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the first ball entry port and a passage for a game ball entered into the second ball entry port are provided. and a first transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening/closing member, and the first opening/closing member is rotated to a position sandwiching the ball entrance. The first transmission mechanism includes a pair of wing members that are pivotably supported to open or close the ball entrance, and the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first drive means and is configured to rotate the first passage member and the second passage. A game machine B7 comprising: a rotating member disposed between the members; and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the transmission mechanism between the first passage member and the second passage member is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means. Compare this with conventional products in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member, as it is equipped with a rotating member disposed in the rotary member and a sliding member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members. Thus, space can be secured on both sides (lateral sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entry port. In addition, unlike conventional products, there is no need to bend the first passage member toward the second passage to avoid interference with the rotating member, so the first ball entrance can be moved closer to the second ball entrance. I can do it.

In gaming machine B7, the rotating member includes a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the sliding member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. A game machine B8, wherein the first part is bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B7, the rotating member includes a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the sliding member. Since the first part is bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, the sliding amount of the slide member can be secured while the first part is driven by the first drive means. The distance between the slide member and the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension (distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the sliding member) of the first portion is determined by the distance from the rotating shaft to the sliding member in the present invention. If the distance is set equal to the straight line distance to the part where the sliding member is located, the amount of sliding of the sliding member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the sliding member increases and the overall size increases. . On the other hand, when the first portion is formed linearly and the length of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, Although the distance between the drive means and the slide member can be made the same as in the present invention, the amount by which the slide member slides becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the sliding amount of the sliding member is ensured, and the sliding distance between the first driving means and the sliding member is secured. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

A game machine B9 in the game machine B8, wherein the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first portion opposite to the slide member.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first portion opposite to the slide member, so that the first portion is bent. By effectively utilizing the space created by this, it is possible to downsize the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently disposed in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member, and the overall size can be reduced.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B9 includes a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is connected to the second opening/closing member and the first drive means. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that it is arranged between.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B9, the game machine B10 includes a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is set to the second opening/closing state. Since it is disposed between the member and the first drive means, for example, if the second opening/closing member is opened and the first drive means is tampered with from the second ball entrance, a part of the detection sensor will detect the first drive means. Since the drive means can be hidden, such fraudulent acts can be made difficult.

In this case, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure the path from the second ball entrance to the first drive means, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, fraud can be detected by monitoring the state of such detection sensors. In addition, in the present invention in which the first driving means is disposed on the back side of the second opening/closing member, even if the second opening/closing member is opened and tampering is done to the first driving means from the second ball entrance, By closing the second opening/closing member, the first drive means is shielded by the second opening/closing member, making it impossible to see the location where fraud has been committed, and therefore fraud can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. is particularly effective.

The gaming machine B10 includes a case member that accommodates the detection sensor, and a screw member fastened to the case member, and a pair of the detection sensors are provided, and at least a portion of each of the pair of detection sensors is provided. is arranged between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B10, at least a portion of each of the pair of detection sensors is disposed between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and is fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, the first drive means cannot be hidden by the screw member. This makes it more difficult for such fraudulent acts to occur. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with the pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of opposing detection sensors. By setting this as the fastening position of the screw member, the unshielded area in front of the first drive means can be supplemented by the screw member, thereby making it more difficult for fraudulent acts to occur.

Note that the case member may consist of two members and the screw member may be for fastening and fixing these two members together, or it may be for fastening and fixing another member to the case member. good. Moreover, it is preferable that the screw member is made of metal.

A gaming machine B12 in the gaming machine B11, wherein the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other, so that, for example, the second opening/closing member can be opened to open the second input. When tampering with the first driving means is attempted from the ball mouth, such tampering can be made more difficult.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure the path from the second ball entry port to the first drive means, the wiring may be damaged due to the unauthorized act. (disconnection) can be easily caused. Alternatively, it is possible to make the user recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (breaking) the wiring, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

In the game machine B12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wirings of the pair of detection sensors are wound around the seat portion.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wires for the pair of detection sensors are wound around the seat portion. , can be routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

In the gaming machine B12 or B13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening/closing member increases. Game machine B14.

According to the game machine B14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B12 or B13, the case member includes a seat portion to which a screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening/closing member increases. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second ball entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform hole-drilling, the direction of advance of the drill is set to the seat. Wiring can be easily damaged (broken) by causing it to shift laterally (slip) on the outer peripheral surface of the wire.

A game machine B15 characterized in that, in any of the game machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the opposite side to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member, so that the wiring is connected to the first driving means. can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes; a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member; a second member disposed on the back side of a game board; a first engaging part that engages with the first member; and a second engaging part that engages with the second member. A game machine C1 characterized by comprising a third member having the following.

Here, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member. A gaming machine is known that includes a second member disposed on the back side of the gaming board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and flows into the second passage on the back side of the game board. Pass through 2 passages. Thereby, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front and back direction, which can provide interest to the player.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball will be inhibited, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member will be ensured. You are requested to do so. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the first member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, it is necessary to invert the game board. This requires a separate step of forming a positioning hole just for the second member, which is not practical.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the third member has the first engaging part that engages with the first member and the second engaging part that engages with the second member, the third member It is possible to position the second member with respect to the first member using the following.

In the game machine C1, the game board is formed with an opening, and includes an opening in which a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space, and the opening A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the third member is disposed in an internal space of the gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the gaming board is formed with an opening, and the connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space. Since the third member is disposed in the internal space of the opening, there is no need to separately provide an opening for disposing the third member. In other words, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arranging space for the third member, the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly, leading to a reduction in product cost. can be achieved.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the third member is configured such that the first engaging portion engages with the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging portion engages with the second passage of the second member, respectively. A game machine C3 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine C3, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, the third member has the first engaging part in the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging part in the second passage of the second member, respectively. Since they are engaged, the second member can be effectively positioned relative to the first member. That is, the purpose of positioning the second member with respect to the first member is to suppress positional deviation (level difference) from occurring in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, but the purpose of positioning the second member with respect to the first member is Since the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage can be directly positioned by the third member, positional deviations (level differences) can be effectively prevented compared to the case where other parts are positioned by the third part. can be suppressed to As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down.

In the gaming machine C3, a gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a part of the inner wall of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member, so that the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage are reduced. Tolerances or installation tolerances can be more easily tolerated.

A gaming machine C5, which is any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, wherein the first member is formed to be able to hold the third member.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed to be able to hold the third member, so the first member and the second member are attached to the front and back of the game board. When attaching each member, there is no need to separately attach the third member, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine C5, a first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member when the third member is held by the first member. .

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C5, when the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After the first member and the third member are attached to the game board, there is no need to perform a separate operation to engage the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed to be able to engage with the second member from the opposite side to the first member. A game machine C7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member engages the second member from the opposite side of the first member. Therefore, by attaching the second member to the back of the game board after simultaneously attaching the first member and the third member to the game board, the second member of the third member can be engaged with the third member at the same time as the attachment operation. The two engaging portions can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In any of gaming machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is disposed, and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the third A gaming machine C8 characterized in that the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C5 to C7, the first member has a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixed to or integrally formed with the fixing member, the third member can be held (arranged) in the first member at the same time as the fixing member is fastened and fixed to the main body member. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first member and the second member to the game board.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first member is formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and is rotated to a position sandwiching the ball entrance and the ball entrance which is communicated with the first passage. a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported and open or close the ball entrance; a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members; and a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members; a transmission mechanism for transmitting transmission to the member; the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means; and a sliding member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members. A gaming machine C9, characterized in that the third member is formed to be able to guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a pair of rotating members that are slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. Since it is equipped with a slide member that opens and closes the pair of wing members, compared to the conventional product in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by a rotating member, the blade members can be opened and closed on the back side of the ball entrance and on both sides (sides) of the first passage. space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed to be able to guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the sliding displacement of the sliding member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine C9, the pair of wing members are provided with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the slide member, and the slide member is provided with a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted, A game machine C10 characterized in that the third member includes a covered surface portion facing an opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the pair of wing members are provided with a protruding part that protrudes toward the sliding member, and a sliding member through which the protruding part is slidably inserted is provided. Since the slide member includes a sliding groove, and the third member includes a covering surface facing the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the sliding member, the sliding of the slide member is prevented by the covering surface of the third member. By shielding the opening of the groove from the outside, it is possible to suppress dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, the pair of wing members can be stably opened or closed while preventing the sliding movement of the protrusion from being obstructed by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove.

<About the concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
A ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, a rolling surface on which a game ball rolled after entering the ball entrance, and the rolling surface thereof. A gaming machine D1 comprising a passage member into which game balls rolling on a surface flow, wherein a plurality of said passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, the ball entrance is formed such that a game ball can enter therein, an opening/closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, and a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. Gaming machines are known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-3092). The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. One ball is poured into the ball. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance of the game ball (length of the rolling surface) from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member increases accordingly. Therefore, it takes time for the ball to reach the passage member, and by the time the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, another game ball may enter the ball from the entrance, which causes the problem that over-winning is likely to occur. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, even when the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance of the game ball to the passage member (rolling surface (length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time it takes to reach the passage member is shortened by that amount, and the water can flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A game machine D1 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry hole, and the detection sensor is disposed at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, it is equipped with a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the detection sensor is disposed at the connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball entering the ball entrance can be detected more quickly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a first guide means having a first inclined surface that is inclined from the ball entry hole toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball rolling on the rolling surface. , the ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means is located at one end of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. and the passage member.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first inclined surface is inclined from the ball entrance toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means extends along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is disposed between the side end and the passage member, when a game ball enters from near the longitudinal end of the ball entrance, the game ball is guided by the first inclined surface of the first guiding means. By guiding it to the passage member, it is possible to prevent it from getting stuck at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that enters from the ball entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. This can prevent over-winning.

A game machine D4, which is any one of the game machines D1 to D3, and includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member. .

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member. Therefore, the rolling surface can receive game balls rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide them to the passage member. That is, when the game ball rolls in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, it can be suppressed from passing through the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that enters from the ball entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. This can prevent over-winning.

A gaming machine D5 in the gaming machine D4, wherein the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D4, the guide grooves extend linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The game ball rolling in the direction can be easily received into the guide groove, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (flowed) into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine D4 or D5, characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball, so when a plurality of game balls are received in the guide groove, The game balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In any of gaming machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is disposed. A gaming machine D7 characterized in that the second area is formed with a downward slope toward the first area.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface has a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is disposed. The second area on the opposite side of the area is formed with a downward slope toward the first area, so a game ball that enters the second area or a game ball that rolls from the first area to the second area. can be quickly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the downward slope of the second region. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine D7 comprising a second guide means protruding from the second region of the rolling surface.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D7, since it is provided with the second guide means protruding from the second region of the rolling surface, the rolling speed is increased due to the downward slope of the second region. The game ball can be decelerated before the passage member. That is, by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (just before) the passage member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second area through the passage member to the first area. . Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In a game machine D7 or D8, the game is arranged in a second region of the rolling surface and is rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface in the second region of the rolling surface toward the passage member. A gaming machine D9 comprising a second guide means formed to be able to guide a ball to the ball entry side.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D7 or D8, the second area of the rolling surface is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is directed toward the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the second guide means is formed to be able to guide the game balls rolling along the path toward the ball entrance side, the game balls whose rolling speed has been increased due to the downward slope of the second area are guided in front of the passage member. It can be slowed down. That is, by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (just before) the passage member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second area through the passage member to the first area. . Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine D10 in the gaming machine D9, wherein the opening/closing member is disposed at a position where a gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact when the ball entry opening is open.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D9, when the ball entrance is open, the opening/closing member is disposed at a position where the game balls rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact. The game ball guided toward the ball entrance by the second guide means can be brought into contact with the opening/closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the game machine D9 or D10, the second guide means has a side edge opposite to the first guide means that is inclined in a direction away from the ball entry hole as it becomes farther away from the first guide means, and A gaming machine D11 characterized in that its upper surface is sloped downward toward the side opposite to the first guide means.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D9 or D10, the second guide means is separated from the ball entrance as the side edge on the opposite side of the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. Since the upper surface is tilted downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, the game ball can be prevented from flying out from the ball entry hole and quickly flow into the passage member. can be done.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region facing the passage member, for game balls whose rolling speed is relatively low (slow), the ball is rolled from the ball entrance. Since the risk of the ball flying out to the outside is low, by making it come into contact with the side edge of the second guide means and guiding it toward the ball entrance side, it is possible to prevent the ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. By suppressing this, it is possible to flow into the passage member faster. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided to the first area (first guide means) by being made to climb over the upper surface of the second guide means. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by climbing over the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and it is possible to reliably decelerate the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from jumping out of the entrance hole and to quickly flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the gaming machine D11, the second guide means has a side edge facing the first guide means extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and extends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is larger than the dimension of the side edge of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine D12.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D11, the dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is larger than that in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the size is larger than the side edge of the second guide means, the game ball that has climbed over the top surface of the second guide means can come into contact (collide) with the first guide means and be reliably decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily located near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

A gaming machine D13 in the gaming machine D11 or D12, characterized in that a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball is included in the side edge of the second guide means.

According to the game machine D13, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D11 or D12, since the side edge of the second guide means includes a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball, the upper surface of the second guide means The game ball that has climbed over can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge of the first guide means, thereby being able to be reliably decelerated and easily positioned near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

A gaming machine D14, which is any one of the gaming machines D8 to D13, wherein the second guiding means is located on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in the inclined direction.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D8 to D13, the second guiding means is located on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in the inclined direction, so that the first guiding means Even if the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of , can be decelerated and can be easily located near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

The gaming machine D14 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and sloping downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member, and the second guide means is formed from the bottom surface of the guide groove. A game machine D15 characterized in that the height dimension to the top is larger than the radius of the game ball.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D14, it is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is Since the height dimension from to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is increased. When the ball is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact with (collide with) the second guide means. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated, and can be easily positioned near the passage member, and can be caused to quickly flow into the passage member.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D15 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member, and the guide groove has a groove width. The game machine D16 is characterized in that the size decreases toward the passage member.

According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D15, the gaming machine D16 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member. Since the groove width of the guide groove becomes smaller toward the passage member, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface comes into contact with (collides with) the side wall of the guide groove, causing The rolling direction of the game ball can be easily changed to the direction toward the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
A game machine comprising a ball entry unit having a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged, The game board has an opening formed in the board thickness direction, and the ball entry unit has the ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is disposed on the front side of the game board. and a second unit having a second passage disposed on the back side of the first unit through an opening of the game board and connected to the first passage. A gaming machine E1 characterized by.

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball entrance unit is arranged. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one with a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while reusing the game board. can. However, in the game machine described above, since the ball entry unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space in advance in front of the game board, for example, according to the maximum number of passages. Therefore, when using a ball entry unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem in that space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the ball entry unit has a ball entrance and a first passage connected to the ball entrance, and a first passage disposed on the front side of the game board. The second unit is provided on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and has a second passage connected to the first passage. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and there is no need to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passages) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one with a different number of second passages), you can reuse the game board and change the specifications of the game board. The space in front of the can be used effectively.

In the gaming machine E1, at least a part of the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit, and the second unit has a smaller outer shape than the first unit. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is arranged in an overlapping position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and the second unit has a smaller external shape when viewed from the front. Since it is disposed at a position overlapping one unit, the second unit can be seen by the player through the first unit, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential that the game board be made of a light-transmitting material; for example, the game board may be made of plywood, or a sticker may be pasted on the game board. Since it is also permissible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

A gaming machine E3 in the gaming machine E2, wherein at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, at least the front side of the second passage of the second unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that the flow of water through the first unit and down the second passage of the second unit is made of a light-transmitting material. It is possible to make the game ball visible to the player and increase the interest of the game.

Note that the first unit may be entirely formed from a light-transmitting material. Furthermore, when only a portion of the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion of the second unit that overlaps with the second passageway is formed of a light-transmitting material when viewed from the front. This is because the falling of the game ball can be visually recognized, increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E3, since the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material, When the second unit is made visible to the player, the player can easily understand the positional relationship in the front and back direction between the first unit and the second unit. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball changes its position in the front-back direction and flows down, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E4, a gaming machine E5 is characterized in that information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the front side of the second passage of the second unit.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit can be visually recognized through the first unit. Even in such a case, the player can easily recognize the position of the second passage (front-back direction position) by using the display as a landmark (reference position). Note that examples of the display mode include printing with ink, pasting of a sticker, two-color molding, and the like.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second passageway includes a second upstream passageway connected to the first passageway, and a plurality of second branch passageways branched into a plurality of lines from the second upstream passageway. and a plurality of second connection passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit being disposed on the back side of the first unit and connected to the second upstream passage. and a second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connection passages are formed, A gaming machine E6 characterized in that detection sensors for detecting passage of game balls are disposed in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the gaming machine E6, in any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second unit is disposed on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which a plurality of second connecting passages are formed, and detects passage of game balls through the plurality of second branch passages. Since detection sensors are installed, for example, when changing the second upstream unit to another unit with fewer second branch passages to manufacture a game machine with different specifications, the number of detection sensors installed can be reduced. It can prevent workers from making mistakes.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are disposed in the second connecting passages, it is possible to arrange the detection sensors for the number of second connecting passages, but for example, in the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed, When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it would be sufficient to install one detection sensor, but only one detection sensor would be required for the number of second connecting passages. There is a possibility that a detection sensor will be installed. On the other hand, if the structure is such that a detection sensor is installed in the second branch passage, when changing the second upstream unit to another unit, the number of detection sensors that correspond to the unit will be installed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of the arrangement.

In the gaming machine E6, the first unit includes a second ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entry port passes. A detection sensor is formed across each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage that is formed in the second downstream unit. A game machine E7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E6, the first unit is provided with a second ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, and when a game ball is inserted into the second ball entrance. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed across each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is passed through a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensors for detection are arranged, the detection sensors arranged in the second unit can be distributed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

In the gaming machine E7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit directly or indirectly engage with each other. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by aligning the second unit with the first unit.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passage of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Since the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by engaging directly or indirectly, positioning can be performed even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so the position where the second passage is connected to the first passage is the same. By directly or indirectly engaging the or the third passages with each other for positioning, it is possible to position the first unit even if it is a separate unit.

In addition, the purpose of positioning the second unit with respect to the first unit is to prevent positional deviation (level difference) from occurring at the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target part (the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting part between the third passages) can be positioned, the positional deviation ( (steps) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game balls can be caused to flow down smoothly.

In any of gaming machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit, and the protruding A gaming machine E9 characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a portion of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. At the same time, since a receiving part is formed in the second downstream passage to receive a part of the protruded detection sensor, the positioning of the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit is performed by the engagement of the detection sensor and the receiving part. It is possible to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole by suppressing a portion of the detection sensor from protruding outside.

In the gaming machines E1 to E6, the first unit includes a second ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entrance passes. is formed between at least the second branch passage in the second unit.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E1 to E9, the third passage through which the game ball entered the second ball entry hole passes is located between at least the second branch passage in the second unit. Therefore, the second unit can be made smaller.

In any one of gaming machines E1 to E10, the second passage has a bent portion bent from the front side to the back side of the second unit, and an inner surface of a wall portion on the outside of the bent portion in the bent portion. A gaming machine E11, characterized in that an upright portion is erected from above, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines E1 to E10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the bending portion is bent from the front to the back of the second unit. An upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outside of the bend in the portion, and the wall portion on the outside of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downstream direction of the game ball. To make it easier for a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down a curved part of a passage. In other words, by erecting the erected portion from the inner surface of the wall on the outside of the bent portion, the rigidity of the passage is increased and durability is improved, and the game ball is placed along the tip of the erected portion. While the curved part can be guided and flowed down smoothly, the upright part is located in front of the game ball when viewed from the front, so the game ball is hidden by the upright part and the visibility of the game ball is reduced. decreases. On the other hand, by slanting the curved outer wall so that it is located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball, it is possible to ensure rigidity and guide the game ball while also allowing the wall to stand upright. Since the thickness of the installation part in the front and back direction can be reduced, visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
A game machine comprising a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowed down from the first passage member pass. , a game machine F1, characterized in that at least a bottom upstream end on the bottom side and a side upstream end on the side side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. .

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which the game ball flowed down from the first passage member passes. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in this structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected, misalignment between them is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There was a problem in that a step was formed at the connecting part, which could impede the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the game machine F1, at least the bottom upstream end on the bottom side and the side upstream end on the side surface of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. , the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom side (the upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the side surface side (the upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

In the gaming machine F1, a gaming machine F2 is characterized in that a position spaced apart by a radius of the game ball from the upstream end of the bottom surface is included in the upstream end of the side surface.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, since the side upstream end includes a position spaced apart by the radius of the gaming ball from the upstream end of the bottom surface, the gaming ball moves from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), such a game ball can be inscribed in the upstream end of the side surface. That is, the position of the step on the bottom surface side and the position of the step on the side surface side, which are affected by the game ball, can be reliably made different in the direction of passage of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the game ball being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and it is easier to disperse these influences, so the game ball can flow down (pass through) smoothly. ) can be done.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, of the downstream ends of the first passage member, a bottom downstream end on the bottom side and a side downstream end on the side side are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the first The passage member includes a protruding piece that protrudes from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and whose protruding tip is the downstream end of the side surface; A gaming machine F3, comprising a recessed portion that receives the protruding piece and a portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first passage member projects from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and its protruding tip is connected to the downstream end of the side surface. In addition, the second passage member includes a recess provided at its upstream end to receive the protrusion piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protrusion piece is the upstream end of the side wall. A side downstream end and a bottom downstream end of the member can be proximate to a side upstream end and a downstream side end of the second channel member. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface, the game ball reaches the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively low rigidity and there is a risk of breakage, but according to the game machine F3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the direction of passage of the game ball). Even if the protruding piece is broken, the bottom upstream end and the side upstream end of the second passage member can be maintained at different positions in the direction in which the game ball passes, and the game ball can The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (the upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Further, according to the game machine F3, since the game machine protruding piece is formed in the first passage member and the recess is formed in the second passage member, the side surface of the recess is brought into contact with the protruding piece, so that the first It is possible to restrict upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member. In other words, at a level difference where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be bounced up when riding on it. Compared to a step in which the upstream end of the second passage member is at a lower position, the smooth flow down (passage) of the game ball is likely to be inhibited. Therefore, as in game machine F3, the ability to restrict upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member means that the upstream end of the second passage member is at a higher position than the downstream end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress the formation of steps, and it is particularly effective for the smooth flow of game balls.

In the gaming machine F3, a gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F3, since the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member Compared to the case where the game ball is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be made to slide along the slope, making it difficult to bounce back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

A gaming machine F5 in the gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the second passage member The side upstream end of the upstream ends can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, compared to the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member is not allowed to slide along the slope. You can make it harder to bounce back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F5, the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined, so compared to, for example, a case where it is formed in a shape (step-like) having a protruding piece or a recessed part. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stress concentration and ensure the durability of the passage member. In addition, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the injection mold cavity (hollow part) can be gradually changed, suppressing air bubbles (air trapping) and filling defects, and molding. It is possible to improve sexual performance.

In the gaming machines F4 and F5, a gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be sloped downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine, the side surface of the second passage member The game ball that collides with the upstream end can be pushed toward the bottom side. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from jumping up and bouncing at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

<About the concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In the game machine, the game machine includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the drive means, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, wherein the pair of wing members move from the outside in an opening direction. A gaming machine G1, wherein the transmission mechanism is configured to be able to regulate displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction when the wing members are displaced.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry hole, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball entry hole. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means, the pair of wing members are placed in a permissible position that allows entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means disposed at a regulating position that regulates the entry of game balls into the ball entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is arranged at the permissible position, thereby preventing the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members from entering the ball entrance. You can let the ball enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is placed in the regulating position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball will be directed to the ball entrance. It is possible to restrict the ball being thrown into the ball.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so for example, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside, it is possible to displace the regulating means from the regulating position to the permissible position. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of regulating game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the pair of wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forced open. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members. A receiving part is recessed in the inner wall of the blade member to receive the protruding part when the slide member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed, and when the protruding part is received in the receiving part, the receiving part is recessed. , a gaming machine G2 characterized in that rotation of the wing member is regulated.

According to gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives a protrusion when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed. When the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion, rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member is prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

A game machine G3 in the game machine G2, wherein the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, since the sliding direction of the sliding member is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, the wing member is displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Therefore, even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the protruding portion and the receiving portion, a sliding displacement component of the slide member is less likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forced to open.

Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

A gaming machine G4, which is the gaming machine G2 or G3, wherein the protruding part is received in the receiving part by sliding the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2 or G3, since the sliding member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, the protruding part is received in the receiving part, so that the weight of the sliding member is reduced. (self-weight) can be used to easily maintain the state in which the protruding part is received in the receiving part.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is , comprising an abutting portion and an overhanging portion protruding from a tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate the rotating member toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and the one side of the abutted part and the one-side abutted part are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. the other side abutted part with which the other side of the abutment part abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the one side abutted part to a position where one side of the abutting part is abutted and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other side of the abutting part abuts the other side abutted part. A game machine G5 characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the projecting portion with the sliding member is released.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the rotating member includes an abutting part and an overhanging part extending from the tip of the abutting part, and the sliding member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutting part comes into contact with the one side abutted part, and the one side abutted part is spaced apart from the one side abutted part by a predetermined interval in the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged facing each other and which is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated towards the other side in order to open the wing member, so that the rotating member is on one side. When the wing member is rotated to , the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the slide member is slid toward the one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member is slid towards the other side. , the wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the abutting part is in contact with the one-side abutted part and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, so the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting part abuts at least the other side abutted part, the engagement of the overhanging part with the sliding member is released, so the rotation By further rotating the member toward the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side, and the wing member can be opened.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is , comprising an abutting portion and an overhanging portion protruding from a tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate the rotating member toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and the one side of the abutted part and the one-side abutted part are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. and an abutted part on the other side with which the other side of the abutting part abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the protruding part When the sliding member is disengaged from the member and is slid from the closed state of the wing member to a position where the one-side abutting portion abuts one side of the abutting portion. , a game machine G6, wherein the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the rotating member includes an abutting part and a projecting part extending from the tip of the abutting part, and the sliding member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutting part comes into contact with the one side abutted part, and the one side abutted part is spaced apart from the one side abutted part by a predetermined interval in the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged facing each other and which is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated towards the other side in order to open the wing member, so that the rotating member is on one side. When the wing member is rotated to , the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the slide member is slid toward the one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member is slid towards the other side. , the wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid from the state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one-side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion, the overhang portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhang portion is not engaged with the slide member, so by further rotating the rotary member toward the other side, the slide member is slid toward the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang part is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang part and one side contact part can be changed to allow rotation of the rotating member to the other side. It is necessary to form it into a specific shape, which makes the shape complicated. Therefore, not only the strength may decrease, but also the engagement may become more likely to be released. On the other hand, in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shape of the overhanging portion and one side contact portion can be rotated. There is no need to shape the member to allow rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified to ensure strength, but also a shape that is easy to maintain engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

Any of the game machines G2 to G6 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and when the protrusion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the A gaming machine G7 characterized in that a part of the slide member is disposed within the passage of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G2 to G6, the gaming machine G7 includes a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the protruding part does not fit into the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is placed in the passage of the passage member, so even if the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside by cutting the protruding part, the ball will not enter from the ball entrance. The sliding member can restrict the flow of the game ball.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In a game machine comprising a drive means for generating a drive force for rotating the ball, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, the game ball inserted into the ball entry hole. A game machine H1 comprising a passage member forming a passage, and a part of the transmission mechanism traverses the passage of the passage member when displacing the wing member from an open position to a closed position.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. A game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive means to a pair of wing members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20111- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side, the wing member is opened or closed.

In this case, for example, the end of the thread is glued to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects the ball multiple times by manipulating the other end (pulling out or pulling it) to move the game ball back and forth. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem in that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent activity in which the tip of the thread is glued to the game ball and the detection sensor is detected multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so the thread whose tip end is glued to the game ball The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game balls, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that are caused to be detected by the detection sensor multiple times.

In the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism causes the slide member to cross the path of the passage member and rub against the edge of the passage member when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising a frictional contact portion.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism allows the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position, and the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member. Since the ball is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball enters the ball with the wing member open, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the friction portion of the slide member crosses the path of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the friction contact part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the friction contact part is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the friction contact part and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that the frictional contact portion of the slide member is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (friction portion) may be formed from a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion with which the friction contact portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Further, it is preferable that the frictional contact portion and the portion (edge of the passage member) with which the frictional contact portion comes into contact with each other are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub their edges against each other when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. The gaming machine H3 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a pair of blades that cross the passage of the passage member and rub their edges against each other are provided. Since the transmission mechanism is provided with the cutting member, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pair of cutting members cross the path of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be cut by sandwiching it between a pair of cutting members. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that it is preferable that the pair of cutting members be formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that rub against each other) may be formed from a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that rub against each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine H2 or H3, the drive means is configured to displace the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force, and also displace the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The actuator is formed as a solenoid actuator that is actuated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A game machine H4 featuring the following.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H2 or H3, the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and having a reflective portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end face of the light transmitting member, the light transmitting member being made of a light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. In the gaming machine, the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is set to a high proportion of the light emitted from the light irradiation means, in which the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the output increasing means is provided outside the display area.

Here, the light transmitting member is formed into a plate shape from a light transmitting material and has a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating light to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the gaming area, under normal conditions, the display on the liquid crystal display device can be viewed by the player through the light transmitting member. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmission member, and the light traveling inside the light transmission member is reflected by the reflection part. Then, the light is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflective section is provided with a plurality of groups each consisting of a plurality of reflective surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or design. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member as a pattern or design. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, patterns and designs can be made to appear (display) on the front of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the light reflected by the reflective portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly highlight (display) patterns and designs. In this case, increasing the output of the light irradiation means not only increases cost and power consumption, but also increases the amount of heat generated, causing problems in that the heat affects other members and equipment.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the output increasing means increases the proportion of the light emitted from the front side of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light emitting means, so that the light is reflected by the reflecting part. The light emitted from the front of the transparent member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it is difficult to be seen by the player, and deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition, the formation position of the reflection part of a light transmission member may be sufficient as the back surface of a light transmission member, or the inside of a light transmission member may be sufficient as it, for example.

A gaming machine I2 in the gaming machine I1, wherein the output increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along an outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I2, the output increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means is emitted onto the side end face of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected on the outer edge member can be made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the amount of light that is incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member is accordingly reduced. Light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light irradiation means that reaches the reflective part of the light transmitting member, so that the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , it is possible to clearly highlight (display) patterns and designs. Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this way, the output increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member, so that when another device in the gaming area emits light, In this case, the outer edge member blocks the light from such other devices, thereby preventing the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the light-transmitting member, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the light-transmitting member), light from other devices may not enter the light-transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress patterns and designs from being displayed on the front side of the light-transmitting member.

In the gaming machine I2, the gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front and back sides of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the outer edge member is disposed on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, so that part of the light emitted from the light irradiation means is absorbed by the light transmitting member. The light that is not directly incident on the side end face and deviates to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that deviates to the back side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and is made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased.

Furthermore, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light-transmitting member in this way, even when light emitted by other devices in the gaming area reaches the light-transmitting member from either the front or back side, Since the light can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the light-transmitting member, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the light-transmitting member), light from other devices may not enter the light-transmitting member. This makes it possible to more reliably suppress patterns and designs from being displayed on the front side of the light-transmitting member.

A gaming machine I4 in the gaming machine I2 or I3, wherein the outer edge member is disposed to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is The light can be reflected by the protruding portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member), thereby making it easier for the light to enter the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased.

A gaming machine I5 in any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, wherein the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine I5, in the effect produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, since the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed from materials having the same refractive index, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is difficult to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface of the outer edge part (boundary with air) and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light that returns from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflecting section is reduced. On the other hand, as in game machine I4, by forming the outer edge member from a material with a smaller refractive index than the light-transmitting member, light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can be transferred between the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or it can be totally reflected) at the boundary with the reflective part, it is possible to ensure that the light reaches the reflective part.

A gaming machine I6 in any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, wherein the outer edge member is arranged with a predetermined gap formed between the outer edge member and the front or back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine I6, in the effect produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected at the front or back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is difficult to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface of the outer edge part (boundary with air) and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light that returns from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflecting section is reduced. On the other hand, by arranging the outer edge member with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member, as in the game machine I5, the light is not incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the front or back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, it is possible to ensure that the light reaches the reflecting portion.

Any one of the gaming machines I2 to I6 includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and , a curved rack gear is carved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism rotates a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and the pinion gear. A gaming machine I7 comprising a driving means.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines I2 to I6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and extends along the circumferential direction of the outer circumferential surface or inner circumferential surface of the annular shape. The rotating mechanism includes a pinion gear that meshes with the curved rack gear on the outer edge member, and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, thereby allowing the light transmitting member to rotate together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member serves both the role of condensing the light irradiated from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmission member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the light transmission member and rotating it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

Any one of gaming machines I2 to I7 includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and A gaming machine I8, characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface thereof, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I2 to I7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and a guide groove is provided along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotation mechanism is provided with a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed due to the action of these guide grooves and the support ring. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can enter from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the player can visually recognize the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can serve both the role of focusing the light irradiated from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, thereby reducing product cost and improving reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

Note that the support ring may be rotatably supported, or may be fixed in a non-rotatable manner. In this case, the supporting wheel may be guided along the guide groove in a manner in which the rotatably supported support wheel rolls or slides along the guide groove, or in a manner in which it is non-rotatably supported. An example is illustrated in which a fixed support ring slides along a guide groove.

In addition, in a gaming machine I8 subordinate to the gaming machine I7, the outer edge member on which the curved rack gear is engraved is placed on one of the front or back side of the light-transmitting member, and the outer edge member on which the guide groove is recessed is placed on the light-transmitting member. It is preferable to arrange them on the other side of the front side or the back side. That is, by disposing the outer edge members on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means does not directly enter the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the light emitted from the light transmitting member does not directly enter the side end face of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and can be made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In addition, by disposing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light-transmitting member, light emitted by other devices in the gaming area can reach from either the front or back side of the light-transmitting member. Even in such a case, the light can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, and it is possible to suppress the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine I8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape such that its outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined distance, and the opposing gap between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine I9 characterized in that it is a groove.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape such that its outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined distance, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member Since the opposing gap between the two is used as a guide groove, the structure including the light transmitting member and the outer edge member can be downsized. That is, by having one inner wall of the guide groove on the front or back side of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member to have a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transferred to the front side of the light transmitting member. Or it can be made easier to reflect on the back (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has a direction in which light is irradiated from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine I10 characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture perpendicular to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means Since the irradiation surface is arranged to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in such a manner that the direction of light irradiation from the surface is perpendicular to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated with light from the light irradiation means. It is possible to easily reflect the light incident from the front or rear surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<About the concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture with each irradiation surface facing the target member, the plurality of light emitting means The present invention includes one or more substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and formed to be elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Features of gaming machine J1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged with their irradiation surfaces facing the target member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -29735). According to this gaming machine, by emitting light from the light emitting means and making it enter from the outer circumferential surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting part. The light can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant forms the target member into a disk shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflective part, and at the same time, attaches a plurality of light emitting means to the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member) on the irradiation surface. A structure was devised (unknown at the time of filing of this application) in which the light emitting means is arranged so as to surround the target member in a posture facing toward the target member, and the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer circumferential surface of the target member.

However, it has been newly discovered that in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem in that a plurality of light emitting means must be arranged around the target member, which increases the time and effort of the arrangement work. In particular, it is necessary to arrange the plurality of light emitting means with their respective irradiation surfaces facing the outer circumferential surface of the target member (that is, in different directions), which also increases the labor and effort of the arrangement work. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or more board members are formed to be elastically deformable, and the board members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Since the base member is provided with a base member, the work of disposing at least two or more light emitting means can be completed by disposing one substrate member on the base member. Therefore, the effort required to arrange the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when a substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is elastically deformed and held in a predetermined posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to individually arrange a plurality of light emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing toward the outer circumferential surface of the target member, it is also possible to reduce the labor involved in disposing the light emitting means.

A gaming machine J2, which is a gaming machine J1, further comprising a block body formed to have higher rigidity than the base member and disposed on the base member, and the block body being held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1, it is provided with a block body formed to have higher rigidity than the base member and disposed on the base member, and the block body is held by the base member. By suppressing warping and bending of the substrate member, it is possible to easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, the attitude of the light emitting means is suppressed from being affected by warping or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine J2, the gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is disposed in a region of the substrate member where the block body is disposed.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the light emitting means is arranged in the region of the board member where the block body is arranged, so that the posture of the light emitting means is adjusted to prevent warpage of the board member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the effects of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be maintained even more easily.

In gaming machine J2 or J3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged at predetermined intervals on the base member, and the base member is held in a posture in which the base member located between the block bodies is elastically deformed. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being held on the body.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J2 or J3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the substrate member at predetermined intervals, and the substrate member located between the block bodies is made elastic. Since it is held on the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture (orientation of the irradiation surface) of the light emitting means is stabilized compared to the case where the base member directly holds the substrate member in an elastically deformed posture. be able to.

In any one of gaming machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the front side of the substrate member opposite to the target member. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being arranged on the back.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is located on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is disposed on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front side of the base plate member, and the head of the screw is protruded from the front side of the base member J6.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the board member, and the heads of the screws are protruded from the front of the board member, so that the light emitting means can be emitted. Can be protected by screw head. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, thereby suppressing damage caused by contact with the light emitting means.

In the game machine J6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two of the screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

Note that the two screws are preferably disposed along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws disposed in this manner, the movable member can be easily brought into contact with the heads of the screws, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J7, one of the base body or the block body is provided with a protrusion, and the other of the base body or the block body is provided with a fitting hole that receives and fits the protrusion. A gaming machine J8 characterized in that it is recessed.

According to gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines J2 to J7, one of the base body or the block body is provided with a protrusion, and a fitting is provided in which the protrusion is received and fitted. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body or the block body, by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, the block body can be arranged on the base body, and the labor of the installation work can be reduced. . In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one block body is positioned by fitting (temporarily fixed). ), the substrate member can be elastically deformed (bended) and the other block body can be fitted into the base member, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines J2 to J8, the block body has a recessed portion on the side that is disposed on the substrate member, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recessed portion of the block body. A gaming machine J9 characterized by:

According to gaming machine J9, in any of gaming machines J2 to J8, the block body is provided with a recessed portion on the surface on the side to be disposed on the substrate member, and the block body is disposed on the substrate member in the recessed portion of the block body. Since the electronic components are housed, the electronic components can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid damage caused by the movable member coming into contact with the electronic component.

<About the concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member. The machine includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position due to the action of gravity. disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction, and in a state where the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A game machine K1 characterized in that the gravitational force acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member are provided. A gaming machine is known that provides an effect by displacing a displacing member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position (e.g., one of the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area; When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the operation of the displacement member being displaced toward the overhanging position is performed as a game. A performance is performed for people to see. However, in the gaming machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. The displacement member is disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction toward the second position, and when the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately, a simple harmonic) is caused by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, centering on this balance position (predetermined position). ) can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be made into an orthogonal projection of a uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied to the displacement member from the driving means, the displacement member can be displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (orthogonal projection movement of uniform circular motion). Therefore, the variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. In other words, simply by switching whether or not to apply driving force from the drive means to the displacement member, variations in displacement can be increased, and there is no need to complicate the structure or control, which reduces product cost and improves reliability. It is possible to improve the results.

The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the displacement member has one end rotatably supported by the base member and the other end raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. Game machine K2.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. , when the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is canceled and the displacement member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, such The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only linear movement in the vertical direction but also rotational movement about the one end side as the center of rotation. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement.

The gaming machine K2 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. and a connecting member, one end of which is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the other end of which is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the transmission means includes a rotating member that is rotatably disposed on the base member and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means that is eccentric from the center of rotation of the rotating member. Since the connecting member is connected at one end to the position where the displacement member is connected and the other end is connected to the displacement member, application of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are prevented. When a displacement member is caused to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) due to a force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotary member of the force in the push and pull directions. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. Such a displacement member can be caused to perform interesting displacements.

In the gaming machine K3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotational center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member are The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially perpendicular to each other.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connection position of the rotating member and the connecting member Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and displacement member is approximately perpendicular to the direction connecting the The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the balance position (predetermined position), and the force component can be decreased in either direction of push or pull from the balance position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed approximately symmetrically about the balance position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a protruding portion that protrudes toward the other, and the predetermined position within the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced through the central range including the central range, the protruding portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the position is closer to the first position or the second position than the central range. A game machine K5 characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to , the protruding portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member is provided with a protruding part that protrudes toward the other, and between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range that includes a predetermined position within the movable range, the protruding portion is not opposed to the other rotating member or the connecting member, and When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range near the second position, the protruding portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so the application of driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released. When the displaceable member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement around the balance position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displaceable member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protrusion in the central range. On the other hand, in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the protruding portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other in the outer range, and the rotation of the member is prevented. Shakiness between the member and the connecting member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center range, and the center range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. Since the position of the displacement member is set within the range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member is adjusted by using the protrusion to suppress rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protrusion, which acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted toward the outer edge of the gaming area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is extended toward the center of the gaming area, In the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member is suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the performance of other members can be suppressed from being inhibited. When displacing from the first position to the second position (extended position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the production effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. .

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that, in the second position, the center of rotation of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. Game machine K7.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K6, in the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially aligned. Since it is located on a line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the direction of the push and pull will be toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member will be It is possible to create a state in which this does not occur (ie, a dead center). Therefore, when displacing the displacement member toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to sliding of the protruding portion and to displace the displacement member smoothly (quickly). After the displacement member is placed in position, the above-mentioned dead center action suppresses rattling of the displacement member, thereby improving the appearance and durability.

In any one of gaming machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes a contacting portion formed to be able to come into contact with the base member, and the contacting portion is configured to adjust the connection position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is disposed substantially on a straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member, and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member, with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. Game machine K8.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes a contact portion that is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the base member, and the contact portion is connected to the displacement member and the base. It is located substantially on a straight line connecting the connecting position of the members and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and on the opposite side from the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member in between. , when the displacement member shakes with respect to the base member, the abutting part of the connecting member comes into contact with the base member, so that the rotating member and the connecting part of the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member can rotate) It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft (with respect to the shaft support hole of the part connected to the shaft). As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<About the concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means includes a first drive means and a first drive means. and two driving means, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in different manners.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs effects by displacing the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge of the gaming area, but when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the displacement member An effect is performed in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position, and the player is made to visually recognize the movement of the displacement member that is displaced toward the extended position.

However, conventional gaming machines have had a problem in that the effect of the performance produced by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in conventional gaming machines, the displacement mode of the displaceable member (trajectory when the displaceable member displaces with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, so the performance due to the displacement of the displaceable member is limited to one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to perform a performance that would surprise the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by increasing or decreasing the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member will only increase or decrease, and the displacement mode (trajectory) will remain constant, so it will not be possible to create an effect that surprises the player. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the driving means includes a first driving means and a second driving means, and in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. Since the displacement member is displaced in different manners depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means, the effect of the performance by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. In other words, unlike conventional products in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced relative to the base member) is limited to one pattern, the effect does not follow one pattern, and one displacement member can be moved in at least two ways. Since it can be displaced in a normal displacement manner, by switching the displacement manner, it is possible to perform a performance that surprises the player.

In the gaming machine L1, a first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first driving means, and a first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the second driving means. a second member driven by a game machine L2, wherein a first portion and a second portion of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. .

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1, the first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first driving means; and a second member driven by the second drive means, the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member being at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side can be formed, while the second member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, a displacement mode can be formed in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to gaming machine L2, the two displacement modes are not formed by having the same center of rotation and different directions of rotation, but by having different directions of rotation and different centers of rotation. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and it is possible to easily perform performances that surprise the player.

In the game machine L2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protrudes from either the first portion of the displacement member or the first member. A game machine L3 is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first part of the displacement member or the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, or the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case where the first member and the second member are slidable on a curved trajectory. If so, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism that can continuously apply a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. For example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be used and the structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve durability and operational reliability.

In the game machine L3, a game machine L4 is characterized in that the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel, so that the first driving means or the second driving means In addition to a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated by driving only one of the drive means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is linearly displaced (for example, transversely) by driving both the first drive means and the second drive means. Embodiments can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, by switching the displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprise effect for the player.

In particular, according to the game machine L4, as for the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are different, and the type of displacement itself is different. (that is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is easier for the player to perform surprise effects.

In the gaming machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, a displacement in which the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine L5 characterized by a speed.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed of the member is different from that of the displacement member, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can not only be displaced (linear movement) parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but also can be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform performances that surprise the player.

Note that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , as in the present invention, it has become possible for the first time to utilize two driving means.

Any of the game machines L1 to L5 includes a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the second displacement member, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. Game machine L6.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines L1 to L5, the second displacement member is disposed displaceably on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means. When the displacement member is moved, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. , it is possible to increase the device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means. Therefore, by switching the displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a performance that surprises the player.

<About the concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiation means for irradiating light toward the target member, at least one or both of the target member or the light irradiation means is formed to be displaceable. A gaming machine M1, wherein the manner in which the target member is irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the light irradiation means.

Here, a game includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this gaming machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is disposed inside the displacement member, and a transparent part made of a light-transmissive material is provided on the front side of the displacement member (the surface facing the player). By irradiating the light section from the back side with the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize that a part of the displacement member (light-transmitting section) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light irradiation means irradiates the target member in a constant manner, there is a problem in that there is little change in the aspect visually recognized by the player, making it difficult to provide interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable, and the manner in which the target member is irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed by displacement of one or both of them. It is possible to change the way the player views the game. As a result, it is possible to easily keep players interested.

Examples of forms in which the light irradiation mode is changed include changes in the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means, and changes in the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member. For example, a form in which a combination of these forms is used, a form in which these are combined, etc.

A gaming machine M2, characterized in that the gaming machine M1 includes a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed movably on the base member.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed movably on the base member, so that the electricity of the light irradiation means This allows the wires to be kept in a fixed state, and the occurrence of disconnections can be suppressed to that extent.

The gaming machine M2 includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, allowing the player to see a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member, and allowing the target member to be exposed to light. It is formed in a plate shape from a transparent material and is provided with a reflecting part, and the light emitted from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting part and emitted from the front of the target member. A game machine M3 featuring the following.

Here, in the reflecting section, a plurality of groups each consisting of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a shape of a pattern or a design. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member as a pattern or design.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2, it includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, and allows the player to see a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, different parts of the target member can be made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position where a first group of a plurality of groups constituting the reflective section is visible through the opening, and a second position where the second group, which is a different group from the first group, is visible through the opening. When the target member is displaceable between the second position and the second position where the target member is visible through the opening of the shielding member, by placing the target member in the first position, the first group can displace the target member through the opening of the shielding member. While making the first pattern or pattern formed visible to the player, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. , the second pattern or pattern formed by the second group can be changed.

In this case, the target member is made of a light-transmitting material, so when displacing the target member in order to change the pattern or design that the player visually recognizes, the light from the light irradiation means must not be irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the target member is formed in a circular or annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular or annular shape. Game machine M4.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatable to the base member around the center of the circular or annular shape. Compared to the case where the target member can be slid and displaced, the target member can be arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols that the player can see through the opening of the shielding member. The space required can be reduced.

In the game machine M2, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape when viewed from the front and is provided with a reflective portion, and is configured to reflect light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end surface. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are distributed around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the side end surface of the target member. A gaming machine M5, wherein the target member is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular shape.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material in the shape of a circular plate and is provided with a reflective section, and is irradiated by the light irradiation means and is illuminated from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by a reflecting part and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the side end face of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible to make the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member visible to the player in the rotated state. can.

A gaming machine M6 in the gaming machine M5, wherein the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in a circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M5, since the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, the rotational position ( It is possible to easily keep the light emitted from the front of the target member constant regardless of the phase). That is, patterns and designs displayed by light emitted from the front of the target member can be stably formed.

A gaming machine M7, which is characterized in that the gaming machine M1 includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are disposed movably on the base member.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, since the light irradiation means and the target member are disposed movably on the base member, the combination of the displacements of the two allows the light irradiation means to affect the target member. It is possible to increase variations in the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the visual appearance of the player, and it is possible to make the game more interesting to the player.

The gaming machine M7 includes a driving means for displacing the target member by applying a driving force thereto, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. A gaming machine M8, characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M7, the gaming machine M8 is provided with a driving means for displacing the target member by applying a driving force to the target member, and the light irradiation means is configured to displace the target member by applying a driving force to the target member. Since the member is displaced together with the target member by being brought into contact with the member, it can also be used as a driving means for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the light irradiation means. can.

Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6, and A gaming machine K1 in any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6, and A gaming machine K2 in any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6, and A gaming machine K3 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
A gaming machine is known which includes a ball entry unit that is provided with a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is disposed. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that space on the front side of the gaming board is wasted.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively utilize the space in front of the gaming board.
<Means>
To achieve this objective, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 includes a ball entry unit that includes a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and and a game board on which the unit is arranged, the game board has an opening formed in the board thickness direction, and the ball entry unit is connected to the ball entry port and the ball entry port. a first unit disposed on the front side of the game board, and a first unit disposed through the opening of the game board on the back side of the first unit; a second unit having a second passage connected to the second unit.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which at least a part of the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the second unit has a smaller external size than the first unit. and is arranged at a position overlapping the first unit when viewed from the front.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in which at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light-transmitting material.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the space in front of the gaming board can be effectively utilized.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.
<Sign>
10 pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board
60 base board (gaming board)
60a through hole (opening)
64 1st prize opening (1st aisle)
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance, 1st ball entrance)
65a Specific winning hole (second ball entrance)
410 base member
420L left displacement member (displacement member)
420R right displacement member (displacement member)
422 connecting hole (first part or second part)
423 sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 bogie member (first member or second member)
481 first drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 Projecting member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L lower left rack (first member or second member)
488R lower right rack (first member or second member)
488b drive pin (connection pin)
491 second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610, 5610, 6610 base member
611, 5611, 6612 Back base (base member)
612, 5612 front base (base member)
612g holding pin (protrusion)
6612p opening
6612r shielding member
620, 2620 , 3620, 5620, 6620 Projection plate member (target member, light transmitting member)
622, 6622 reflection section
630, 3630 gear member (outer edge member, output increasing means)
631 teeth (curved rack gear)
640, 2640 , 3640 groove forming member (outer edge member, output increasing means)
641, 2641 guide groove
651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiation means)
652 board member
653 1st block (block)
653b1 insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 2nd block (block)
654b1 insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 drive motor (drive means)
820 front base (part of the base member)
830 back base (part of the base member)
850 displacement member
863 transmission gear (rotating member)
863c protruding part
870 connection member
880 drive motor (drive means)
940 front unit (first member, first unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
942c Second ball throwing part (part of the first passage member)
943 Front base (main body member)
943a rolling part (first passage, part of first passage member)
945 wing member (first opening/closing member)
945b protrusion (protrusion)
951 plate member (second opening/closing member, opening/closing member)
953a1 opening (ball entrance)
953a2 rolling surface
953c annular projection (seat)
954b recess (guide groove)
954c protrusion (second guide means)
954c2 side part
954c3 side edge
954d standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 Second guide surface (first inclined surface)
954d2 Second side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a recessed part (passage member)
957a1 main body
957a 2 shaft part (drive shaft)
960 drive unit (third member)
961a main body
961b shaft part (drive shaft)
962e Arm part (second engaging part)
962f wall section (covered surface section)
962g protruding part (first engaging part)
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance, 2nd ball entrance)
965, 18965 transmission member (rotating member, part of the first transmission mechanism)
965a tip (part of the first part)
965b rotating part (part of the first part)
965c rotating shaft
965d protrusion (second part)
965e insertion part (contact part)
966, 8966, 11966, 12966, 14966, 18966 displacement member (slide member, part of first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 sliding groove
966a5 slope
8966a6 recess (receiving part)
966b2 One side abutted part
966b3 Other side abutted part
11968c, 18996g blade part (friction part)
12966c2 second blade part (part of cutting member)
6683 blade part (part of cutting member)
970 throwing unit (second unit)
980 distribution unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b side wall part (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b inclined part (bending part)
982h1, 982j1 guide part (erected part)
985e1, 985f1 inflow passage (second connection passage)
900 passage unit (second downstream unit)
991c1, 991d1 recessed part (receiving part)
TR0 ball throwing passage (part of the second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1 1st passage (part of 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
TR2 2nd passage (part of 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
SE1 detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 detection device (detection sensor)
HS1 wiring
HS2 wiring
HS3 wiring
SP biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 screw
C collar (support ring)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center range)

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board 60 Base board (game board)
60a Through hole (opening)
64 1st prize opening (1st aisle)
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance, 1st ball entrance)
65a Specified prize opening (second ball entrance)
410 Base member 420L Left displacement member (displacement member)
420R Right displacement member (displacement member)
422 Connection hole (first part or second part)
423 Sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 Truck member (first member or second member)
481 First drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 Projecting member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L Lower left rack (first member or second member)
488R Lower right rack (first member or second member)
488b Drive pin (connection pin)
491 Second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610,5610,6610 Base member 611,5611,6612 Back base (base member)
612,5612 Front base (base member)
612g holding pin (protrusion)
6612p Opening 6612r Shielding member 620, 2620, 3620, 5620, 6620 Projection plate member (target member, light transmitting member)
622, 6622 Reflector 630, 3630 Gear member (outer edge member, output increasing means)
631 Teeth (curved rack gear)
640, 2640, 3640 Groove forming member (outer edge member, output increasing means)
641,2641 Guide groove 651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiation means)
652 Substrate member 653 First block (block body)
653b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 2nd block (block body)
654b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 Drive motor (drive means)
820 Front base (part of base member)
830 Back base (part of base member)
850 Displacement member 863 Transmission gear (rotating member)
863c Projection part 870 Connection member 880 Drive motor (drive means)
940 Front unit (first member, first unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
942c Second ball throwing part (part of first passage member)
943 Front base (main body member)
943a Rolling part (first passage, part of first passage member)
945 Wing member (first opening/closing member)
945b Protrusion (Protrusion)
951 Plate member (second opening/closing member, opening/closing member)
953a1 Opening (ball entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Annular projection (seat)
954b Recess (guide groove)
954c Projection part (second guide means)
954c2 Side portion 954c3 Side edge portion 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 Second guide surface (first inclined surface)
954d2 Second side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Recessed portion (passage member)
957a1 Main body part 957a2 Shaft part (drive shaft)
960 Drive unit (third member)
961a Main body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962e Arm part (second engaging part)
962f Wall part (covered surface part)
962g Projection part (first engagement part)
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance, 2nd ball entrance)
965,18965 Transmission member (rotating member, part of first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (part of the first part)
965b Rotating part (part of the first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Projection part (second part)
965e Insertion part (contact part)
966, 8966, 11966, 12966, 14966, 18966 Displacement member (slide member, part of first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Recess (receiving part)
966b2 One side abutted part 966b3 Other side abutted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 Second blade part (part of cutting member)
6683 Blade (part of cutting member)
970 Throwing unit (second unit)
980 Sorting unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall part (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b Inclined part (bending part)
982h1, 982j1 Guide part (erected part)
985e1, 985f1 Inflow passage (second connection passage)
900 Passage unit (second downstream unit)
991c1, 991d1 Recessed part (receiving part)
TR0 Ball throwing passage (part of the second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1 1st passage (part of 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
TR2 2nd passage (part of 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
SE1 Detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 Detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 Detection device (detection sensor)
HS1 Wiring HS2 Wiring HS3 Wiring SP Biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 Screw C Collar (support ring)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center range)

Claims (3)

A game machine comprising a ball entry unit having a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged,
The game board has an opening formed in the thickness direction,
The ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and a first unit disposed on the front side of the game board, and a first unit provided on the back side of the first unit. a second unit having a second passage arranged through an opening of a game board and connected to the first passage. At least a portion of the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and is arranged at a position overlapping the first unit when viewed from the front. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that: 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed from a light-transmitting material.

Images